- Moffat Pipe
160GLC and 180GLC
Excavator
*OMT306200*
(PIN: 1FF160GX_ _E055001— )
(PIN: 1FF180GX_ _E020001— )
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
160GLC and 180GLC Excavator
(PIN: 1FF160GX_ _E055001— )
(PIN: 1FF180GX_ _E020001— )
OMT306200 ISSUE H4
(ENGLISH)
CALIFORNIA
Proposition 65 Warning
Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents
are known to the State of California to cause cancer,
birth defects, and other reproductive harm.
If this product contains a gasoline engine:
WARNING
The engine exhaust from this product contains
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm.
The State of California requires the above two warnings.
Additional Proposition 65 Warnings can be found in this manual.
Worldwide Construction
And Forestry Division
LITHO IN U.S.A.
Introduction
Foreword
READ THIS MANUAL carefully to learn how to operate
and service your machine correctly. Failure to do so
could result in personal injury or equipment damage. This
manual and safety signs on your machine may also be
available in other languages; see your John Deere dealer
to order.
THIS MANUAL SHOULD BE CONSIDERED a permanent
part of your machine and should remain with the machine
when you sell it.
MEASUREMENTS in this manual are given in both
metric and customary U.S. unit equivalents. Use only
correct replacement parts and fasteners. Metric and inch
fasteners may require a specific metric or inch wrench.
RIGHT-HAND AND LEFT-HAND sides are determined by
facing in the direction of forward travel.
WRITE PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS (P.I.N.)
in the Machine Numbers section. Accurately record all the
numbers to help in tracing the machine if machine is ever
stolen. Your dealer also needs these numbers when you
order parts. File the identification numbers in a secure
place off the machine.
WARRANTY is provided as part of John Deere's support
program for customers who operate and maintain their
equipment as described in this manual. The warranty is
explained on the warranty certificate or statement which
you should have received from your dealer.
This warranty provides you the assurance that John
Deere will back its products where defects appear within
the warranty period. In some circumstances, John Deere
also provides field improvements, often without charge
to the customer, even if the product is out of warranty.
Should the equipment be abused, or modified to change
its performance beyond the original factory specifications,
the warranty will become void and field improvements
may be denied. Setting fuel delivery above specifications
or otherwise overpowering machines will result in such
action.
If you are not the original owner of this machine, it is in
your interest to contact your local John Deere dealer to
inform them of this unit's serial number. This will help John
Deere notify you of any issues or product improvements.
VD76477,00004EB -19-07JUL14-1/1
081214
PN=2
Introduction
Manual Identification—READ THIS FIRST!
TX1160624 —UN—13MAY14
IMPORTANT: Use only supporting manuals
designated for your specific machine. If
incorrect manual is chosen, improper service
may occur. Verify product identification number
(PIN) when choosing the correct manual.
Choosing the Correct Supporting Manuals
John Deere excavators are available in different machine
configurations based on the various markets into which
they are sold. Different supporting manuals exist for
different machine configurations.
PIN Plate Location—Early Production
When necessary, product identification numbers are listed
on the front covers of excavator manuals. These numbers
are used to identify the correct supporting manual for your
machine.
TX1156411 —UN—27MAR14
Product Identification Number
The product identification number (PIN) plate (1) is located
on the front, right corner of the cab. Each machine has a
17-character PIN (2) shown on PIN plate.
TX1160834 —UN—16MAY14
PIN Plate Location—Late Production
TX1160690 —UN—16MAY14
Example of PIN Plate
Example of PIN Plate
1— PIN Plate
Continued on next page
2— 17-Character PIN
OUT4001,0000A72 -19-21MAY14-1/3
081214
PN=3
Introduction
The following is an example for a machine that meets
Interim Tier 4 and Stage III B emission levels:
The PIN identifies the producing factory, machine model
number, machine option, year of manufacture, engine
emission level, and machine serial number.
17-Character PIN Examples
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
F
F
1
6
0
G
X
9
_
_
• (1—3) World Code: Identifies location where machine
.............
...............
1T0 ...............
1FF ...............
1F9 ...............
Davenport Works
Thibodaux Works
Dubuque Works
Deere—Hitachi (Kernersville, NC, USA)
Deere—Hitachi (Indaiatuba, São Paulo, Brazil)
• (4—8) Machine Model Identifier:
14
15
16
17
5
5
0
0
1
..................... Check Letter (variable)
Represents engine
emission certification.
................ Machine Model Identifier
E
NOTE: Characters 7—8 identify series and major
machine configuration options. These characters
will change from one machine to another.
X
13
0
• (11) Engine Emission Code:
Identifies model
number.
160G
12
E
Identifies year of
machine manufacture.
_ ..................... Manufacturing Year Code (variable)
B .................. 2011
C ................. 2012
D ................. 2013
E .................. 2014
1FF .................. World Code (manufacturing location)
1DW
11
• (10) Manufacturing Year Code:
is manufactured.
1T8
10
_
..................... Machine Option Code
X .................. Base Machine
R ................. HYEX Military Excavators
•
• (9) Check Letter: This is a random character assigned
.....................
C .................
D .................
E ..................
F ..................
Engine Emission Code
Tier 2 and Stage II
Tier 3 and Stage III A
Interim Tier 4 and Stage III B
Final Tier 4 and Stage IV
(12—17) Machine Serial Number: Identifies machine
serial number. This character will change from one
machine to another.
055001
............. Machine Serial Number
by the factory. This is not used in machine identification.
Continued on next page
OUT4001,0000A72 -19-21MAY14-2/3
081214
PN=4
Introduction
Engine Model Number Identification
TX1105031 —UN—07JAN12
The engine serial number plate (3) is located on the
engine behind the open crankcase ventilation (OCV) filter.
Each engine has a 9-character engine model number (4)
shown on this plate.
Engine Emissions Level Identification
The 9-character engine model number corresponds to a
specific engine emissions level.
Engine Model Number
Engine Emissions Level
4045HT068
Interim Tier 4/Stage III B
4045HT065
Tier 3/Stage III A
Engine Serial Number Plate Location
3
3— Engine Serial Number Plate
4
4— 9-Character Engine Model
Number
TX1100222 —UN—03NOV11
Engine Serial Number
*PE4045R123456*
4045HT068
DEERE & COMPANY
MOLINE, ILLINOIS
MADE IN MEXICO
Engine Serial Number Plate (Interim Tier 4/Stage III B)
3
4
TX1100776 —UN—11NOV11
Engine Serial Number
*PE4045R123456*
4045HT065
DEERE & COMPANY
MOLINE, ILLINOIS
MADE IN MEXICO
Engine Serial Number Plate (Tier 3/Stage III A)
OUT4001,0000A72 -19-21MAY14-3/3
IMPORTANT
Warranty will not apply to engine and drivetrain failures
resulting from unauthorized adjustments to this engine.
Unauthorized adjustments are in violation of the emissions
regulations applicable to this engine and may result in
substantial fines and penalties.
VD76477,000104D -19-27JUN12-1/1
081214
PN=5
Introduction
EPA Non-road Emissions Control Warranty Statement—Compression Ignition
DXLOGOV1 —UN—28APR09
U.S. AND CANADA EMISSION CONTROL WARRANTY STATEMENT
YOUR WARRANTY RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS
To determine if the John Deere engine qualifies for the additional warranties set forth below, look for the "Emissions Control Information" label
located on the engine. If the engine is operated in the United States or Canada and the Emissions Control information label states: "This engine
complies with US EPA regulations for nonroad and stationary diesel engines”, or “This engine conforms to US EPA nonroad compression-ignition
regulations”, refer to the "U.S. and Canada Emission Control Warranty Statement." If the engine is operated in California, and the label states: "This
engine complies with US EPA and CARB regulations for nonroad diesel engines”, or “This engine conforms to US EPA and California nonroad
compression-ignition emission regulations”, also refer to the "California Emission Control Warranty Statement.”
Warranties stated on this certificate refer only to emissions-related parts and components of your engine. The complete engine warranty, less
emissions-related parts and components, is provided separately. If you have any questions about your warranty rights and responsibilities,
you should contact John Deere at 1-319-292-5400.
JOHN DEERE'S WARRANTY RESPONSIBILITY
John Deere warrants to the ultimate purchaser and each subsequent purchaser that this off-road diesel engine including all parts of its
emission-control system was designed, built and equipped so as to conform at the time of the sale with Section 213 of the Clean Air Act and is free
from defects in materials and workmanship which would cause the engine to fail to conform with applicable US EPA regulations for a period of five
years from the date the engine is placed into service or 3,000 hours of operation, whichever first occurs.
Where a warrantable condition exists, John Deere will repair or replace, as it elects, any part or component with a defect in materials or
workmanship that would increase the engine’s emissions of any regulated pollutant within the stated warranty period at no cost to you, including
expenses related to diagnosing and repairing or replacing emission-related parts. Warranty coverage is subject to the limitations and exclusions
set forth herein. Emission- related components include engine parts developed to control emissions related to the following:
Air-Induction System
Fuel System
Ignition System
Exhaust Gas Recirculation Systems
Aftertreatment Devices
Crankcase Ventilation Valves
Sensors
Engine Electronic Control Units
EMISSION WARRANTY EXCLUSIONS
John Deere may deny warranty claims for malfunctions or failures caused by:
• Non-performance of maintenance requirements listed in the Operator’s Manual
• The use of the engine/equipment in a manner for which it was not designed
• Abuse, neglect, improper maintenance or unapproved modifications or alterations
• Accidents for which it does not have responsibility or by acts of God
The off-road diesel engine is designed to operate on diesel fuel as specified in the Fuels, Lubricants and Coolants section in the Operators Manual.
Use of any other fuel can harm the emissions control system of the engine/equipment and is not approved for use.
To the extent permitted by law John Deere is not liable for damage to other engine components caused by a failure of an emission-related
part, unless otherwise covered by standard warranty.
THIS WARRANTY IS EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY
OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. REMEDIES UNDER THIS WARRANTY ARE LIMITED TO THE
PROVISIONS OF MATERIAL AND SERVICES AS SPECIFIED HEREIN. WHERE PERMITTED BY LAW, NEITHER JOHN DEERE NOR ANY
AUTHORIZED JOHN DEERE ENGINE DISTRIBUTOR, DEALER, OR REPAIR FACILITY OR ANY COMPANY AFFILIATED WITH JOHN
DEERE WILL BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
Emission_CI_EPA (18Dec09)
Continued on next page
DX,EMISSIONS,EPA -19-12DEC12-1/2
081214
PN=6
TS1721 —UN—15JUL13
Introduction
DX,EMISSIONS,EPA -19-12DEC12-2/2
081214
PN=7
Introduction
CARB Non-road Emissions Control Warranty Statement—Compression Ignition
DXLOGOV1 —UN—28APR09
CALIFORNIA EMISSIONS CONTROL WARRANTY STATEMENT
YOUR WARRANTY RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS
To determine if the John Deere engine qualifies for the additional warranties set forth below, look for the “Emission Control Information” label located
on the engine. If the engine is operated in the United States or Canada and the engine label states: “This engine complies with US EPA regulations
for nonroad and stationary diesel engines”, or “This engine complies with US EPA regulations for stationary emergency diesel engines”, refer to the
“U.S. and Canada Emission Control Warranty Statement.” If the engine is operated in California, and the engine label states: “This engine complies
with US EPA and CARB regulations for nonroad diesel engines” also refer to the “California Emissions Control Warranty Statement.”
Warranties stated on this certificate refer only to emissions-related parts and components of your engine. The complete engine warranty, less
emission-related parts and components, is provided separately. If you have any questions about your warranty rights and responsibilities,
you should contact John Deere at 1-319-292-5400.
CALIFORNIA EMISSIONS CONTROL WARRANTY STATEMENT:
The California Air Resources Board (CARB) is pleased to explain the emission-control system warranty on 2013 through 2015 off-road diesel
engines. In California, new off-road engines must be designed, built and equipped to meet the State’s stringent anti-smog standards. John Deere
must warrant the emission control system on your engine for the periods of time listed below provided there has been no abuse, neglect or
improper maintenance of your engine.
Your emission control system may include parts such as the fuel injection system and the air induction system. Also included may be hoses, belts,
connectors and other emission-related assemblies.
John Deere warrants to the ultimate purchaser and each subsequent purchaser that this off-road diesel engine was designed, built, and equipped
so as to conform at the time of sale with all applicable regulations adopted by CARB and is free from defects in materials and workmanship which
would cause the failure of a warranted part to be identical in all material respects to the part as described in John Deere's application for certification
for a period of five years from the date the engine is delivered to an ultimate purchaser or 3,000 hours of operation, whichever occurs first for all
engines rated at 19 kW and greater. In the absence of a device to measure hours of use, the engine shall be warranted for a period of five years.
EMISSIONS WARRANTY EXCLUSIONS:
John Deere may deny warranty claims for failures caused by the use of an add-on or modified part which has not been exempted by the CARB. A
modified part is an aftermarket part intended to replace an original emission-related part which is not functionally identical in all respects and which
in any way affects emissions. An add-on part is any aftermarket part which is not a modified part or a replacement part.
In no event will John Deere, any authorized engine distributor, dealer, or repair facility, or any company affiliated with John Deere be liable
for incidental or consequential damage.
Continued on next page
DX,EMISSIONS,CARB -19-12DEC12-1/4
081214
PN=8
Introduction
JOHN DEERE'S WARRANTY RESPONSIBILITY:
Where a warrantable condition exists, John Deere will repair or replace, as it elects, your off-road diesel engine at no cost to you, including
diagnosis, parts or labor. Warranty coverage is subject to the limitations and exclusions set forth herein. The off-road diesel engine is warranted
for a period of five years from the date the engine is delivered to an ultimate purchaser or 3,000 hours of operation, whichever occurs first.
The following are emissions-related parts:
Air Induction System
• Intake manifold
• Turbocharger
• Charge air cooler
Fuel Metering system
• Fuel injection system
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
• EGR valve
Catalyst or Thermal Reactor Systems
Emission control labels
Advanced Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) Controls
Particulate Controls
• NOx absorbers and catalysts
SCR systems and urea containers/dispensing
• Any device used to capture particulate
emissions
systems
• Any device used in the regeneration of the
capturing system
Miscellaneous Items used in Above Systems
• Enclosures and manifolding
• Electronic control units, sensors, actuators,
• Smoke Puff Limiters
wiring harnesses, hoses, connectors, clamps,
Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) System
fittings, gasket, mounting hardware
• PCV valve
• Oil filler cap
• Catalytic converter
• Exhaust manifold
Any warranted emissions-related part scheduled for replacement as required maintenance is warranted by John Deere for the period of time prior
to the first scheduled replacement point for the part. Any warranted emissions-related part not scheduled for replacement as required maintenance
or scheduled only for regular inspection is warranted by John Deere for the stated warranty period.
OWNER'S WARRANTY RESPONSIBILITIES:
As the off-road diesel engine owner you are responsible for the performance of the required maintenance listed in your Operator’s Manual. John
Deere recommends that the owner retain all receipts covering maintenance on the off-road diesel engine, but John Deere cannot deny warranty
solely for the lack of receipts or for the owner’s failure to ensure the performance of all scheduled maintenance. However, as the off-road diesel
engine owner, you should be aware that John Deere may deny you warranty coverage if your off-road diesel engine or a part has failed due to
abuse, neglect, improper maintenance or unapproved modifications.
The off-road diesel engine is designed to operate on diesel fuel as specified in the Fuels, Lubricants and Coolants section in the Operators Manual.
Use of any other fuel may result in the engine no longer operating in compliance with applicable emissions requirements.
The owner is responsible for initiating the warranty process, and should present the machine to the nearest authorized John Deere dealer as soon
as a problem is suspected. The warranty repairs should be completed by the authorized John Deere dealer as quickly as possible.
Emissions regulations require the customer to bring the unit to an authorized servicing dealer when warranty service is required. As a result, John
Deere is NOT liable for travel or mileage on emissions warranty service calls.
Emission_CI_CARB (19Sep12)
Continued on next page
DX,EMISSIONS,CARB -19-12DEC12-2/4
081214
PN=9
TS1722 —UN—17DEC12
Introduction
Continued on next page
DX,EMISSIONS,CARB -19-12DEC12-3/4
081214
PN=10
TS1723 —UN—15JUL13
Introduction
DX,EMISSIONS,CARB -19-12DEC12-4/4
081214
PN=11
Introduction
FCC Notifications to User
FCC Notification
These devices comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
These devices may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) these devices must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
These devices must be operated as supplied by John
Deere Ag Management Solutions. Any changes or
modifications made to these devices without the expressed
written approval of John Deere Ag Management Solutions
may void the user’s authority to operate these devices.
Modular Telematics Gateway and Satellite Module
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for Class B digital devices, pursuant to part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses,
and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However,
no guarantee shall be made that interference will not occur
in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by
one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit
different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV
technician for help.
MM16284,000196F -19-07JUL14-1/1
081214
PN=12
Introduction
Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR)—SOFTWARE TERMS AND CONDITIONS
IMPORTANT -- READ CAREFULLY: THIS SOFTWARE
LICENSE AGREEMENT IS A LEGAL CONTRACT
BETWEEN YOU AND THE LICENSOR ("LICENSOR")
IDENTIFIED BELOW AND GOVERNS YOUR USE OF
THE SOFTWARE DELIVERED TO YOUR MACHINE
(THE “MACHINE”).
BY INDICATING YOUR ACCEPTANCE ON A DISPLAY
ON THE MACHINE, BY INSTALLING SOFTWARE
TO THE MACHINE, OR USING SOFTWARE ON THE
MACHINE, YOU ARE ACCEPTING AND AGREEING TO
THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT WITH
RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE (THE "Software") THAT
IS DELIVERED TO YOUR MACHINE. YOU AGREE THAT
THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT, INCLUDING
THE WARRANTY DISCLAIMERS, LIMITATIONS OF
LIABILITY AND TERMINATION PROVISIONS BELOW,
IS BINDING UPON YOU, AND UPON ANY COMPANY
ON WHOSE BEHALF YOU USE THE SOFTWARE
AS WELL AS THE EMPLOYEES OF ANY SUCH
COMPANY (COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO AS
"YOU" IN THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT).
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS
AGREEMENT, OR IF YOU ARE NOT AUTHORIZED
TO ACCEPT THESE TERMS ON BEHALF OF YOUR
COMPANY OR ITS EMPLOYEES, PLEASE CLICK THE
[Decline] ICON ON THE DISPLAY ON THE MACHINE
TO DECLINE THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS.
THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT REPRESENTS THE
ENTIRE AGREEMENT CONCERNING THE SOFTWARE
BETWEEN YOU AND THE LICENSOR.
1. Delivery of Software. Software may be delivered to
your Machine by Licensor wirelessly or via an agent of
Licensor, such as a dealer. If it is delivered wirelessly,
you may be responsible for any data transmission fees
incurred due to such delivery.
2. License. Licensor hereby grants to you, and you
accept, a nonexclusive license to use the Software in
machine-readable, object code form, only as authorized
in this License Agreement and the applicable provisions
of the Operators' Manuals, which you agree to review
carefully prior to using the Software. The Software may
be used only on the Machine to which it was initially
delivered. You agree that you will not assign, sublicense,
transfer, pledge, lease, rent, or share your rights under
this License Agreement, except that you may permanently
transfer all of your rights under this License Agreement
in connection with the sale of the Machine on which the
Software covered by this Agreement is installed.
3. Licensor's Rights. You acknowledge and agree that
the Software is proprietary to Licensor and is protected
under copyright law. You further acknowledge and agree
that all right, title, and interests in and to the Software,
including associated intellectual property rights, are and
shall remain with Licensor. This License Agreement does
not convey to you any title or interest in or to the Software,
but only a limited right of use revocable in accordance
with the terms of this License Agreement. You agree
that you will not: (a) reverse assemble, reverse compile,
modify, or otherwise translate the Software, or attempt to
defeat the copyright protection and application enabling
mechanisms therein; (b) copy or reproduce the Software;
or, (b) remove or obliterate any copyright, trademark or
other proprietary rights notices from the Software. You
also agree not to permit any third party acting under your
control to do any of the foregoing.
4. License Fees. The license fees paid by you, if any, are
paid in consideration of the licenses granted under this
License Agreement.
5. Limited Warranty. Licensor warrants, for your
benefit alone and not for the benefit of any other party,
that during the "Warranty Period" defined below, the
Software will operate substantially in accordance with the
applicable functional specifications ("Specifications")
set forth in the Operators' Manuals. If, prior to expiration
of the Warranty Period, the Software fails to perform
substantially in accordance with the Specifications, you
may return the Machine to the place of purchase for
repair or replacement of the non-performing Software.
The Warranty Period is ninety (90) days from the date of
installation of the Software or the duration of the warranty
period of the component of the Machine on which the
Software is installed, whichever is longer. The Software
Warranty Period does not affect the warranty period of the
Machine itself or any component thereof.
6. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES. YOU HEREBY
AGREE THAT THE LIMITED WARRANTY PROVIDED
ABOVE (THE "LIMITED WARRANTY") CONSTITUTES
YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY
PROBLEM WHATSOEVER WITH THE SOFTWARE.
EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN THE LIMITED WARRANTY,
THE SOFTWARE IS LICENSED “AS IS,” AND
LICENSOR, ITS AFFILIATES AND THIRD PARTY
SUPPLIERS EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM AND YOU
EXPRESSLY WAIVE, RELEASE AND RENOUNCE ALL
WARRANTIES ARISING BY LAW OR OTHERWISE
WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE; ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY ARISING
FROM COURSE OF PERFORMANCE, COURSE OF
DEALING OR TRADE USAGE; ANY WARRANTY OF
TITLE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT; AND, ANY OTHER
WARRANTY ARISING UNDER ANY THEORY OF
LAW, INCLUDING TORT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, CONTRACT OR OTHER LEGAL OR
EQUITABLE THEORY. NO REPRESENTATION OR
OTHER AFFIRMATION OF FACT INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, STATEMENTS REGARDING SUITABILITY
FOR USE, SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE A WARRANTY
BY LICENSOR OR ANY OF ITS AFFILIATES OR THIRD
PARTY SUPPLIERS. LICENSOR DOES NOT WARRANT
THAT THE SOFTWARE IS ERROR-FREE OR WILL
OPERATE WITHOUT INTERRUPTION.
Continued on next page
OUT4001,00006C5 -19-08NOV10-1/4
081214
PN=13
Introduction
7. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. EXCEPT AS SET
FORTH IN THE LIMITED WARRANTY, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL LICENSOR, ITS AFFILIATES
OR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO
YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTIES FOR DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, INCLUDING ANY LOSS
OR DAMAGE CAUSED BY THE SOFTWARE; ANY
PARTIAL OR TOTAL FAILURE OF THE SOFTWARE;
PERFORMANCE, NONPERFORMANCE OR DELAYS
IN CONNECTION WITH ANY INSTALLATION,
MAINTENANCE, WARRANTY OR REPAIRS OF THE
SOFTWARE, DAMAGES FOR CROP LOSS, DAMAGE
TO LAND, LOST PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS OR
LOSS OF GOODWILL, LOSS OF USE OF EQUIPMENT
OR SERVICES OR DAMAGES TO BUSINESS OR
REPUTATION ARISING FROM THE PERFORMANCE
OR NON-PERFORMANCE OF ANY ASPECT OF THIS
AGREEMENT, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR
OTHERWISE, AND WHETHER OR NOT LICENSOR,
ITS AFFILIATES OR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS
HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL LICENSOR’S
CUMULATIVE LIABILITY TO YOU OR TO ANY OTHER
PARTY FOR ANY LOSSES OR DAMAGES RESULTING
FROM ANY CLAIMS, LAWSUITS, DEMANDS, OR
ACTIONS ARISING FROM OR RELATING TO USE OF
THE SOFTWARE EXCEED YOUR TOTAL PAYMENT
FOR THE MACHINE AND FOR THE LICENSE OF THE
SOFTWARE.
8. Termination of License. Licensor may terminate the
license granted under this Agreement upon written notice
of termination provided to you if you violate any material
term of this Agreement pertaining to your use of the
Software or Licensor's rights, including, without limitation,
the provisions of Sections 2 and 3 above.
9. Compliance with Law. You agree that you will use the
Software in accordance with United States law and the
laws of the country in which you are located, as applicable,
including foreign trade control laws and regulations. The
Software may be subject to export and other foreign
trade controls restricting re-sales and/or transfers to
other countries and parties. By accepting the terms of
this Agreement, you acknowledge that you understand
that the Software may be so controlled, including, but
not limited to, by the Export Administration Regulations
and/or the foreign trade control regulations of the Treasury
Department of the United States. Any other provision
of this Agreement to the contrary notwithstanding, you
agree that the Software will not be resold, re-exported or
otherwise transferred. The Software remains subject to
applicable U.S. laws.
10. Indemnification. You agree to defend, indemnify
and hold Licensor, its affiliates and third party supplier,
and their, officers, directors, employees, agents and
representatives (each an "Indemnified Party"), harmless
from and against all claims, demands proceedings,
injuries, liabilities, losses, or costs and expenses (including
reasonable legal fees) brought by any third party against
any such persons arising from or in connection with your
use of the Software, regardless of whether such losses
are caused, wholly or partially, by any negligence, breach
of contract or other fault of an Indemnified Party.
11. Costs of Litigation. If any claim or action is brought
by either party to this License Agreement against the other
party regarding the subject matter hereof, the prevailing
party shall be entitled to recover, in addition to any other
relief granted, reasonable attorney fees and expenses
of litigation.
12. Severability and Waiver. Should any term of this
Agreement be declared void or unenforceable by any
court of competent jurisdiction, such declaration shall
have no effect on the remaining terms hereof. The failure
of either party to enforce any rights granted hereunder
or to take action against the other party in the event of
any breach hereunder shall not be deemed a waiver
by that party as to subsequent enforcement of rights of
subsequent actions in the event of future breaches.
13. Language Clause. If you are a resident of Canada
at the time you accept this Agreement, then the parties
hereby acknowledge that they have required this
Agreement, and all other documents relating hereto,
be drawn up in the English language only. Les parties
reconnaissent avoir demandé que le présent contrat ainsi
que toute autre entente ou avis requis ou permis à être
conclu ou donné en vertu des stipulations du présent
contrat, soient rédigés en langue anglaise seulement. If
you are a resident of any country other than the United
States, Canada, Great Britain, Australia or New Zealand
then you agree as follows: there may be a translated
version of this Agreement. If there is an inconsistency
or contradiction between the translated version and the
English version of this Agreement, the English version of
this Agreement shall control.
14. Assignment by Licensor. Licensor may assign this
Agreement without your prior consent to any company
or entity affiliated with Licensor, or by an assignment
associated with a corporate restructuring, merger or
acquisition.
15. Governing Law and Forum. This Agreement will
be governed by and construed in accordance with the
substantive laws identified in the table in Section 18, below
The respective courts of the venue identified in the table
in Section 18, below, for the location of the Machine shall
have non-exclusive jurisdiction over all disputes relating
to this Agreement. This Agreement will not be governed
by the conflict of law rules of any jurisdiction or the United
Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale
of Goods, the application of which is expressly excluded.
16. Specific Exceptions.
Continued on next page
OUT4001,00006C5 -19-08NOV10-2/4
081214
PN=14
Introduction
16.1 Limited Warranty for Users Residing in European
Economic Area Countries or Switzerland. If you
obtained the Software in any European Economic Area
country or Switzerland, and you usually reside in such
country, then Section 6 does not apply, instead, Licensor
warrants that the Software provides the functionalities
set forth in the Operators Manuals (the "agreed upon
functionalities") for the Warranty Period. As used
in this Section, "Warranty Period" means one (1)
year. Non-substantial variation from the agreed upon
functionalities shall not be considered and does not
establish any warranty rights. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY
DOES NOT APPLY TO SOFTWARE PROVIDED TO
YOU FREE OF CHARGE, FOR EXAMPLE, UPDATES,
OR SOFTWARE THAT HAS BEEN ALTERED BY YOU,
TO THE EXTENT SUCH ALTERATIONS CAUSED A
DEFECT. To make a warranty claim, during the Warranty
Period you must return, at our expense, the Software and
proof of purchase to the location where you obtained it.
If the functionalities of the Software vary substantially
from the agreed upon functionalities, Licensor is entitled
-- by way of re-performance and at its own discretion -to repair or replace the Software. If this fails, you are
entitled to a reduction of the purchase price (reduction)
or to cancel the purchase agreement (rescission). For
further warranty information, please contact Licensor at
the address listed in Section 18.
16.2 Limitation of Liability for Users Residing in
European Economic Area Countries or Switzerland.
(a) If you obtained the Software in any European
Economic Area country or Switzerland, and you usually
reside in such country, then Sections 7 and 10 do not
apply, Instead, Licensor's statutory liability for damages
shall be limited as follows: (a) Licensor shall be liable only
up to the amount of damages as typically foreseeable
at the time of entering into this Agreement in respect
of damages caused by a slightly negligent breach of a
material contractual obligation and (b) Licensor shall
not be liable for damages caused by a slightly negligent
breach of a non-material contractual obligation.
(b) The aforesaid limitation of liability shall not apply to any
mandatory statutory liability, in particular, to liability under
the German Product Liability Act, liability for assuming a
specific guarantee or liability for culpably caused personal
injuries.
(c) You are required to take all reasonable measures to
avoid and reduce damages, in particular to make back-up
copies of the Software and your computer data subject to
the provisions of this Agreement.
17. Representations of Licensee. BY ACCEPTING
THIS AGREEMENT, YOU: (A) ACKNOWLEDGE
THAT YOU HAVE READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS
AGREEMENT; (B) REPRESENT THAT YOU HAVE THE
AUTHORITY TO ENTER INTO THIS AGREEMENT; (C)
AGREE THAT THIS AGREEMENT IS ENFORCEABLE
AGAINST YOU AND ANY LEGAL ENTITY THAT
OBTAINED THE SOFTWARE AND ON WHOSE BEHALF
IT IS USED; AND, (D) AGREE TO PERFORM THE
OBLIGATIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT.
18. Identification of Licensor and Notices. The
Licensor is the entity identified in the table below. All
notices to Licensor shall be sent by certified or registered
mail to the corresponding address for the Licensor given
below. In each case a copy of the notice shall also be
sent to John Deere Intelligent Solutions Group, ATTN:
Legal, 4140 114th Street Urbandale, IA 50322 U.S.A. All
notices to Licensor shall be effective upon receipt. All
notices required to be given to you shall, in Licensor’s sole
discretion, either be sent via certified or registered mail
to the address given to Licensor in connection with your
purchase of the Machine. Either method of notification
used by Licensor shall be effective upon dispatch. You
agree to notify Licensor of any change in your address in
the manner set forth above.
Place of Purchase
Address
Governing Law
Venue
United States of America
John Deere Shared Services, Inc.
One John Deere Place
Moline, IL 61265 U.S.A.
State of Illinois, USA
Rock Island County, Illinois, USA
Argentina
Industrias John Deere Argentina, S.A.
Casilla de Correo 80
Rosario (Santa Fe), 2000, Argentina
Province of Santa Fe, Argentina
Province of Santa Fe, Argentina
Australia or New Zealand
John Deere Limited (Australia)
State of Queensland, Australia
P.O. Box 2022
Crestmead, Queensland, Australia 4132
State of Queensland, Australia
Canada
John Deere Limited
295 Hunter Road
P.O. Box 1000
Grimsby, ON L9K 1M3
Province of Ontario, Canada
Province of Ontario, Canada
Chile
John Deere Water, S.A.
Cerro Santa Lucia 9990
Quilicura, Santiago, Chile
Province of Santiago, Chile
Province of Santiago, Chile
Mexico
Industrias John Deere, S.A. de C.V.
Boulevard Diaz Ordaz #500
Garza Garcia
Nuevo Leon 66210, Mexico
State of Nuevo Leon, Mexico
State of Nuevo Leon, Mexico
Continued on next page
OUT4001,00006C5 -19-08NOV10-3/4
081214
PN=15
Introduction
Europe
ETIC
Strassburgerallee 5
67657 Kaiserslautern, Germany
Federal Republic of Germany
Kaiserslautern, Germany
Other
The John Deere entity identified
for the location of your Machine
on www.JDLink.com.
The John Deere entity identified
for the location of your Machine
on www.JDLink.com.
The John Deere entity identified
for the location of your Machine
on www.JDLink.com.
OUT4001,00006C5 -19-08NOV10-4/4
Technical Information Feedback Form
We need your help to continually improve our technical
publications. Please copy this page and FAX or mail your
comments, ideas and improvements.
SEND TO:
John Deere Dubuque Works
18600 South John Deere Road
Attn: Publications, Dept. 324
Dubuque, IA 52004-0538
USA
FAX NUMBER: 1-563-589-5800 (USA)
Publication Number:
Page Number:
Ideas, Comments:
Name:
Phone:
Email Address:
THANK YOU!
TX,TM,FAX -19-03JUL01-1/1
081214
PN=16
Contents
Page
Page
Safety—Safety and Operator Conveniences
Drive Metal Pins Safely .....................................1-4-2
Clean Exhaust Filter Safely ...............................1-4-3
Safety and Operator Convenience Features .....1-1-1
Safety—General Precautions
Safety—Safety Signs
Recognize Safety Information ...........................1-2-1
Follow Safety Instructions..................................1-2-1
Operate Only If Qualified ...................................1-2-1
Wear Protective Equipment...............................1-2-2
Avoid Unauthorized Machine Modifications.......1-2-2
Control Pattern Selector—If Equipped ..............1-2-2
Add Cab Guarding for Special Uses..................1-2-2
Inspect Machine ................................................1-2-3
Stay Clear of Moving Parts................................1-2-3
Avoid High-Pressure Fluids ...............................1-2-3
Avoid High-Pressure Oils ..................................1-2-4
Work In Ventilated Area.....................................1-2-4
Avoid Static Electricity Risk When Refueling.....1-2-5
Prevent Fires .....................................................1-2-5
Prevent Battery Explosions ...............................1-2-6
Handle Chemical Products Safely .....................1-2-6
Dispose of Waste Properly ................................1-2-6
Exhaust Filter Ash Handling and Disposal ........1-2-7
Prepare for Emergencies...................................1-2-7
Clean Debris from Machine ...............................1-2-7
Safety Signs ......................................................1-5-1
Hydraulic Coupler Safety Signs—If
Equipped .....................................................1-5-14
Operation—Operator's Station
Pedals, Levers, and Panels...............................2-1-1
Switch Panel......................................................2-1-2
Switch Panel Functions .....................................2-1-3
Rear Left Panel..................................................2-1-4
Horn...................................................................2-1-4
Power Dig Button...............................................2-1-4
Pilot Shutoff Lever .............................................2-1-5
Left Console ......................................................2-1-5
Travel Alarm and Travel Alarm Cancel Switch ..2-1-5
Seat Heater Switch—If Equipped ......................2-1-6
Reversing Fan Switch—If Equipped..................2-1-6
Right Console ....................................................2-1-6
Exhaust Filter Parked Cleaning Switch .............2-1-7
Right Enable Switch ..........................................2-1-7
Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) Switch......2-1-8
Cab Heater and Air Conditioner ........................2-1-9
Selecting Display Between Celsius and
Fahrenheit ...................................................2-1-10
Operating the AM/FM Radio............................2-1-11
Fire Extinguisher Mounting Location ...............2-1-12
Secondary Exit Tool.........................................2-1-12
Cab Dome Light Switch ...................................2-1-13
Opening Upper Front (Secondary Exit)
Window .......................................................2-1-13
Removing and Storing the Lower Front
Window .......................................................2-1-14
Opening Cab Door Window.............................2-1-14
Opening and Closing the
Polycarbonate Type Roof Exit Cover ..........2-1-15
Adjusting the Mechanical Suspension Seat ....2-1-15
Adjusting the Air Suspension Seat—If
Equipped .....................................................2-1-16
Adjusting Pilot Control Lever Console Height ..2-1-16
Safety—Operating Precautions
Use Steps and Handholds Correctly .................1-3-1
Start Only From Operator's Seat .......................1-3-1
Use and Maintain Seat Belt ...............................1-3-1
Prevent Unintended Machine Movement ..........1-3-1
Avoid Work Site Hazards...................................1-3-2
Keep Riders Off Machine ..................................1-3-2
Avoid Backover Accidents .................................1-3-3
Inspect and Maintain ROPS ..............................1-3-3
Avoid Machine Tip Over ....................................1-3-4
Use Special Care When Lifting Objects ............1-3-4
Use Special Care When Operating ...................1-3-4
Travel Safely......................................................1-3-5
Prevent Acid Burns............................................1-3-5
Add and Operate Attachments Safely ...............1-3-5
Safety—Maintenance Precautions
Park and Prepare for Service Safely .................1-4-1
Service Cooling System Safely .........................1-4-1
Remove Paint Before Welding or Heating.........1-4-2
Make Welding Repairs Safely ...........................1-4-2
Operation—Monitor Operation
Monitor...............................................................2-2-1
Monitor Functions ..............................................2-2-2
Continued on next page
Original Instructions. All information, illustrations and specifications in this
manual are based on the latest information available at the time of publication.
The right is reserved to make changes at any time without notice.
COPYRIGHT © 2014
DEERE & COMPANY
Moline, Illinois
All rights reserved.
A John Deere ILLUSTRUCTION ® Manual
Previous Editions
Copyright © 2012, 2013
i
081214
PN=1
Contents
Page
Page
Monitor Start-Up ................................................2-2-3
Main Menu.........................................................2-2-4
Main Menu—Alarm List .....................................2-2-5
Main Menu—Air Conditioner ...........................2-2-11
Main Menu—Radio..........................................2-2-13
Main Menu—Work Mode.................................2-2-14
Main Menu—Setting Menu ..............................2-2-15
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Date and Time...2-2-16
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Attachment Name Input.........................................2-2-16
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Auto Shutdown ..2-2-17
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Auto
Exhaust Filter Cleaning ...............................2-2-18
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Sub
Meter Selection ...........................................2-2-19
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Rear
View Camera Monitor..................................2-2-20
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Display
Item Selection .............................................2-2-21
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Brightness Adjustment..........................................2-2-21
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Language ..........2-2-21
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Unit Selection ....2-2-22
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Main
Menu Sequence Change ............................2-2-22
Main Menu—Information Menu .......................2-2-23
Main Menu—Information Menu—Operation....2-2-24
Main Menu—Information
Menu—Maintenance ...................................2-2-25
Main Menu—Information
Menu—Troubleshooting ..............................2-2-25
Main Menu—Information Menu—Monitoring...2-2-26
Driving Up a Steep or Slippery Slope ..............2-3-19
Lifting ...............................................................2-3-19
Lower Boom With Engine Stopped..................2-3-20
Parking the Machine........................................2-3-21
Loading and Unloading for Transport ..............2-3-22
Towing Machine...............................................2-3-23
Lifting the Machine ..........................................2-3-23
Maintenance—Machine
Diesel Fuel.........................................................3-1-1
Diesel Fuel Specifications .................................3-1-1
Lubricity of Diesel Fuel ......................................3-1-2
Handling and Storing Diesel Fuel ......................3-1-2
Biodiesel Fuel ....................................................3-1-3
Testing Diesel Fuel ............................................3-1-4
Fuel Filters.........................................................3-1-4
Minimizing the Effect of Cold Weather
on Diesel Engines .........................................3-1-5
Alternative and Synthetic Lubricants .................3-1-6
Mixing of Lubricants...........................................3-1-6
Lubricant Storage ..............................................3-1-6
John Deere Break-In Plus™ Engine Oil ............3-1-7
Diesel Engine Oil—Interim Tier 4 and
Stage III B Engines .......................................3-1-8
Engine Oil and Filter Service Intervals
— Interim Tier 4, Final Tier 4, Stage
IIIB, and Stage IV Engines ............................3-1-9
Oil Filters ...........................................................3-1-9
Hydraulic Oil ....................................................3-1-10
Swing Gear Case and Travel Gear
Case Oils.....................................................3-1-11
Pump Drive Gear Case Oil ..............................3-1-11
Track Adjuster, Working Tool Pivot,
Swing Bearing, and Swing Bearing
Gear Grease ...............................................3-1-12
Diesel Engine Coolant (engine with
wet sleeve cylinder liners) ...........................3-1-13
Drain Intervals for Diesel Engine Coolant........3-1-14
John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Coolant
Extender......................................................3-1-14
Supplemental Coolant Additives......................3-1-15
Operating in Warm Temperature Climates ......3-1-15
Additional Information About Diesel
Engine Coolants and John Deere
COOL-GARD™ II Coolant Extender ...........3-1-16
Testing Diesel Engine Coolant.........................3-1-17
Disposing of Coolant .......................................3-1-17
Operation—Operating the Machine
Before Starting Work .........................................2-3-1
Operator's Daily Machine Check
Before Starting ..............................................2-3-1
Engine Break-In Period .....................................2-3-2
Starting Engine ..................................................2-3-3
Cold Weather Start Aid......................................2-3-4
Cold Weather Warmup ......................................2-3-5
Travel Pedals and Levers..................................2-3-6
Exhaust Filter.....................................................2-3-7
Exhaust Filter Parked Cleaning .........................2-3-9
Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR)
Software Delivery Process ..........................2-3-10
Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR)
Operation ....................................................2-3-11
Locking the Hydraulic Coupler to the
Attachment—If Equipped ............................2-3-13
Unlocking the Hydraulic Coupler From
the Attachment—If Equipped ......................2-3-15
Control Lever Pattern Operation......................2-3-16
Mechanical Control Lever Pattern
Selector—If Equipped .................................2-3-17
Control Lever Pattern Conversion ...................2-3-18
Operating in Water and Mud ...........................2-3-19
Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance
Service Machine at Specified Intervals..............3-2-1
Check the Hour Meter Regularly .......................3-2-1
Prepare Machine for Maintenance ....................3-2-2
Open Access Doors for Service ........................3-2-3
Open Engine Cover for Service.........................3-2-3
Fuel Tank ...........................................................3-2-3
Hydraulic Breaker and Crusher Attachments ....3-2-4
Continued on next page
ii
081214
PN=2
Contents
Page
Page
Fluid Analysis Program Test Kits and
3-Way Coolant Test Kit..................................3-2-4
Service Intervals ................................................3-2-5
Required Parts...................................................3-2-7
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours
Drain and Refill Swing Gear Case Oil ...............3-9-1
Replace Hydraulic Tank Oil Filter ......................3-9-2
Replace Pilot Oil Filter .......................................3-9-3
Drain and Refill Pump Drive Gear Case Oil ......3-9-4
Remove and Clean Open Crankcase
Ventilation (OCV) Hose .................................3-9-4
Inspect Serpentine Belt .....................................3-9-5
Replace Air Cleaner Elements ..........................3-9-6
Replace Air Cleaner Dust Unloader Valve.........3-9-6
Check Coolant ...................................................3-9-7
Maintenance—As Required
Remove and Clean Fuel Tank Inlet Screen .......3-3-1
Check Windshield Washer Fluid Level ..............3-3-1
Check and Clean Air Cleaner Dust
Unloader Valve..............................................3-3-1
Check and Adjust Track Sag .............................3-3-2
Clean Rear Camera Lens—If Equipped ............3-3-3
Check Coolant ...................................................3-3-4
Service Exhaust Filter........................................3-3-5
Maintenance—Every 2000 Hours
Check and Adjust Engine Valve Lash..............3-10-1
Drain and Refill Travel Gear Case Oil .............3-10-1
Replace Open Crankcase Ventilation
(OCV) Filter .................................................3-10-1
Maintenance—10 Hours or Daily
Check Engine Oil Level .....................................3-4-1
Check Engine Coolant Level .............................3-4-2
Check Hydraulic Tank Oil Level.........................3-4-3
Lubricate Hydraulic Coupler—If Equipped ........3-4-4
Maintenance—Every 5000 Hours
Maintenance—Every 50 Hours or Weekly
Drain and Refill Hydraulic Tank Oil ..................3-11-1
Replace Hydraulic Tank Vent Cap Filter ..........3-11-3
Drain Water and Sediment from Fuel
Tank Sump ....................................................3-5-1
Drain Primary Fuel Filter and Water Separator ..3-5-1
Drain Final Fuel Filter ........................................3-5-2
Drain Auxiliary Fuel Filter and Water
Separator—If Equipped.................................3-5-2
Maintenance—Every 6000 Hours
Drain Cooling System......................................3-12-1
Cooling System Fill and Deaeration
Procedure....................................................3-12-2
Miscellaneous—Machine
Maintenance—Every 100 Hours
Bleed Fuel System ............................................4-1-1
Clean Radiator, Oil Cooler, Charge Air
Cooler, and Fuel Cooler ................................4-1-1
Do Not Service or Adjust Injection
Nozzles or High-Pressure Fuel Pump...........4-1-2
Do Not Service Control Valves,
Cylinders, Pumps, or Motors.........................4-1-2
Precautions for Alternator and Regulator ..........4-1-2
Handling, Checking, and Servicing
Batteries Carefully.........................................4-1-3
Using Battery Charger .......................................4-1-4
Using Booster Batteries—24-Volt System .........4-1-5
Replacing Batteries ...........................................4-1-5
Fluid Sampling Test Ports—If Equipped ............4-1-6
Welding On Machine .........................................4-1-6
Clean the Machine Regularly ............................4-1-7
Adding 12—Volt Accessories ............................4-1-7
JDLink™ Machine Monitoring System
(MMS)—If Equipped......................................4-1-7
Replacing Fuses................................................4-1-8
Replacing Bucket Teeth...................................4-1-11
Replacing Bucket Tooth
Tip—Heavy-Duty Bucket .............................4-1-13
Replacing Bucket Teeth—TK Series ...............4-1-13
Removing the Bucket ......................................4-1-14
Track Sag General Information .......................4-1-14
Check Track Shoe Hardware ..........................4-1-14
Lubricate Working Tool Pivots ...........................3-6-1
Inspect and Re-Torque Track Hardware............3-6-2
Maintenance—Every 250 Hours
Check Swing Gear Case Oil Level ....................3-7-1
Drain Water and Sediment from
Hydraulic Tank...............................................3-7-2
Check Pump Drive Gear Case Oil Level ...........3-7-3
Check Battery Electrolyte Level and Terminals ..3-7-4
Check Travel Gear Case Oil Level ....................3-7-6
Take Engine Oil Sample ....................................3-7-6
Maintenance—Every 500 Hours
Lubricate Front End Pin Joints ..........................3-8-1
Lubricate Swing Bearing....................................3-8-2
Lubricate Swing Bearing Gear...........................3-8-2
Replace Primary Fuel Filter and Water
Separator ......................................................3-8-3
Replace Final Fuel Filter....................................3-8-4
Replace Auxiliary Fuel Filter and Water
Separator—If Equipped.................................3-8-5
Check Air Intake Hoses .....................................3-8-5
Drain and Refill Engine Oil and Replace Filter ..3-8-6
Clean Cab Fresh Air and Cab
Recirculating Air Filters .................................3-8-7
Take Fluid Samples ...........................................3-8-7
Continued on next page
iii
081214
PN=3
Contents
Page
Page
Hardware Torque Specifications......................4-1-14
Unified Inch Bolt and Screw Torque Values.....4-1-15
Metric Bolt and Screw Torque Values..............4-1-16
180GLC Lift Capacity—Arm: 3.21 m
(10 ft. 6 in.); Bucket: 600 kg (1323
lb.); Shoe: 600 mm (24 in.) .........................4-6-18
180GLC Lift Capacity—Arm: 3.21 m
(10 ft. 6 in.); Bucket: 600 kg (1323
lb.); Shoe: 700 mm (28 in.) .........................4-6-19
180GLC Lift Capacity—Arm: 3.21 m
(10 ft. 6 in.); Bucket: 600 kg (1323
lb.); Shoe: 800 mm (32 in.) .........................4-6-20
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Operational Checkout........................................4-2-1
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Procedure ...............................4-3-1
Engine ...............................................................4-3-2
Hydraulic System...............................................4-3-5
Electrical System ...............................................4-3-7
Miscellaneous—Storage
Prepare Machine for Storage ............................4-4-1
Monthly Storage Procedure...............................4-4-2
Miscellaneous—Machine Numbers
Record Product Identification Number (PIN) .....4-5-1
Record Engine Serial Number...........................4-5-1
Record Travel Motor Serial Numbers ................4-5-2
Record Swing Motor Serial Number ..................4-5-2
Record Hydraulic Coupler Serial
Number—If Equipped....................................4-5-3
Hydraulic Pump Serial Number .........................4-5-3
Keep Proof of Ownership ..................................4-5-4
Keep Machines Secure .....................................4-5-4
Miscellaneous—Specifications
160GLC Engine Specifications..........................4-6-1
180GLC Engine Specifications..........................4-6-1
160GLC and 180GLC Drain and Refill
Capacities .....................................................4-6-2
160GLC Machine Specifications .......................4-6-3
180GLC Machine Specifications .......................4-6-5
160GLC Working Ranges..................................4-6-7
180GLC Working Ranges..................................4-6-9
160GLC Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.60 m (8
ft. 6 in.); Bucket: 528 kg (1164 lb.);
Shoe: 600 mm (24 in.) ................................4-6-11
160GLC Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.60 m (8
ft. 6 in.); Bucket: 528 kg (1164 lb.);
Shoe: 700 mm (28 in.) ................................4-6-12
160GLC Lift Capacity—Arm: 3.10 m
(10 ft. 2 in.); Bucket: 528 kg (1164
lb.); Shoe: 600 mm (24 in.) .........................4-6-13
160GLC Lift Capacity—Arm: 3.10 m
(10 ft. 2 in.); Bucket: 528 kg (1164
lb.); Shoe: 700 mm (28 in.) .........................4-6-14
180GLC Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.71 m (8
ft. 10 in.); Bucket: 600 kg (1323 lb.);
Shoe: 600 mm (24 in.) ................................4-6-15
180GLC Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.71 m (8
ft. 10 in.); Bucket: 600 kg (1323 lb.);
Shoe: 700 mm (28 in.) ................................4-6-16
180GLC Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.71 m (8
ft. 10 in.); Bucket: 600 kg (1323 lb.);
Shoe: 800 mm (32 in.) ................................4-6-17
iv
081214
PN=4
Safety—Safety and Operator Conveniences
Safety and Operator Convenience Features
15
14
3
13 12
2
1
4
5
11
7
8
TX1101571 —UN—13NOV12
9
10
6
TX1101571
Excavator Safety and Operator Convenience Features
Please remember that the operator is the key to
preventing accidents.
9. Bypass Start Protection. Shielding over the starter
helps prevent dangerous bypass starting.
1. Seat belt with Retractors. Seat belt retractors help
keep belts clean and convenient to use.
10. Travel Alarm. Alerts bystanders of forward or reverse
machine movement.
2. Window Guarding. The stationary window with bars
prevent contact with a moving boom.
11. Engine Fan Guard. A fan guard inside the engine
compartment helps prevent contact with the hydraulically
driven fan.
3. Rearview Mirrors. Rearview mirrors offer the operator
a view of activity along side of the excavator.
4. Secondary Exit. The front window provides a large
exit path if the cab door is blocked in an emergency
situation. The rear window is an alternate secondary exit,
a secondary exit tool is also provided.
12. Horn. Standard horn is useful when driving or
signaling coworkers.
5. Pilot Shutoff Lever. A lever near the cab exit reminds
the operator to deactivate hydraulic functions before
leaving the machine.
13. Cab with Heater, Defroster, and Air Conditioner.
Ventilation system circulates both outside and inside air
through filters for a clean working environment. Built
in defroster vents direct air flow for effective window
defogging/deicing. Air conditioner provides a comfortable,
temperature-controlled working environment.
6. Steps. Wide, slip-resistant steps make entry and exit
easier. Steps also provide a place to clean shoes.
14. Counterweight Mirror. The counterweight mirror
offers the operator a view directly behind the excavator.
7. Handholds. Large, conveniently placed handholds
make it easy to enter or exit the operator's station or
service area.
15. ROPS and FOPS. Integrated rollover protective
structure (ROPS) and falling object protective structure
(FOPS) are designed to protect the operator. The
enclosed lockable cabin also provides protection from the
weather and reduces vandalism.
8. Swing Brake. Swing brake engages automatically
when the swing is not operated. Helps secure
upperstructure when transporting the machine.
OUT4001,0000A68 -19-04JAN12-1/1
1-1-1
081214
PN=21
Safety—General Precautions
Recognize Safety Information
T133555 —UN—15APR13
This is the safety alert symbol. When you see this
symbol on your machine or in this manual, be alert
for the potential of personal injury.
Follow the precautions and safe operating practices
highlighted by this symbol.
A signal word — DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION —
is used with the safety alert symbol. DANGER identifies
the most serious hazards.
T133588 —19—28AUG00
On your machine, DANGER signs are red in color,
WARNING signs are orange, and CAUTION signs are
yellow. DANGER and WARNING signs are located near
specific hazards. General precautions are on CAUTION
labels.
TX,RECOGNIZE -19-28JUN10-1/1
Follow Safety Instructions
TS201 —UN—15APR13
Carefully read all safety messages in this manual and on
your machine safety signs. Keep safety signs in good
condition. Replace missing or damaged safety signs. Use
this operator’s manual for correct safety sign placement.
Be sure that new equipment components and repair parts
include the current safety signs. Replacement safety
signs are available from your John Deere dealer.
There can be additional safety information contained on
parts and components sourced from suppliers that is not
reproduced in this operator's manual.
Learn how to operate the machine and how to use controls
properly. Do not let anyone operate without instruction.
Keep your machine in proper working condition.
Unauthorized modifications to the machine could impair
the function or safety and affect machine life.
If you do not understand any part of this manual and need
assistance, contact your John Deere dealer.
TX,FOLLOW -19-20JAN11-1/1
Operate Only If Qualified
Do not operate this machine unless the operator's manual
has been read carefully, and you have been qualified by
supervised training and instruction.
machine functions with the machine in an open area
before starting to work.
Know and observe all safety rules that may apply to every
work situation and work site.
Operator should be familiar with the job site and
surroundings before operating. Try all controls and
TX,QUALIFIED -19-18JAN11-1/1
1-2-1
081214
PN=22
Safety—General Precautions
Wear Protective Equipment
Guard against injury from flying pieces or metal or debris;
wear goggles or safety glasses.
TS206 —UN—15APR13
Wear close fitting clothing and safety equipment
appropriate to the job.
Operating equipment safely requires the full attention of
the operator. Do not wear radio or music headphones
while operating machine.
Prolonged exposure to loud noise can cause impairment
or loss of hearing. Wear suitable hearing protection such
as earmuffs or earplugs to protect against objectionable or
uncomfortable loud noises. Radio or music headphones
are not suitable to use for hearing protection.
TX,WEAR,PE -19-22SEP10-1/1
Avoid Unauthorized Machine Modifications
John Deere recommends using only genuine John Deere
replacement parts to ensure machine performance.
Never substitute genuine John Deere parts with alternate
parts not intended for the application as these can
create hazardous situations or hazardous performance.
Non-John Deere parts, or any damage or failures resulting
from their use are not covered by any John Deere warranty.
Modifications of this machine, or addition of unapproved
products or attachments, may affect machine stability or
reliability, and may create a hazard for the operator or
others near the machine. The installer of any modification
which may affect the electronic controls of this machine is
responsible for establishing that the modification does not
adversely affect the machine or its performance.
Always contact an authorized dealer before making
machine modifications that change the intended use,
weight or balance of the machine, or that alter machine
controls, performance or reliability.
AM40430,00000A9 -19-20AUG09-1/1
Control Pattern Selector—If Equipped
This machine may be equipped with a control pattern
selector valve. Ensure all personnel are clear of machine
and area is large enough to operate machine functions.
Verify the machine response to each control movement.
DB84312,00000A5 -19-04JAN12-1/1
Add Cab Guarding for Special Uses
Special work situations or machine attachments could
create an environment with falling or flying objects.
Working near an overhead bank, demolition work, using
a hydraulic hammer or winch, working in a forestry
application or wooded area, or working in a waste
management application, for example, could require
added guarding to protect the operator.
Additional level II FOPS (falling object protective
structure), forestry protection packages, and special
screens or guarding should be installed when falling
or flying objects could enter or damage the machine.
A rear screen should always be used with a winch to
protect against a snapping cable. Before operating in any
special work environments, follow the operator protection
recommendations of the manufacturer of any specialized
attachment or equipment. Contact your authorized John
Deere dealer for information on protective guarding.
TX,CABGUARD -19-12FEB13-1/1
1-2-2
081214
PN=23
Safety—General Precautions
Inspect Machine
Keep all guards and shields in good condition and properly
installed. Fix damage and replace worn or broken parts
immediately. Pay special attention to hydraulic hoses and
electrical wiring.
T6607AQ —UN—15APR13
Inspect machine carefully each day by walking around it
before starting.
TX,INSPECT -19-08SEP10-1/1
Entanglements in moving parts can cause serious injury.
Stop engine before examining, adjusting, or maintaining
any part of machine with moving parts.
Keep guards and shields in place. Replace any guard
or shield that has been removed for access as soon as
service or repair is complete.
T133592 —UN—15APR13
Stay Clear of Moving Parts
TX,MOVING,PARTS -19-20JAN11-1/1
Avoid High-Pressure Fluids
Avoid the hazard by relieving pressure before
disconnecting hydraulic or other lines. Tighten all
connections before applying pressure.
Search for leaks with a piece of cardboard. Protect hands
and body from high-pressure fluids.
If an accident occurs, see a doctor immediately. Any fluid
injected into the skin must be surgically removed within
a few hours or gangrene may result. Doctors unfamiliar
with this type of injury should reference a knowledgeable
medical source. Such information is available from Deere
& Company Medical Department in Moline, Illinois, U.S.A.
X9811 —UN—23AUG88
Escaping fluid under pressure can penetrate the skin
causing serious injury.
DX,FLUID -19-11DEC12-1/1
1-2-3
081214
PN=24
Safety—General Precautions
Avoid High-Pressure Oils
Never search for leaks with your hands. Protect hands.
Use a piece of cardboard to find location of escaping oil.
Stop engine and relieve pressure before disconnecting
lines or working on hydraulic system.
T133840 —UN—20SEP00
If hydraulic oil penetrates your skin, see a doctor
immediately. Injected oil must be removed surgically
within hours or gangrene could result. Contact a
knowledgeable medical source or the Deere & Company
Medical Department in Moline, Illinois, U.S.A.
T133509 —UN—15APR13
This machine uses a high-pressure hydraulic system.
Escaping oil under pressure can penetrate the skin
causing serious injury.
TX,HPOILS -19-20JAN11-1/1
Work In Ventilated Area
If you do not have an exhaust pipe extension, open the
doors and get outside air into the area.
TS220 —UN—15APR13
Engine exhaust fumes can cause sickness or death. If
it is necessary to run an engine in an enclosed area,
remove the exhaust fumes from the area with an exhaust
pipe extension.
DX,AIR -19-17FEB99-1/1
1-2-4
081214
PN=25
Safety—General Precautions
Avoid Static Electricity Risk When Refueling
The removal of sulfur and other compounds in Ultra-Low
Sulfur Diesel (ULSD) fuel decreases its conductivity and
increases its ability to store a static charge.
RG22142 —UN—17MAR14
Refineries may have treated the fuel with a static
dissipating additive. However, there are many factors that
can reduce the effectiveness of the additive over time.
Static charges can build up in ULSD fuel while it is flowing
through fuel delivery systems. Static electricity discharge
when combustible vapors are present could result in a
fire or explosion.
RG21992 —UN—21AUG13
Therefore, it is important to ensure that the entire system
used to refuel your machine (fuel supply tank, transfer
pump, transfer hose, nozzle, and others) is properly
grounded and bonded. Consult with your fuel or fuel
system supplier to ensure that the delivery system is in
compliance with fueling standards for proper grounding
and bonding practices.
DX,FUEL,STATIC,ELEC -19-12JUL13-1/1
T133552 —UN—15APR13
Prevent Fires
Handle Fuel Safely: Store flammable fluids away from
fire hazards. Never refuel machine while smoking or when
near sparks or flame.
Clean Machine Regularly: Keep trash, debris, grease
and oil from accumulating in engine compartment, around
fuel lines, hydraulic lines, exhaust components, and
electrical wiring. Never store oily rags or flammable
materials inside a machine compartment.
T133553 —UN—07SEP00
Maintain Hoses and Wiring: Replace hydraulic hoses
immediately if they begin to leak, and clean up any oil
spills. Examine electrical wiring and connectors frequently
for damage.
Keep A Fire Extinguisher Available: Always keep a
multipurpose fire extinguisher on or near the machine.
Know how to use extinguisher properly.
T133554 —UN—07SEP00
TX,PREVENT,FIRE -19-20JAN11-1/1
1-2-5
081214
PN=26
Safety—General Precautions
Prevent Battery Explosions
Keep sparks, lighted matches, and open flame away from
the top of battery. Battery gas can explode.
Do not charge a frozen battery; it may explode. Warm
battery to 16°C (60°F).
TS204 —UN—15APR13
Never check battery charge by placing a metal object
across the posts. Use a volt-meter or hydrometer.
DX,SPARKS -19-03MAR93-1/1
Handle Chemical Products Safely
A Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) provides specific
details on chemical products: physical and health hazards,
safety procedures, and emergency response techniques.
Check the MSDS before you start any job using a
hazardous chemical. That way you will know exactly what
the risks are and how to do the job safely. Then follow
procedures and recommended equipment.
TS1132 —UN—15APR13
Direct exposure to hazardous chemicals can cause
serious injury. Potentially hazardous chemicals used with
John Deere equipment include such items as lubricants,
coolants, paints, and adhesives.
(See your John Deere dealer for MSDS’s on chemical
products used with John Deere equipment.)
DX,MSDS,NA -19-03MAR93-1/1
Dispose of Waste Properly
Use leakproof containers when draining fluids. Do not use
food or beverage containers that may mislead someone
into drinking from them.
Do not pour waste onto the ground, down a drain, or into
any water source.
TS1133 —UN—15APR13
Improperly disposing of waste can threaten the
environment and ecology. Potentially harmful waste used
with John Deere equipment include such items as oil, fuel,
coolant, brake fluid, filters, and batteries.
Air conditioning refrigerants escaping into the air can
damage the Earth’s atmosphere. Government regulations
may require a certified air conditioning service center to
recover and recycle used air conditioning refrigerants.
Inquire on the proper way to recycle or dispose of waste
from your local environmental or recycling center, or from
your John Deere dealer.
DX,DRAIN -19-03MAR93-1/1
1-2-6
081214
PN=27
Safety—General Precautions
Exhaust Filter Ash Handling and Disposal
CAUTION: Under federal, state, and local laws or
regulations, exhaust filter ash can be classified
as a hazardous waste. Hazardous waste must
be disposed of in accordance with all applicable
federal, state, and local laws or regulations
governing hazardous waste disposal. Only a
qualified service provider should remove ash from
the exhaust filter. Personal protective equipment
and clothing, maintained in a sanitary and reliable
condition, should be used when handling and
cleaning exhaust filter. See your authorized dealer
for exhaust filter ash handling and disposal.
TX,ASH,DISP -19-20JAN11-1/1
Prepare for Emergencies
Be prepared if a fire starts.
Keep emergency numbers for doctors, ambulance service,
hospital, and fire department near your telephone.
TS291 —UN—15APR13
Keep a first aid kit and fire extinguisher handy.
DX,FIRE2 -19-03MAR93-1/1
Clean Debris from Machine
Clean any oil spills or fuel spills on machine surfaces.
Temperature in engine compartment could go up
immediately after engine is stopped. BE ON GUARD
FOR FIRES DURING THIS PERIOD.
Open access door(s) to cool the engine faster, and clean
engine compartment.
T6669AG —UN—15APR13
Keep engine compartment, radiator, batteries, hydraulic
lines, exhaust components, fuel tank, and operator's
station clean and free of debris.
TX,DEBRIS -19-20JAN11-1/1
1-2-7
081214
PN=28
Safety—Operating Precautions
Prevent falls by facing the machine when you get on and
off. Maintain 3-point contact with steps and handrails.
Never use machine controls as handholds.
Use extra care when mud, snow, or moisture present
slippery conditions. Keep steps clean and free of grease
or oil. Never jump when exiting machine. Never mount or
dismount a moving machine.
T133468 —UN—15APR13
Use Steps and Handholds Correctly
TX,STEPS -19-09FEB11-1/1
Avoid unexpected machine movement. Start engine only
while sitting in operator's seat. Ensure that all controls and
working tools are in proper position for a parked machine.
Never attempt to start engine from the ground. Do not
attempt to start engine by shorting across the starter
solenoid terminals.
T133715 —UN—15APR13
Start Only From Operator's Seat
TX,SOFOS -19-20JAN11-1/1
Use seat belt when operating machine. Remember to
fasten seat belt when loading and unloading from trucks
and during other uses.
Examine seat belt frequently. Be sure that webbing is not
cut or torn. Replace seat belt immediately if any part is
damaged or does not function properly.
T133716 —19—17APR13
Use and Maintain Seat Belt
The complete seat belt assembly should be replaced
every three years, regardless of appearance.
TX,SEAT,BELT -19-20JAN11-1/1
Be careful not to accidentally actuate control levers when
coworkers are present. Pull pilot shutoff lever to locked
(UP) position during work interruptions. Pull pilot shutoff
lever to locked (UP) position and stop engine before
allowing anyone to approach machine.
Always lower work equipment to the ground and pull pilot
shutoff lever to locked (UP) position before standing up or
leaving the operator's seat. Stop engine before exiting.
T216779 —UN—22NOV05
Prevent Unintended Machine Movement
VD76477,000036D -19-19APR11-1/1
1-3-1
081214
PN=29
Safety—Operating Precautions
Avoid boom or arm contact with overhead obstacles
or overhead electrical lines. Never move any part of
machine or load closer than 3 m (10 ft.) plus twice the line
insulator length to overhead wires.
Keep bystanders clear at all times. Keep bystanders
away from raised booms, attachments, and unsupported
loads. Avoid swinging or raising booms, attachments, or
loads over or near personnel. Use barricades or a signal
person to keep vehicles and pedestrians away. Use a
signal person if moving machine in congested areas or
where visibility is restricted. Always keep signal person in
view. Coordinate hand signals before starting machine.
Operate only on solid footing with strength sufficient to
support machine. When working close to an excavation,
position travel motors away from the hole.
Reduce machine speed when operating with tool on or
near ground when obstacles may be hidden (e.g., during
snow removal or clearing mud, dirt, etc). At high speeds,
hitting obstacles (rocks, uneven concrete or manholes)
can cause a sudden stop. Always wear your seat belt.
T133650 —UN—27SEP00
Prepare work site properly. Avoid operating near
structures or objects that could fall onto the machine. Clear
away debris that could move unexpectedly if run over.
T133549 —UN—24AUG00
Avoid contact with gas lines, buried cables and water
lines. Call utility line location services to identify all
underground utilities before you dig.
T134986 —UN—31OCT00
Avoid Work Site Hazards
TX03679,0001748 -19-09JUL12-1/1
Keep Riders Off Machine
Riders are subject to injury. They may fall from machine,
be caught between machine parts, or be struck by foreign
objects.
Riders may obstruct operator’s view or impair his ability
to operate machine safely.
T7273AH —UN—08JUN90
Only allow operator on machine.
TX03679,0001726 -19-03JAN07-1/1
1-3-2
081214
PN=30
Safety—Operating Precautions
Avoid Backover Accidents
PC10857XW —UN—15APR13
Before moving machine, be sure that all persons are
clear of machine path. Turn around and look directly for
best visibility. Use mirrors to assist in checking all around
machine. Keep windows and mirrors clean, adjusted, and
in good repair.
Be certain reverse warning alarm is working properly.
Use a signal person when backing if view is obstructed
or when in close quarters. Keep signal person in view at
all times. Use prearranged hand signals to communicate.
Do not rely on the rear camera and radar object detection
systems to determine if personnel are behind the machine.
The system has limitations due to maintenance practices,
environmental conditions, and operating range.
TX,AVOID,BACKOVER -19-25OCT10-1/1
Inspect and Maintain ROPS
To maintain the ROPS:
A damaged rollover protective structure (ROPS) should
be replaced, not reused.
• Replace missing hardware using correct grade
The protection offered by ROPS could be impaired if
ROPS is subjected to structural damage, is involved in
an overturn incident, or is in any way altered by welding,
bending, drilling, or cutting.
• Check hardware torque.
• Check isolation mounts for damage, looseness, or
hardware.
wear; replace them if necessary.
• Check ROPS for cracks or physical damage.
If ROPS was loosened or removed for any reason, inspect
it carefully before operating the machine again.
TX,ROPS -19-20JAN11-1/1
1-3-3
081214
PN=31
Safety—Operating Precautions
Avoid Machine Tip Over
T133716 —19—17APR13
Use seat belt at all times.
Do not jump if the machine tips. You will be unlikely to
jump clear and the machine may crush you.
Load and unload from trucks or trailers carefully. Be
sure truck is wide enough and on a firm level surface.
Use loading ramps and attach them properly to truck bed.
Avoid trucks with steel beds because tracks slip more
easily on steel.
T133545 —UN—15SEP00
Be careful on slopes. Use extra care on soft, rocky
or frozen ground. Machine may slip sideways in these
conditions. When traveling up or down slopes, keep the
bucket on uphill side and just above ground level.
Be careful with heavy loads. Using oversize buckets or
lifting heavy objects reduces machine stability. Extending
a heavy load or swinging it over side of undercarriage
may cause machine to tip.
T133803 —UN—27SEP00
Ensure solid footing. Use extra care when operating
near banks or excavations that may cave-in and cause
machine to tip or fall.
TX03679,00016DF -19-03JAN07-1/1
Use Special Care When Lifting Objects
T133839 —UN—27SEP00
Never use this machine to lift people.
Never lift a load above another person. Keep bystanders
clear of all areas where a load might fall if it breaks free.
Do not leave the seat when there is a raised load.
Do not exceed lift capacity limits posted on machine and
in this manual. Extending heavy loads too far or swinging
over undercarriage side may cause machine to tip over.
Use proper rigging to attach and stabilize loads. Be sure
slings or chains have adequate capacity and are in good
condition. Use tether lines to guide loads and prearranged
hand signals to communicate with co-workers.
TX03679,00016E1 -19-03JAN07-1/1
Use Special Care When Operating
Never use the attachment to lift people. Do not allow
anyone to ride on attachment or use it as a work
platform.
Be careful when lifting loads. Never attempt to lift loads
too heavy for your machine. Assure machine stability and
hydraulic capability with a test lift before attempting other
maneuvers. Keep bystanders away from raised loads.
Operate carefully with raised loads. Raising the load
reduces machine stability, especially on side slopes or an
unstable surface. Drive and turn slowly with a raised load.
DB84312,00000CA -19-11APR14-1/1
1-3-4
081214
PN=32
Safety—Operating Precautions
Travel Safely
NOTE: When working on steep slopes, travel as straight
up and down as possible to prevent roll-over.
T6964AD —UN—20DEC88
DO NOT PARK ON A HILLSIDE OR AN INCLINE.
Always park the machine on level ground.
Know the location of bystanders before moving the
machine.
Always keep the reverse warning alarm in working
condition. The alarm warns bystanders when the machine
starts to move in reverse.
Travel Safely
Use a signal person when moving the machine in
congested areas. Coordinate hand signals before starting
the machine.
CN93077,00000B3 -19-14FEB13-1/1
Prevent Acid Burns
Sulfuric acid in battery electrolyte is poisonous. It is strong
enough to burn skin, eat holes in clothing, and cause
blindness if splashed into eyes.
Avoid the hazard by:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Filling batteries in a well-ventilated area.
Wearing eye protection and rubber gloves.
Avoiding breathing fumes when electrolyte is added.
Avoiding spilling or dripping electrolyte.
Use proper jump start procedure.
If you spill acid on yourself:
1. Flush your skin with water.
2. Apply baking soda or lime to help neutralize the acid.
3. Flush your eyes with water for 15—30 minutes. Get
medical attention immediately.
If acid is swallowed:
TS203 —UN—23AUG88
1. Do not induce vomiting.
2. Drink large amounts of water or milk, but do not
exceed 2 L (2 quarts).
3. Get medical attention immediately.
DX,POISON -19-21APR93-1/1
Add and Operate Attachments Safely
Always verify compatibility of attachments by contacting
your authorized dealer. Adding unapproved attachments
could affect machine stability or reliability and could create
a hazard for others near the machine.
Ensure that a qualified person is involved in attachment
installation. Add guards to machine if operator protection
is required or recommended. Verify that all connections
are secure and attachment responds properly to controls.
Carefully read attachment manual and follow all
instructions and warnings. In an area free of bystanders
and obstructions, carefully operate attachment to learn its
characteristics and range of motion.
TX,ATTACH -19-20JAN11-1/1
1-3-5
081214
PN=33
Safety—Maintenance Precautions
Park and Prepare for Service Safely
Warn others of service work. Always park and prepare
your machine for service or repair properly.
to the ground.
• Place pilot shutoff lever in locked (UP) position.
•
Stop
engine and remove key.
Attach a “Do Not Operate” tag in an obvious place in
the operator's station.
Securely support machine or attachment before working
under it.
T133332 —19—17APR13
• Park machine on a level surface and lower equipment
• Do not support machine with any hydraulically actuated
equipment.
• Do not support machine with cinder blocks or wooden
pieces that may crumble or crush.
• Do not support machine with a single jack or other
Understand service procedures before beginning repairs.
Keep service area clean and dry. Use two people
whenever the engine must be running for service work.
TS229 —UN—23AUG88
devices that may slip out of place.
OUT4001,000089A -19-30JAN12-1/1
Service Cooling System Safely
Do not service radiator through the radiator cap. Only fill
through the surge tank filler cap. Shut off engine. Only
remove surge tank filler cap when cool enough to touch
with bare hands. Slowly loosen cap to relieve pressure
before removing completely.
TS281 —UN—15APR13
Explosive release of fluids from pressurized cooling
system can cause serious burns.
TX,SURGE -19-19JAN11-1/1
1-4-1
081214
PN=34
Safety—Maintenance Precautions
Remove Paint Before Welding or Heating
Avoid potentially toxic fumes and dust.
Hazardous fumes can be generated when paint is heated
by welding, soldering, or using a torch.
TS220 —UN—15APR13
Remove paint before heating:
• Remove paint a minimum of 100 mm (4 in.) from area
•
•
to be affected by heating. If paint cannot be removed,
wear an approved respirator before heating or welding.
If you sand or grind paint, avoid breathing the dust.
Wear an approved respirator.
If you use solvent or paint stripper, remove stripper with
soap and water before welding. Remove solvent or
paint stripper containers and other flammable material
from area. Allow fumes to disperse at least 15 minutes
before welding or heating.
Do not use a chlorinated solvent in areas where welding
will take place.
Do all work in an area that is well ventilated to carry toxic
fumes and dust away.
Dispose of paint and solvent properly.
DX,PAINT -19-24JUL02-1/1
Make Welding Repairs Safely
T133547 —UN—15APR13
IMPORTANT: Disable electrical power before welding.
Turn off main battery switch and disconnect
positive and negative battery cables.
Do not weld or apply heat on any part of a reservoir or
tank that has contained oil or fuel. Heat from welding and
cutting can cause oil, fuel, or cleaning solution to create
gases which are explosive, flammable, or toxic.
Avoid Heating Near Pressurized Fluid Lines
Avoid welding or heating near pressurized fluid lines.
Flammable spray may result and cause severe burns if
pressurized lines fail as a result of heating. Do not let heat
go beyond work area to nearby pressurized lines.
Make sure there is good ventilation. Wear eye protection
and protective equipment when welding.
Remove paint properly. Do not inhale paint dust or fumes.
Use a qualified welding technician for structural repairs.
MB60223,0000212 -19-04FEB14-1/1
Always wear protective goggles or safety glasses and
other protective equipment before striking hardened
parts. Hammering hardened metal parts such as pins and
bucket teeth could dislodge chips at high velocity.
Use a soft hammer or a brass bar between hammer and
object to prevent chipping.
T133738 —UN—15APR13
Drive Metal Pins Safely
TX,PINS -19-20JAN11-1/1
1-4-2
081214
PN=35
Safety—Maintenance Precautions
During exhaust filter cleaning operations, the engine
may run at elevated idle and hot temperatures for an
extended period of time. Exhaust gases and exhaust
filter components reach temperatures hot enough to burn
people, or ignite or melt common materials.
Keep machine away from people, animals, or structures
which may be susceptible to harm or damage from hot
exhaust gases or components. Avoid potential fire or
explosion hazards from flammable materials and vapors
near the exhaust. Keep exhaust outlet away from people
and anything that can melt, burn, or explode.
TS227 —UN—15APR13
Clean Exhaust Filter Safely
Closely monitor machine and surrounding area for
smoldering debris during and after exhaust filter cleaning.
Always make sure that engine is stopped while hauling
machine on a truck or trailer.
Contact with exhaust components while still hot can result
in serious personal injury.
Avoid contact with these components until cooled to safe
temperatures.
TS271 —UN—23AUG88
Adding fuel while an engine is running can create a fire
or explosion hazard. Always stop engine before refueling
machine and clean up any spilled fuel.
If service procedure requires engine to be running:
• Only engage power-driven parts required by service
procedure
and machine
Keep hands, feet, and clothing away from power-driven
parts.
Always disable movement (neutral), set the parking brake
or mechanism and disconnect power to attachments or
tools before leaving the operator’s station.
TS1693 —UN—09DEC09
• Ensure that other people are clear of operator station
TS1695 —UN—07DEC09
Shut off engine and remove key (if equipped) before
leaving the machine unattended.
DX,EXHAUST,FILTER -19-12JAN11-1/1
1-4-3
081214
PN=36
Safety—Safety Signs
Safety Signs
TX1162553 —UN—09JUN14
Early Production (S.N. —XXXXXX)
Safety Signs
1— CAUTION, Alternate Control
Patterns—If Equipped
2— CAUTION, Operate Machine
Safely
3— CAUTION, Do Not Open Hot
4— DANGER, Start Only From
Seat
5— WARNING, Stay Clear
6— WARNING, Rotating Fan
Blade
7— WARNING, Pressurized
System
8— WARNING, Avoid Serious
Crushing Injury From Boom
9— CAUTION, Avoid Injury From
Slip or Fall
10— DANGER, Electric Lines
Continued on next page
1-5-1
11— CAUTION, Prevent Injury
12— WARNING, Avoid Machine
Tipover
MB60223,00002BC -19-12AUG14-1/29
081214
PN=37
Safety—Safety Signs
1. CAUTION, Alternate Control Patterns—If Equipped
Alternate control patterns are available for this
backhoe. Always verify control response before
operating.
TX1104371 —19—12APR12
This safety label is located inside the cab on the
right-side window.
CAUTION, Alternate Control Patterns—If Equipped
MB60223,00002BC -19-12AUG14-2/29
2. CAUTION, Operate Machine Safely
AVOID DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY - Read and
understand Operator’s Manual before operating this
machine.
TX1104372 —19—12APR12
• Read and understand the Operator's Manual and
safety manual prior to operating this machine.
• Controls may be changed for attachment or operator
preference. Verify control pattern before operating.
• Before leaving the operator’s station:
•
•
•
•
•
•
- Always lower working tools to the ground.
- Engage hydraulic control lockout lever.
- Stop engine unless service procedure requires
engine to be running.
- Do not leave machine running unattended.
Keep riders off machine.
Avoid contact between boom/attachments and
overhead obstacles when operating or hauling
machine.
Keep bystanders clear of machine.
Upperstructure position affects travel direction.
Operate pedals or levers to determine travel
direction before moving the machine.
Avoid tipping - Do not lift or move objects that
exceed machine stability.
Avoid parking machine on an incline.
CAUTION, Operate Machine Safely
This safety label is located inside the cab on the
right-side window.
Continued on next page
1-5-2
MB60223,00002BC -19-12AUG14-3/29
081214
PN=38
Safety—Safety Signs
3. CAUTION, Do Not Open Hot
Release internal pressure by pressing air breather
button prior to removing reservoir cap.
TX1104377 —19—12APR12
This safety label is located on top of the hydraulic
reservoir.
CAUTION, Do Not Open Hot
MB60223,00002BC -19-12AUG14-4/29
4. DANGER, Start Only From Seat
Start only from seat in park or neutral. Starting in gear
kills.
TX1099889 —19—05DEC11
This safety message is positioned on the starter inside
the engine compartment.
DANGER, Start Only From Seat
MB60223,00002BC -19-12AUG14-5/29
5. WARNING, Stay Clear
Operator may swing or reverse machine.
TX1104370 —19—19DEC12
This safety label is located at the rear of the machine
on each side of the counterweight.
WARNING, Stay Clear
Continued on next page
1-5-3
MB60223,00002BC -19-12AUG14-6/29
081214
PN=39
Safety—Safety Signs
6. WARNING, Rotating Fan Blade
Avoid injury, keep clear of rotating fan blade.
TX1103569 —19—16DEC11
This safety label is located on top of the engine.
WARNING, Rotating Fan Blade
MB60223,00002BC -19-12AUG14-7/29
7. WARNING, Pressurized System
TX1099924 —UN—24OCT11
Hot coolant can cause serious burns, injury or death.
To open the cooling system filler cap, stop the engine
and wait until the cooling system components are
cool. Loosen the cooling system pressure cap slowly
in order to relieve the pressure.
This safety label is located on the surge tank cap.
WARNING, Pressurized System
MB60223,00002BC -19-12AUG14-8/29
8. WARNING, Avoid Serious Crushing Injury From
Boom
TX1104373 —19—12APR12
Never place any part of body beyond window bars or
frame. It could be crushed by the boom if boom control
lever is accidentally bumped or otherwise engaged.
DO NOT remove window bars. If window is missing or
broken, replace immediately.
This safety label is located inside the cab on the
right-side window.
WARNING, Avoid Serious Crushing Injury From Boom
Continued on next page
1-5-4
MB60223,00002BC -19-12AUG14-9/29
081214
PN=40
Safety—Safety Signs
9. CAUTION, Avoid Injury From Slip or Fall
DO NOT use as a handhold.
Window handle will move with the front window.
TX1104375 —19—12APR12
This safety label is located inside the cab on the
handle of the front window.
CAUTION, Avoid Injury From Slip or Fall
MB60223,00002BC -19-12AUG14-10/29
10. DANGER, Electric Lines
Serious injury or death can result from contact with
electric lines.
TX1104374 —19—19DEC12
Never move any part of unit or load closer to electric
line than 3 M [10 ft.] plus twice the line insulator length.
This safety label is located inside the cab on the
right-side window.
DANGER, Electric Lines
MB60223,00002BC -19-12AUG14-11/29
11. CAUTION, Prevent Injury
To prevent injury from the front window falling, lock
window in place with the lock pin.
TX1104376 —19—12APR12
This safety label is located inside the cab on the
right-side window.
CAUTION, Prevent Injury
Continued on next page
1-5-5
MB60223,00002BC -19-12AUG14-12/29
081214
PN=41
Safety—Safety Signs
12. WARNING, Avoid Machine Tipover
Machine is less stable with boom and arm removed.
• Travel and swing very slowly.
• Use extreme care when loading.
TX1111959 —19—12APR12
•
- Avoid counter-rotation.
- Do not swing counterweight beyond edge of truck
bed.
Keep counterweight pointed uphill on inclines.
This safety label is located outside the left front service
door.
WARNING, Avoid Machine Tipover
Continued on next page
1-5-6
MB60223,00002BC -19-12AUG14-13/29
081214
PN=42
Safety—Safety Signs
TX1162551 —UN—10JUN14
Late Production (S.N. XXXXXX— )
Safety Signs
1— Protective Structure
Certification
2— CAUTION, Avoid Injury From
Slip or Fall
3— CAUTION, Do Not Open Hot
4— DANGER, Start Only From
Seat
5— WARNING, Stay Clear
6— WARNING, Rotating Fan
Blade
7— WARNING, Pressurized
System
8— WARNING, Avoid Machine
Tipover
9— DANGER, Electric Lines
10— CAUTION, Operate Machine 13— CAUTION, Prevent Injury
Safely
14— CAUTION, Pinch Point
11— WARNING, Avoid Serious
15— IMPORTANT, Secondary Exit
Crushing Injury From Boom
12— CAUTION, Alternate Control
Patterns—If Equipped
Continued on next page
1-5-7
MB60223,00002BC -19-12AUG14-14/29
081214
PN=43
Safety—Safety Signs
1. Protective Structure Certification
Any alteration or modification to this structure voids
the certification.
TX1156960 —UN—07APR14
Always wear seat belt when moving.
This safety label is located inside the cab on the left
front ROPS post or on the right front corner of the
outside cab.
Protective Structure Certification
MB60223,00002BC -19-12AUG14-15/29
2. CAUTION, Avoid Injury From Slip or Fall
DO NOT use as a handhold.
Window handle will move with the front window.
TX1104375 —19—12APR12
This safety label is located inside the cab on the
handle of the front window.
CAUTION, Avoid Injury From Slip or Fall
MB60223,00002BC -19-12AUG14-16/29
3. CAUTION, Do Not Open Hot
Release internal pressure by pressing air breather
button prior to removing reservoir cap.
TX1104377 —19—12APR12
This safety label is located on top of the hydraulic
reservoir.
CAUTION, Do Not Open Hot
Continued on next page
1-5-8
MB60223,00002BC -19-12AUG14-17/29
081214
PN=44
Safety—Safety Signs
4. DANGER, Start Only From Seat
Start only from seat in park or neutral. Starting in gear
kills.
TX1099889 —19—05DEC11
This safety message is positioned on the starter inside
the engine compartment.
DANGER, Start Only From Seat
MB60223,00002BC -19-12AUG14-18/29
5. WARNING, Stay Clear
Operator may swing or reverse machine.
TX1104370 —19—19DEC12
This safety label is located at the rear of the machine
on each side of the counterweight.
WARNING, Stay Clear
MB60223,00002BC -19-12AUG14-19/29
6. WARNING, Rotating Fan Blade
Avoid injury, keep clear of rotating fan blade.
TX1103569 —19—16DEC11
This safety label is located on top of the engine.
WARNING, Rotating Fan Blade
Continued on next page
1-5-9
MB60223,00002BC -19-12AUG14-20/29
081214
PN=45
Safety—Safety Signs
7. WARNING, Pressurized System
TX1099924 —UN—24OCT11
Hot coolant can cause serious burns, injury or death.
To open the cooling system filler cap, stop the engine
and wait until the cooling system components are
cool. Loosen the cooling system pressure cap slowly
in order to relieve the pressure.
This safety label is located on the surge tank cap.
WARNING, Pressurized System
MB60223,00002BC -19-12AUG14-21/29
8. WARNING, Avoid Machine Tipover
Machine is less stable with boom and arm removed.
• Travel and swing very slowly.
• Use extreme care when loading.
TX1111959 —19—12APR12
•
- Avoid counter-rotation.
- Do not swing counterweight beyond edge of truck
bed.
Keep counterweight pointed uphill on inclines.
This safety label is located outside the left front service
door.
WARNING, Avoid Machine Tipover
MB60223,00002BC -19-12AUG14-22/29
9. DANGER, Electric Lines
Serious injury or death can result from contact with
electric lines.
TX1104374 —19—19DEC12
Never move any part of unit or load closer to electric
line than 3 M [10 ft.] plus twice the line insulator length.
This safety label is located inside the cab on the
right-side window.
DANGER, Electric Lines
Continued on next page
1-5-10
MB60223,00002BC -19-12AUG14-23/29
081214
PN=46
Safety—Safety Signs
10. CAUTION, Operate Machine Safely
AVOID DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY - Read and
understand Operator’s Manual before operating this
machine.
TX1104372 —19—12APR12
• Read and understand the Operator's Manual and
safety manual prior to operating this machine.
• Controls may be changed for attachment or operator
preference. Verify control pattern before operating.
• Before leaving the operator’s station:
•
•
•
•
•
•
- Always lower working tools to the ground.
- Engage hydraulic control lockout lever.
- Stop engine unless service procedure requires
engine to be running.
- Do not leave machine running unattended.
Keep riders off machine.
Avoid contact between boom/attachments and
overhead obstacles when operating or hauling
machine.
Keep bystanders clear of machine.
Upperstructure position affects travel direction.
Operate pedals or levers to determine travel
direction before moving the machine.
Avoid tipping - Do not lift or move objects that
exceed machine stability.
Avoid parking machine on an incline.
CAUTION, Operate Machine Safely
This safety label is located inside the cab on the
right-side window.
MB60223,00002BC -19-12AUG14-24/29
11. WARNING, Avoid Serious Crushing Injury From
Boom
TX1104373 —19—12APR12
Never place any part of body beyond window bars or
frame. It could be crushed by the boom if boom control
lever is accidentally bumped or otherwise engaged.
DO NOT remove window bars. If window is missing or
broken, replace immediately.
This safety label is located inside the cab on the
right-side window.
WARNING, Avoid Serious Crushing Injury From Boom
Continued on next page
1-5-11
MB60223,00002BC -19-12AUG14-25/29
081214
PN=47
Safety—Safety Signs
12. CAUTION, Alternate Control Patterns—If Equipped
Alternate control patterns are available for this
backhoe. Always verify control response before
operating.
TX1104371 —19—12APR12
This safety label is located inside the cab on the
right-side window.
CAUTION, Alternate Control Patterns—If Equipped
MB60223,00002BC -19-12AUG14-26/29
13. CAUTION, Prevent Injury
To prevent injury from the front window falling, lock
window in place with the lock pin.
TX1104376 —19—12APR12
This safety label is located inside the cab on the
right-side window.
CAUTION, Prevent Injury
MB60223,00002BC -19-12AUG14-27/29
14. CAUTION, Pinch Point
Avoid personal injury when operating seat fore-aft
lever.
TX1157159 —UN—04APR14
This safety label is located on the front of seat pedestal.
CAUTION, Pinch Point
Continued on next page
1-5-12
MB60223,00002BC -19-12AUG14-28/29
081214
PN=48
Safety—Safety Signs
15. IMPORTANT, Secondary Exit
Use tool to break window. Always keep tool in machine.
TX1156964 —19—04APR14
This safety label is located inside the cab on the left
ROPS post.
IMPORTANT, Secondary Exit
MB60223,00002BC -19-12AUG14-29/29
1-5-13
081214
PN=49
Safety—Safety Signs
Hydraulic Coupler Safety Signs—If Equipped
TX1105472 —19—13JAN12
Install these safety decals to the right window inside the
cab and on the hydraulic coupler.
Hydraulic Coupler Safety Signs
DB84312,00000D6 -19-14FEB12-1/1
1-5-14
081214
PN=50
Operation—Operator's Station
Pedals, Levers, and Panels
TX1086605 —UN—10JAN11
10— Right Console
11— Operator's Seat
12— Cab Door Release Lever
13— Pilot Shutoff Lever
14— Rear Deck
15— Lighter/Accessory Power
Port
16— Fuse Box Cover
17— Left Console
18— Storage Compartment
Pedals, Levers and Panels
TX1086606 —UN—10JAN11
1— Left Pilot Control Lever (3
button lever optional)/Horn
Button (bottom button on
top of lever)
2— Left Travel Pedal
3— Left Travel Lever
4— Right Travel Lever
5— Right Travel Pedal
6— Right Pilot Control
Lever/Power Dig Button
(bottom button on top of
lever)
7— Monitor
8— Switch Panel
9— Key Switch
Fuse Box and Left Console
OUT4001,000073A -19-10JAN11-1/1
2-1-1
081214
PN=51
Operation—Operator's Station
Switch Panel
9— Auto-Idle Switch
10— Travel Speed Switch
11— Power Mode Button
12— Work Light Switch
13— Windshield Wiper and
Washer Switch
14— Key Switch
15— Keypad
TX1086613 —UN—10JAN11
1— Back Button
2— Home Button
3— Monitor Dial
4— Temperature Control/Mode
Switch
5— Blower Speed Switch
6— Radio Tuning Switch
7— Radio Power and Volume
Switch
8— Engine Speed Dial
Switch Panel
OUT4001,000073B -19-10JAN11-1/1
2-1-2
081214
PN=52
Operation—Operator's Station
Switch Panel Functions
1. Back Button (for monitor use)—press button to
return to the previous menu.
9. Auto-Idle Switch—turn switch to select between A/I
ON or A/I OFF.
2. Home Button (for monitor use)—press button to
return to the default screen when in any of the monitor
menus. If key switch is OFF, press and hold button to
check hour meter and fuel amount on monitor.
3. Monitor Dial (for monitor use)—press dial to go from
the default screen to the main menu screen. Rotate dial
to highlight desired menu function on the monitor. Press
dial to select desired screen information or to confirm
desired action.
4. Temperature Control/Mode Switch—press switch
to toggle between different air vent settings. The air
conditioner display on the monitor will show the different
settings each time the switch is pressed. There are four
different settings:
With engine on, move auto-idle switch to A/I ON and the
engine speed dial to above the auto-idle speed. Auto-idle
indicator will appear on monitor when auto-idle is on.
The engine will run at the engine speed dial setting for
4 seconds and then the auto-idle system will slow the
engine to auto-idle engine speed. When any control lever
is operated, engine speed increases to engine speed dial
setting. When control levers are placed back in neutral
position, auto-idle circuit automatically slows the engine to
auto-idle engine speed after 4 seconds.
Turn auto-idle switch to A/I OFF and set engine speed
dial to improve machine control in difficult work areas,
loading, and unloading. Auto-idle indicator will disappear
on monitor.
• Air flows out of front vent and the defroster vents.
• Air flows out of front, rear, and the defroster vents.
• Air flows out of front, rear, foot, and the defroster vents.
• Air flows out of foot vents.
10. Travel Speed Switch—turn switch to select between
fast (rabbit) or slow (turtle) speed travel.
Rotate switch counterclockwise for cooler air setting and
clockwise for warmer air setting. Temperature setting
will change on the air conditioner display as the switch
is rotated either way.
• ECO (Economy) Mode—use to improve fuel efficiency
11. Power Mode Button—press button to select different
engine speed modes:
•
5. Blower Speed Switch—press switch while air
conditioner is OFF and it turns to AUTO mode
(blower speed setting and air flow setting are selected
automatically). Temperature control/mode switch can be
rotated to operator's preferred cab degree setting. Blower
speed and air flow settings adjust automatically to reach
desired cab temperature and maintain it.
•
and reduce noise level with a small difference in engine
speed.
PWR (Power) Mode—use when general digging work is
needed.
H/P (High Power) Mode—use when more flow is desired
for booming up or rolling in the arm in excavation work.
12. Work Light Switch—has three positions:
• 1st Position—drive light on base of machine turns ON.
Switch panel will also illuminate.
• 2nd Position—boom work light turns ON along with the
If blower speed switch is rotated or temperature
control/mode switch is pressed while in AUTO mode,
AUTO mode is cancelled and all settings need to be
adjusted by the operator as needed.
•
If blower speed switch is pressed while air conditioner
is ON, it will turn the air conditioner OFF. (This switch
must be ON to operate the ON/OFF function of the air
conditioner in the monitor menu.)
drive light and switch panel. The monitor also changes
to night mode.
OFF—work lights and switch panel illumination will turn
OFF.
13. Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch—has 5
operating positions:
Rotate switch to adjust the blower speed to desired setting
when not in AUTO mode.
6. Radio Tuning Switch—press switch to toggle between
AM and FM frequency. Rotate switch to tune in desired
radio station.
NOTE: The wiper does not operate unless the upper
front window is completely closed.
• OFF—wiper stops operating and is retracted.
• INT (slow)—wiper operates intermittently at 8 second
intervals.
• INT (medium)—wiper operates intermittently at 6
second intervals.
7. Radio Power and Volume Switch—press switch to
turn radio ON or OFF. Rotate switch to adjust the volume
to desired setting.
• INT (fast)—wiper operates intermittently at 3 second
8. Engine Speed Dial—turn dial clockwise to increase
engine speed or counterclockwise to decrease engine
speed.
Push and hold switch to squirt fluid on windshield. If
switch is held more than 2 seconds, the wiper operates
until the switch is released. Do not hold down switch for
more than 20 seconds.
intervals.
• ON—wiper operates continuously.
Continued on next page
2-1-3
OUT4001,000073C -19-28FEB12-1/2
081214
PN=53
Operation—Operator's Station
14. Key Switch—has 4 positions:
• Use numbers 0—9 to enter password at machine start
• OFF
• ACC
• ON
• START
• Press keypad numbers 1—8 while the radio is ON to
up, if equipped.
switch between programmed stations.
• When work light switch is on position 2, the monitor
changes to night mode display (background lighting is
dimmed). Press and hold the number 0 on keypad to
change monitor back to daytime mode display.
15. Keypad—has a few different applications:
OUT4001,000073C -19-28FEB12-2/2
Rear Left Panel
Lighter (1): For operator convenience. Can also be used
as an electrical port for 24-volt appliances only.
1— Lighter
TX1085863A —UN—14DEC10
Accessory Power Port (2): 12-volt, 5-amp electrical port
provided for service and maintenance.
2— Accessory Power Port
Rear Left Panel
ER79617,0000D57 -19-29MAY14-1/1
Horn
Horn button (1) is located on top of left control lever.
TX1086237A —UN—27DEC10
1— Horn Button
Horn Button
ER79617,0000D6E -19-27DEC10-1/1
Power Dig Button
TX1086698A —UN—08JAN11
The power dig button (1) is located on the right pilot
control lever. Press and hold down power dig button for
an 8 second increase in hydraulic power. Release button
to reset power dig function.
Power dig is automatically activated when the following
conditions are met:
• Boom up
• No arm in
• High delivery pressure
3 Button Pilot Control Lever Shown
1— Power Dig Button
OUT4001,000073D -19-02APR11-1/1
2-1-4
081214
PN=54
Operation—Operator's Station
Pilot Shutoff Lever
TX1086699A —UN—08JAN11
The pilot shutoff lever (1) shuts off hydraulic pilot pressure
to all pilot control valves. When pilot shutoff lever is in
locked (UP) position, the machine will not move if a lever
or pedal is accidentally moved. Engine will not start with
pilot shutoff lever in the unlocked (DOWN) position.
Always pull pilot shutoff lever to locked (UP) position when
you stop the engine or leave the operator’s station.
Push pilot shutoff lever forward to unlocked (DOWN)
position to operate machine.
Lever in Locked (UP) Position
1— Pilot Shutoff Lever
OUT4001,000073E -19-09JAN12-1/1
Left Console
NOTE: There are standard and optional switches on
the left console. Before using the switches on the
left console, be aware of what kind of optional
devices are equipped on the machine.
Raise the armrest when operating the switches.
3— Travel Alarm Cancel Switch
TX1086700A —UN—08JAN11
1— Reversing Fan Switch—If
Equipped
2— Seat Heater Switch—If
Equipped
Left Console
OUT4001,000073F -19-24FEB14-1/1
Travel Alarm and Travel Alarm Cancel Switch
TX1001227 —UN—14DEC05
NOTE: If alarm is not operating during normal transport,
or if alarm sounds when engine is running and
machine is stationary, see your authorized dealer.
The travel alarm sounds when a travel pedal or lever
is activated and will continue as long as the tracks are
moving. When travel motion stops, the travel alarm switch
is reset.
After the initial 13 second alarm, alarm can be silenced by
depressing the right half of the travel alarm cancel switch
(1), located on the left console.
Travel Alarm Cancel Switch
1— Travel Alarm Cancel Switch
OUT4001,0000740 -19-04MAR14-1/1
2-1-5
081214
PN=55
Operation—Operator's Station
Seat Heater Switch—If Equipped
Seat heater switch is located on the left console.
TX1090148A —UN—31MAR11
Use switch to turn seat heater ON or OFF.
When seat heater is ON, it will automatically cycle
between 10°C and 20°C (50°F and 68°F).
1— Seat Heater Switch
Seat Heater Switch
ER79617,0000D58 -19-28APR14-1/1
Reversing Fan Switch—If Equipped
TX1000844A —UN—29NOV05
NOTE: The reversing fan function shall not be
reactivated within 1 minute of its last completion
(this time includes AUTO cycle).
The reversing fan switch is located on the left console.
The reversing fan switch has three positions:
• AUTO: Every 60 minutes the radiator cooling fan will
•
•
automatically reverse direction for 30 seconds without
intervention from the operator when engine rpm is
above auto-idle speed.
OFF: Fan resumes normal operation.
MANUAL: When pressed and held for 3 seconds, the
fan will reverse direction for 30 seconds when right
portion of switch is pressed.
Reversing Fan Switch
ER79617,0000D59 -19-14SEP12-1/1
Right Console
3— Service ADVISOR™
Remote (SAR) Switch
TX1089996A —UN—28MAR11
1— Exhaust Filter Parked
Cleaning Switch
2— Right Enable Switch
Right Console
Service ADVISOR is a trademark of Deere & Company
DB84312,00000B8 -19-09JAN12-1/1
2-1-6
081214
PN=56
Operation—Operator's Station
Exhaust Filter Parked Cleaning Switch
TX1086795A —UN—11JAN11
CAUTION: Servicing machine during exhaust
filter parked cleaning can result in serious
personal injury. Avoid exposure and skin contact
with hot gases and components.
During exhaust filter parked cleaning, the engine
may run at elevated idle and hot temperatures
for an extended period of time. Exhaust gases
and exhaust filter components may reach
temperatures hot enough to burn people and
ignite or melt common materials.
Exhaust Filter Parked Cleaning Switch
Avoid death or serious injury from machine
movement. Do not leave running machine
unattended during exhaust filter cleaning.
1— Exhaust Filter Parked
Cleaning Switch
IMPORTANT: Avoid machine damage. Always
park machine in a safe location and check
for adequate fuel level before beginning
exhaust filter parked cleaning.
take place or the operator can check the restriction level
bar graph in the monitor. See Main Menu—Information
Menu—Monitoring. (Section 2-2.)
The exhaust filter parked cleaning switch (1) is located
on the right console.
Before starting the parked cleaning process, the machine
needs to be in a predetermined safe state. This safe state
includes three conditions:
• Machine is parked in a safe place with the front
attachment lowered to the ground
Once the safe state conditions are met, press and hold
the right half of exhaust filter parked cleaning switch for 3
seconds to begin a parked cleaning procedure.
Monitor will show a progress screen during the cleaning
and will prompt the operator when the cleaning is
complete.
For more information, see Exhaust Filter Parked Cleaning.
(Section 2-3.)
• Pilot shutoff lever is in locked (UP) position
• Engine speed dial is set to slow idle
An exhaust filter alarm indicator will appear on the monitor
to inform the operator when a parked cleaning needs to
DB84312,0000026 -19-09JAN12-1/1
Right Enable Switch
The right enable switch (1) is located on the right console.
TX1086796A —UN—11JAN11
Press right half of switch to enable auxiliary functions on
the right pilot control lever.
Press left half of switch to disable auxiliary functions on
the right pilot control lever.
1— Right Enable Switch
Right Enable Switch
OUT4001,0000747 -19-11JAN11-1/1
2-1-7
081214
PN=57
Operation—Operator's Station
Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) Switch
TX1086797A —UN—21JAN11
The Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) switch (1) allows
operator to accept or decline software updates available
to the machine when prompted by an alarm on the
monitor. LEDs on the SAR switch will illuminate when the
alarm appears. The left LED will be red and the right LED
will be green.
Press left side of SAR switch (red LED) to DECLINE
installation (2) of software updates.
Press right side of SAR switch (green LED) to ACCEPT
installation (3) of software updates.
For more information on SAR functionality, see Service
ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) Software Delivery Process
and Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) Software
Operation. (Section 2-3.)
Service ADVISOR™ Remote Switch
1— Service ADVISOR™
Remote (SAR) Switch
2— DECLINE Installation
3— ACCEPT Installation
Service ADVISOR is a trademark of Deere & Company
OUT4001,0000748 -19-22JAN11-1/1
2-1-8
081214
PN=58
Operation—Operator's Station
Cab Heater and Air Conditioner
Cab Heater Operation:
AUTO operation—
TX1086733A —UN—11JAN11
1. Press blower speed switch (1) while air conditioner is
OFF and it turns to AUTO mode (blower speed setting
and air flow setting are selected automatically).
2. Rotate temperature control/mode switch (2) to
reach operator's preferred cab degree heat setting.
Temperature setting will change on the air conditioner
display on the monitor as the switch is rotated either
way. Blower speed and air flow settings adjust
automatically to reach desired cab temperature and
maintain it.
Manual operation—
1. Press blower speed switch (1) while air conditioner is
OFF and it turns to AUTO mode. Rotate blower speed
switch either way to cancel AUTO mode and set the
blower speed manually to desired speed setting.
2. Rotate temperature control/mode switch (2) to
reach operator's preferred cab degree heat setting.
Temperature setting will change on the air conditioner
display on the monitor as the switch is rotated either
way.
3. Press temperature control/mode switch to toggle
between different air vent options. The air conditioner
display on the monitor will show the different settings
each time the switch is pressed. There are four
different settings:
- Air flows out of front vent and the defroster vents.
- Air flows out of front, rear, and the defroster vents.
- Air flows out of front, rear, foot, and the defroster
vents.
- Air flows out of foot vents.
NOTE: Usually the cab heater turns the dehumidifier
function OFF. To turn ON the dehumidifier function,
turn the air conditioner ON from the monitor menu.
See Main Menu—Air Conditioner. (Section 2-2.)
Cab Heater and Air Conditioner Operation
1— Blower Speed Switch
2— Temperature Control/Mode
Switch
will show the different settings each time the switch is
pressed. For best defrosting results, select either:
- Air flows out of front vent and the defroster vents.
- Air flows out of front, rear, and the defroster vents.
5. Control air flow direction by adjusting the vents in the
cab to blow towards the windows.
6. Rotate temperature control/mode switch as needed to
control preferred air temperature.
7. Rotate blower speed switch as needed to set preferred
fan speed.
Air Conditioner Operation
Defroster Operation
1. Press blower speed switch (1) while air conditioner is
OFF and it turns to AUTO mode. During cold weather
season when starting the engine, the engine coolant
temperature and air temperature in the cab are low.
The heater/air conditioner unit controls the blow rate
to the minimum in order to restrict cool air from flowing
into the cab.
2. Rotate temperature control/mode switch (2) to
reach operator's preferred cab degree heat setting.
Temperature setting will change on the air conditioner
display on the monitor as the switch is rotated either
way.
3. Set the circulation mode to fresh air using the monitor
menu. See Main Menu—Air Conditioner. (Section 2-2.)
4. Once AUTO mode is operating and cab starts to heat
up, press temperature control/mode switch to cancel
AUTO mode and toggle between different air vent
options. The air conditioner display on the monitor
NOTE: During off season, operate the air conditioner at
least once a month for several minutes with the
engine running at slow idle to protect each part of
the air conditioner compressor from lack of lubricant.
AUTO operation—
1. Press blower speed switch (1) while air conditioner is
OFF and it turns to AUTO mode (blower speed setting
and air flow setting are selected automatically).
2. Rotate temperature control/mode switch (2) to reach
operator's preferred cab degree cold air setting.
Temperature setting will change on the air conditioner
display on the monitor as the switch is rotated either
way. Blower speed and air flow settings adjust
automatically to reach desired cab temperature and
maintain it.
Manual operation—
1. Press blower speed switch (1) while air conditioner is
OFF and it turns to AUTO mode. Rotate blower speed
Continued on next page
2-1-9
OUT4001,0000741 -19-28FEB12-1/2
081214
PN=59
Operation—Operator's Station
switch either way to cancel AUTO mode and set the
blower speed manually to desired speed setting.
2. Turn the air conditioner ON from the monitor menu.
See Main Menu—Air Conditioner. (Section 2-2.)
3. Rotate temperature control/mode switch to reach
operator's preferred cab degree cold air setting.
Temperature setting will change on the air conditioner
display on the monitor as the switch is rotated either
way.
4. Press temperature control/mode switch to toggle
between different air vent options. The air conditioner
display on the monitor will show the different settings
each time the switch is pressed. There are four
different settings:
NOTE: If lower front window becomes cloudy,
close the defroster vents.
- Air flows out of front vent and the defroster vents.
- Air flows out of front, rear, and the defroster vents.
- Air flows out of front, rear, foot, and the defroster
vents.
- Air flows out of foot vents.
OUT4001,0000741 -19-28FEB12-2/2
Selecting Display Between Celsius and
Fahrenheit
TX1087258A —UN—24JAN11
The cab temperature (1) is always shown in the air
conditioner display on the monitor. Temperature display
can be changed between degrees Celsius (°C) and
Fahrenheit (°F) using the Unit Selection menu. For
more information, see Main Menu—Setting Menu—Unit
Selection. (Section 2-2.)
Degrees Celsius (°C) can be set in a range from
18°C—32°C.
Degrees Fahrenheit (°F) can be set in a range from
63°F—91°F.
Air Conditioner Display on the Monitor
1— Cab Temperature
OUT4001,0000742 -19-14MAR11-1/1
2-1-10
081214
PN=60
Operation—Operator's Station
Operating the AM/FM Radio
Press the radio power and volume switch (1) to turn ON
the radio. Rotate the radio power and volume switch to
desired volume setting. Treble and base settings are
available through the monitor menu. For more information,
see Main Menu—Radio. (Section 2-2.)
TX1087264A —UN—24JAN11
Press the radio tuning switch (2) to toggle between AM
or FM frequency. Rotate radio tuning switch to tune
radio to desired AM or FM station. To find the clearest
reception stations for the area, use the seek function
that is available through the monitor menu. For more
information, see Main Menu—Radio. (Section 2-2.)
Press buttons 1—8 on the keypad (3) to move between
preset memory radio stations. Radio display (4) on
monitor shows the station and frequency setting that
corresponds with each keypad button.
NOTE: Presetting memory radio stations can also be
done using the monitor menu. Stations can be
automatically selected for the area using the auto
preset option in the monitor menu. For more
information, see Main Menu—Radio. (Section 2-2.)
Radio Controls on Switch Panel
1— Radio Power and Volume
Switch
2— Radio Tuning Switch
TX1087265A —UN—24JAN11
To preset memory radio stations or to change previously
set stations using the keypad, tune radio to desired station
setting. Press and hold one of the keypad buttons (1
to 8) for more than 1 second. Setting is stored to that
corresponding button. Repeat procedure for seven other
desired stations.
3— Keypad
4— Radio Display
Radio Display on Monitor
OUT4001,0000743 -19-24JAN11-1/1
2-1-11
081214
PN=61
Operation—Operator's Station
Fire Extinguisher Mounting Location
MOUNTING LOCATION:
The designated fire extinguisher mounting location (1) is
inside the cab on the left rear side.
USE:
NOTE: All fire extinguishers do not operate the same.
Read operating instructions on canister.
TX1086294 —UN—03JAN11
The portable fire extinguisher is used to aid in the
extinguishing of small fires. Refer to individual
manufacturer’s instructions and proper fire fighting
procedures before the need to use the fire extinguisher
arises. See Prevent Fires. (Section 1-2.)
MAINTENANCE:
IMPORTANT: Avoid possible machine damage.
Check gauge (if equipped) on fire extinguisher.
If fire extinguisher is not fully charged,
recharge or replace it according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Inspect and maintain the fire extinguisher following the
manufacturer’s recommendations and all local, regional
and national regulations.
Fire Extinguisher Mounting Location
1— Fire Extinguisher Mounting
Location
ER79617,0000D80 -19-09JAN12-1/1
Secondary Exit Tool
IMPORTANT: For secondary exit of machine, use
the secondary exit tool to break window.
Always keep tool inside cab.
Secondary exit tool (1) is located on the left side post
inside the cab.
TX1085781A —UN—13DEC10
1— Secondary Exit Tool
Secondary Exit Tool
ER79617,0000D4F -19-09JAN12-1/1
2-1-12
081214
PN=62
Operation—Operator's Station
Cab Dome Light Switch
The cab dome light is located on the right side of cab roof.
There are three operating positions:
• ON (1):
TX1086802A —UN—11JAN11
The cab light turns ON and stays ON until
switch is moved to the OFF position.
NOTE: The cab light will NOT turn ON if the key
switch is in OFF position.
• Cab door—middle position (2):
The cab light turns
ON when the door is opened. When the cab door is
closed or cab door is left in the open position, the cab
light turns OFF automatically after 30 seconds.
NOTE: The cab light will turn ON if the key
switch is in OFF position.
Cab Dome Light Switch
1— ON
2— Cab Door—Middle Position
3— OFF
• OFF (3): The cab light turns OFF and stays OFF until
switch is moved to the cab door—middle position or
ON position.
OUT4001,0000745 -19-26JAN11-1/1
Opening Upper Front (Secondary Exit)
Window
TX1087290A —UN—25JAN11
NOTE: The wiper cannot operate with the upper front
window open. The washer can operate with
the upper front window open.
1. Park machine on a solid, level surface.
2. Lower equipment to the ground.
3. Stop engine and pull pilot shutoff lever to locked (UP)
position.
4. Lift the lock pin (1) up, slide inward, then down into
notch.
5. Pull the lock release bar (2) toward operator.
Upper Front Window
1— Lock Pin
6. While holding the lower handle on the window, pull
window up and guide all the way back on track until it
clicks into position.
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from window
closing unexpectedly. Always lock the pin
in the cab frame boss hole.
2— Lock Release Bar
comes down forcefully. Close window only
when sitting in operator’s seat.
8. To close upper front window, unlock pin and pull lock
release bar down. Hold lower handle on the window
and guide window down the track slowly until it clicks
into position. Install lock pin.
7. Slide the lock pin into the cab frame boss hole and
rotate downward into the lock position.
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury when closing
the upper front window. Upper front window
OUT4001,0000779 -19-25JAN11-1/1
2-1-13
081214
PN=63
Operation—Operator's Station
Removing and Storing the Lower Front
Window
T136266 —UN—18DEC00
NOTE: In cold weather, some operators may choose
to work with the upper front window open and
the lower front window in place. This provides
excellent visibility and tends to hold the heat being
circulated around the operator’s feet.
Upper front window must be opened and locked in
position before lower front window can be removed.
1. While pulling in on window, raise window to remove.
2. Store window in rear storage area of cab behind
operator’s seat. Install window in lower protectors (1)
first.
Removing and Storing the Lower Front Window
3. Slide window into the upper left protector (2).
TX1087294A —UN—25JAN11
4. Push right fastener (3) up and slide window under
fastener.
5. Release fastener to secure window in storage position.
1— Lower Protector (2 used)
2— Upper Left Protector
3— Right Fastener
Storage Area for Lower Front Window
OUT4001,000077A -19-23FEB12-1/1
Opening Cab Door Window
To open cab window, pinch latch (1) and slide rear pane
forward.
T214915 —UN—17NOV05
1— Latch
Cab Window Latch
VD76477,00001C4 -19-09JAN12-1/1
2-1-14
081214
PN=64
Operation—Operator's Station
Opening and Closing the Polycarbonate
Type Roof Exit Cover
TX1087303A —UN—25JAN11
IMPORTANT: Replace the polycarbonate type
roof with a new one every 5 years, even if
undamaged. In case it was remarkably damaged
or has received severe shock loads, replace it
even if it has not been in use for 5 years.
When cleaning the polycarbonate type roof,
use a neutral detergent. If acidic or alkaline
detergent is used, the polycarbonate type roof
may become discolored or crack.
Keep organic solvent away from polycarbonate
type roof. Failure to do so may cause
the polycarbonate type roof to become
discolored or crack.
Opening the Roof Exit Cover:
Roof Exit Cover
1— Lock Lever (2 used)
2— Handle
Closing the Roof Exit Cover:
1. Move lock levers (1) toward center of roof exit.
Hold handle and pull roof exit cover down until levers
lock in position.
2. Push on handle (2) to open roof exit cover.
OUT4001,000077B -19-28FEB12-1/1
Adjusting the Mechanical Suspension Seat
While sitting on seat, push down on seat angle lever (1) to
adjust seat to desired angle. Release lever.
TX1000836A —UN—29NOV05
Pull up on seat fore-aft handle (2) to unlock seat. Slide seat
to desired distance from control levers. Release handle.
Turn weight adjustment knob (3) to adjust seat to weight
of operator.
Squeeze lumbar ball (4) to add air for firmness to lower
backrest area. Press button on bottom of lumbar ball to
release air and decrease firmness.
Pull up on backrest lever (5) to release backrest lock.
Move backrest to desired position. Release lever.
Mechanical Suspension Seat
Pull headrest (6) upward or push downward to desired
height. Move headrest to desired angle.
T140133 —UN—02MAY01
Pull up on armrest (7) to move it out of the way when
exiting the cab.
Turn armrest dial (8) to adjust angle of armrest.
Pull seat and console handle (9) up toward operator. Slide
entire seat and consoles to desired distance from travel
pedals and levers. Release handle.
1— Seat Angle Lever
2— Seat Fore-Aft Handle
3— Weight Adjustment Knob
4— Lumbar Ball
5— Backrest Lever
6— Headrest
7— Armrest
8— Armrest Dial
9— Seat and Console Handle
Adjusting The Seat
OUT4001,000077D -19-09FEB12-1/1
2-1-15
081214
PN=65
Operation—Operator's Station
Adjusting the Air Suspension Seat—If
Equipped
TX1087310A —UN—25JAN11
While sitting on seat, push down on seat angle lever (1) to
adjust seat to desired angle. Release lever.
Pull up on seat fore-aft handle (2) to unlock seat. Slide seat
to desired distance from control levers. Release handle.
Pull out firmness button (3) to decrease seat firmness.
With key switch in the ON position, press in and hold
firmness button to increase seat firmness.
Pull up on backrest lever (4) to release backrest lock.
Move backrest to desired position. Release lever.
Air Suspension Seat
Squeeze lumbar ball (5) to add air for firmness to lower
backrest area. Press button on bottom of lumbar ball to
release air and decrease firmness.
T140133 —UN—02MAY01
Pull headrest (6) upward or push downward to desired
height. Move headrest to desired angle.
Pull up on armrest (7) to move it out of the way when
exiting the cab.
Turn armrest dial (8) to adjust angle of armrest.
Pull seat and console handle (9) up toward operator. Slide
entire seat and consoles to desired distance from travel
pedals and levers. Release handle.
1— Seat Angle Lever
2— Seat Fore-Aft Handle
3— Firmness Button
4— Backrest Lever
5— Lumbar Ball
Adjusting The Armrest
6— Headrest
7— Armrest
8— Armrest Dial
9— Seat and Console Handle
OUT4001,000077C -19-23FEB12-1/1
Adjusting Pilot Control Lever Console Height
TX1087326A —UN—25JAN11
CAUTION: Avoid possible crushing injury
from console unexpectedly dropping. Before
loosening the cap screws, support the console.
1. Ensure engine is OFF and pilot shutoff lever is in
locked (UP) position.
2. Remove right console holding cap screws (1).
3. Loosen cap screw (2) and adjust the pilot control lever
console height relative to the cab floor.
4. Install holding cap screws in holes for desired console
height and tighten.
Right Side of Seat Shown
1— Holding Cap Screw (2 used)
5. Tighten cap screw.
Specification
Cap Screws—Torque....................................................................50 N·m
36.9 lb.-ft.
2— Cap Screw
Repeat procedure for left console.
DB84312,0000087 -19-09APR12-1/1
2-1-16
081214
PN=66
Operation—Monitor Operation
Monitor
2
1
17
3 16 15
ECO
19
20
4
50.0h
10:00
6
AM
7
A/I A/S
5
18
F
H
8
E
C
13
12
TX1130164
10
CH1
24.0˚C
FM
VOL
81.3
9
TX1130164 —UN—25JAN13
14
11
ST
MHz
Monitor
12— Air Conditioner Display
13— Coolant Temperature Mark
14— Coolant Temperature
Gauge
15— Auxiliary Indicator
16— Auxiliary Indicator
17— Auxiliary Indicator
18— Travel Speed Indicator
19— Auto Shutdown Indicator
20— Auto-Idle Indicator
21— Alarm Indicators
TX1086438 —UN—05JAN11
1— Work Mode Indicator
2— Exhaust Filter Indicator
3— Power Mode Indicator
4— Hour Meter and Clock
5— Not Used
6— Engine Preheat Indicator
7— Seat Belt Indicator
8— Fuel Gauge
9— Fuel Mark
10— Sub Meter
11— Radio Display
Alarm Indicators
OUT4001,000071A -19-25JAN13-1/1
2-2-1
081214
PN=67
Operation—Monitor Operation
Monitor Functions
1. Work Mode Indicator: Displays icon for the current
attachment being used (digging mode, breaker, pulverizer,
crusher, vibrating hammer, grapple, clamshell, or others).
For more information, see Main Menu—Work Mode in
this section.
2. Exhaust Filter Indicator: Displays condition of the
exhaust filter. Two different indicators could appear here:
TX1086447 —UN—05JAN11
Exhaust Filter Cleaning Indicator
• Exhaust Filter Cleaning Indicator appears when
TX1086347 —UN—06JAN11
Exhaust Filter Auto Cleaning
Disabled Indicator
exhaust temperature is high during an auto or parked
cleaning.
information, see Main Menu—Setting Menu—Sub Meter
Selection in this section.
NOTE: The exhaust filter auto cleaning disabled
indicator will display on the monitor when the
key switch is in ON position. Once the engine
is started, the indicator will disappear unless
exhaust filter auto cleaning has been disabled
by the operator through the monitor.
11. Radio Display: Shows current radio station,
frequency, and volume setting.
12. Air Conditioner Display: Shows blower fan speed,
selected air vent, and temperature setting.
13. Coolant Temperature Mark: If coolant temperature
sensor is malfunctioning, color of the coolant temperature
mark changes and the needle disappears. If the harness
between the coolant temperature sensor and the monitor
unit is broken, the needle disappears but the coolant
temperature mark color does not change.
• Exhaust Filter Auto Cleaning Disabled Indicator
appears when exhaust filter auto cleaning has been
disabled by the operator. For more information, see
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Exhaust Filter in this
section.
14. Coolant Temperature Gauge:
3. Power Mode Indicator: Displays a power mode
selected from the switch panel (ECO, PWR, or H/P). For
more information, see Switch Panel Functions. (Section
2-1.)
IMPORTANT: Possible engine damage may occur. If
needle points to RED zone, idle engine to bring
back to BLUE zone before stopping engine. If
needle continues to rise, stop engine.
4. Hour Meter and Clock: Displays total machine
operation hours counted since the machine started
working in the unit of hours (h). One digit after the decimal
point indicates tenths of an hour (6 minutes).
Clock indicates present time.
Displays engine coolant temperature. Needle should be
around the center of the scale during operation.
15. Auxiliary Indicator: Displays optional auxiliary data
indicator.
16. Auxiliary Indicator: Displays optional auxiliary data
indicator.
5. Not Used.
6. Engine Preheat Indicator:
17. Auxiliary Indicator: Displays optional auxiliary data
indicator.
IMPORTANT: Prevent engine damage. Do not
use ether in this machine.
If preheating is required, the engine preheat indicator is
automatically lit. If preheating is not required, this indicator
will not display.
7. Seat Belt Indicator: Displays when key switch is ON,
and disappears 5 seconds after the engine starts.
8. Fuel Gauge: Displays remaining fuel amount as
indicated by the needle. Fuel machine before needle
reaches E.
18. Travel Speed Indicator: Displays travel speed
selected from the switch panel (rabbit—fast speed travel
or turtle—slow speed travel).
19. Auto Shutdown Indicator: Displays if auto shutdown
was selected by operator from the menu screen. For
more information, see Main Menu—Setting Menu—Auto
Shutdown in this section.
20. Auto-Idle Indicator: Displays if auto-idle mode is
turned ON from the switch panel. For more information,
see Switch Panel Functions. (Section 2-1.)
9. Fuel Mark: If fuel sensor is malfunctioning, color of
the fuel mark changes and the needle disappears. If the
harness between the fuel sensor and the monitor unit is
broken, the needle disappears but the fuel mark color
does not change.
21. Alarm Indicators: Displays if an abnormality occurs.
If six or more alarms are generated, the indicators can
be scrolled through using the monitor dial on the switch
panel. For more information, see Main Menu—Alarm List
in this section.
10. Sub Meter: Displays fuel consumption or breaker
hours depending on what is set in the monitor. For more
Continued on next page
2-2-2
OUT4001,000071B -19-25JAN13-1/2
081214
PN=68
Operation—Monitor Operation
OUT4001,000071B -19-25JAN13-2/2
Monitor Start-Up
NOTE: Start the engine after the default screen
is displayed.
When the key switch is turned to the ON position, the
system starting screen (1) displays for about 2 seconds
and then the default screen (2) is displayed.
System Starting Screen
2— Default Screen
TX1086304A —UN—28DEC10
1— System Starting Screen
TX1086287A —UN—28DEC10
NOTE: The exhaust filter auto cleaning disabled indicator
will display on the monitor when the key switch is in
ON position. Once the engine is started, the indicator
will disappear unless exhaust filter auto cleaning has
been disabled by the operator through the monitor.
Default Screen
OUT4001,000071C -19-28FEB12-1/1
2-2-3
081214
PN=69
Operation—Monitor Operation
Main Menu
TX1086305A —UN—28DEC10
When the default screen (5) is displayed, press the
monitor dial (2) on the switch panel to display the Main
Menu screen (1).
The Main Menu screen displays submenus which can be
selected to view diagnostic information or change various
operating characteristics of the machine or the monitor.
NOTE: Translations shown on screen may be abbreviated.
The submenus under Main Menu that appear on monitor
include:
Default Screen
NOTE: Alarm List ONLY appears as a submenu
if there is an actual alarm.
• Alarm List—provides detailed information of generated
alarms.
TX1086306A —UN—28DEC10
• Air Conditioner—provides air conditioner functions.
• Radio—provides radio functions.
• Work Mode—provides front attachment functions.
• Setting Menu—allows operator to change various
monitor and machine functions.
• Information Menu—allows operator to view operating
hours, maintenance items, troubleshooting (diagnostic
trouble codes [DTCs]), engine speed, and exhaust filter
accumulation.
Main Menu Screen
NOTE: The Alarm List will always be displayed first on
the Main Menu if there is an actual alarm. Air
Conditioner, Radio, and Work Mode submenus
can be ordered in the sequence that is preferred
according to how often they are used. For
changing the order sequence of these submenus,
see Main Menu—Setting Menu—Main Menu
Sequence Change in this section.
Rotate monitor dial to highlight desired submenu. Press
dial button to display chosen submenu.
Press Back button (3) to return to previous screen.
1— Main Menu Screen
2— Monitor Dial
3— Back Button
TX1086272A —UN—27DEC10
Press Home button (4) to return to default screen.
4— Home Button
5— Default Screen
Switch Panel
OUT4001,000071D -19-03JAN11-1/1
2-2-4
081214
PN=70
Operation—Monitor Operation
Main Menu—Alarm List
TX1086306A —UN—28DEC10
The Alarm List menu will always appear as the first
submenu under Main Menu, but ONLY if there is an actual
alarm generated. If there is more than one alarm, a list
will be displayed. If there are no alarms, Alarm List will
not appear as a submenu.
The submenus under Main Menu that appear on monitor
include:
NOTE: Alarm List ONLY appears as a submenu
if there is an actual alarm.
• Alarm List
• Air Conditioner
• Radio
• Work Mode
• Setting Menu
• Information Menu
Main Menu Screen
At Main Menu screen (1) with Alarm List highlighted, press
monitor dial (2) to view generated alarms.
If there is more than one alarm, rotate monitor dial to
highlight a particular alarm. Press monitor dial to view
detailed information about that alarm and how to rectify
the problem.
TX1086272A —UN—27DEC10
When an alarm indicator appears on the monitor display,
an alarm light (5) is also illuminated on the bottom of the
monitor to alert the operator.
Press Back button (3) to return to previous screen.
Press Home button (4) to return to default screen.
4— Home Button
5— Alarm Light
Switch Panel
TX1086914A —UN—13JAN11
1— Main Menu Screen
2— Monitor Dial
3— Back Button
Alarm Light
Continued on next page
2-2-5
DB84312,000002D -19-02OCT12-1/24
081214
PN=71
Operation—Monitor Operation
TX1086346 —UN—06JAN11
Possible alarm indicators that could appear are:
•Exhaust Filter Alarms—The same exhaust filter alarm
symbol appears, but the condition of the alarm is different.
If the alarm symbol is:
• Illuminated and yellow—Exhaust filter is restricted and
•
•
Exhaust Filter Alarm
at HIGH soot level. Enable auto cleaning, disable
auto-idle, and operate machine normally or move
machine to safe area and perform a parked cleaning.
Blinking and yellow—Exhaust filter is restricted and at
VERY HIGH soot level. The warning alarm will also
illuminate yellow. Immediately move machine to safe
area and perform a parked cleaning.
Blinking and red—Exhaust filter is very restricted
and at SERVICE soot level. The warning alarm
will also illuminate red. Immediately park machine,
stop the engine, and a service cleaning will need to
be performed. For service cleaning, contact your
authorized John Deere dealer.
For more information on exhaust filter, see Exhaust Filter.
(Section 2-3.)
DB84312,000002D -19-02OCT12-2/24
•Exhaust Filter Auto Cleaning Disabled Alarm—Auto
cleaning is disabled and exhaust filter needs to be cleaned.
Move machine to safe area and perform a parked cleaning.
TX1086347 —UN—06JAN11
Exhaust Filter Auto Cleaning Disabled Alarm
DB84312,000002D -19-02OCT12-3/24
•Exhaust Filter Error Alarm—There is a system or
hardware error causing the exhaust filter cleaning to abort.
See your authorized dealer.
TX1086356 —UN—06JAN11
Exhaust Filter Error Alarm
DB84312,000002D -19-02OCT12-4/24
TX1086348 —UN—06JAN11
•Engine Oil Level Alarm—Check engine oil level and
refill oil.
Engine Oil Level Alarm
DB84312,000002D -19-02OCT12-5/24
TX1086353 —UN—06JAN11
•Engine Oil Pressure Alarm—Engine oil pressure has
decreased. Immediately stop engine. Check engine oil
system and oil level.
Engine Oil Pressure Alarm
Continued on next page
2-2-6
DB84312,000002D -19-02OCT12-6/24
081214
PN=72
Operation—Monitor Operation
•Engine Start Disabled Alarm—Engine will not start due
to pilot shutoff lever being lowered.
TX1086354 —UN—06JAN11
Engine Start Disabled Alarm
DB84312,000002D -19-02OCT12-7/24
•Engine Overheat Alarm—Engine coolant temperature
has abnormally increased. Stop operation. Run the engine
at slow idle speed or lower the coolant temperature.
TX1086350 —UN—06JAN11
Engine Overheat Alarm
DB84312,000002D -19-02OCT12-8/24
•Warning Alarm—An abnormal condition has been
detected. Alarm will either be red or yellow depending on
severity of problem. Contact your authorized John Deere
dealer.
TX1086352 —UN—06JAN11
Warning Alarm
DB84312,000002D -19-02OCT12-9/24
TX1087187 —UN—21JAN11
•Programming Alarm—If this Service ADVISOR™
Remote (SAR) programming alarm appears on the
monitor, different conditions may exist depending on the
color. If this alarm is:
• YELLOW—Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR)
•
Programming Alarm
software update is ready to install.
RED—SAR programming is in process. Do not turn
OFF machine power until programming is complete.
• GREEN—SAR programming is complete and cycle
machine power to complete the process.
Service ADVISOR is a trademark of Deere & Company
DB84312,000002D -19-02OCT12-10/24
TX1087189 —UN—21JAN11
•Program Failure Alarm—This alarm will appear along
with a red warning alarm. A problem occurred during
the Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) programming
process. Contact your authorized John Deere dealer.
Program Failure Alarm
Continued on next page
2-2-7
DB84312,000002D -19-02OCT12-11/24
081214
PN=73
Operation—Monitor Operation
•Unable to Program Alarm—This alarm will appear
along with a yellow warning alarm. A condition exists that
will not allow the transfer of new Service ADVISOR™
Remote (SAR) software to happen. Retry programming or
contact your authorized John Deere dealer.
TX1087190 —UN—21JAN11
Unable to Program Alarm
DB84312,000002D -19-02OCT12-12/24
TX1086349 —UN—06JAN11
•Coolant Level Alarm—Check coolant level and refill
coolant.
Coolant Level Alarm
DB84312,000002D -19-02OCT12-13/24
•Engine Air Filter Restriction Alarm—Air filter elements
are clogged. Clean or replace air filter elements.
TX1086365 —UN—06JAN11
Engine Air Filter Restriction Alarm
DB84312,000002D -19-02OCT12-14/24
•Boost Temperature Alarm—Engine intake air
temperature has abnormally increased. Stop operation.
Check charge air cooler for clogging and intake air piping
for disconnection.
TX1086355 —UN—06JAN11
BOOST
Boost Temperature Alarm
DB84312,000002D -19-02OCT12-15/24
TX1086351 —UN—06JAN11
•Hydraulic Oil Overheat Alarm—Hydraulic oil
temperature has abnormally increased. Stop operation,
check hydraulic oil level, and check for leaks.
Hydraulic Oil Overheat Alarm
DB84312,000002D -19-02OCT12-16/24
TX1086364 —UN—06JAN11
•Hydraulic Oil Filter Restriction Alarm—Hydraulic oil
filter is clogged. Replace filter.
Hydraulic Oil Filter Restriction Alarm
Continued on next page
2-2-8
DB84312,000002D -19-02OCT12-17/24
081214
PN=74
Operation—Monitor Operation
TX1086357 —UN—06JAN11
•Hydraulic Oil Cooling System Alarm—Hydraulic oil
cooling system is abnormal. Contact your authorized
John Deere dealer.
Hydraulic Oil Cooling System Alarm
DB84312,000002D -19-02OCT12-18/24
TX1086358 —UN—06JAN11
•Alternator Alarm—Electrical system is abnormal.
Contact your authorized John Deere dealer.
Alternator Alarm
DB84312,000002D -19-02OCT12-19/24
TX1086362 —UN—06JAN11
•Fuel Level Alarm—Fuel level is low. Refill fuel tank as
soon as possible.
Fuel Level Alarm
DB84312,000002D -19-02OCT12-20/24
TX1086363 —UN—06JAN11
•Fuel Temperature Alarm—Fuel temperature has
abnormally increased. Stop operation. Check fuel cooler
for any malfunction such as clogging.
Fuel Temperature Alarm
DB84312,000002D -19-02OCT12-21/24
TX1086366 —UN—06JAN11
•Fuel Filter Restriction Alarm—Fuel filter is clogged.
Clean or replace fuel filter elements.
Fuel Filter Restriction Alarm
DB84312,000002D -19-02OCT12-22/24
•System Failure Alarm—Satellite communication system
is abnormal. Contact your authorized John Deere dealer.
TX1086367 —UN—06JAN11
System Failure Alarm
Continued on next page
2-2-9
DB84312,000002D -19-02OCT12-23/24
081214
PN=75
Operation—Monitor Operation
•Pilot Shutoff Lever Alarm—Pilot shutoff lever system is
abnormal. Contact your authorized John Deere dealer.
TX1086368 —UN—06JAN11
Pilot Shutoff Lever Alarm
DB84312,000002D -19-02OCT12-24/24
2-2-10
081214
PN=76
Operation—Monitor Operation
TX1086306A —UN—28DEC10
Main Menu—Air Conditioner
TX1086272A —UN—27DEC10
Main Menu Screen
Switch Panel
The Air Conditioner menu allows operator to turn the air
conditioner ON or OFF and set the circulation air mode to
recirculating cab air or fresh air.
TX1086310A —UN—28DEC10
The submenus under Main Menu that appear on monitor
include:
NOTE: Alarm List ONLY appears as a submenu
if there is an actual alarm.
• Alarm List
• Air Conditioner
• Radio
• Work Mode
• Setting Menu
• Information Menu
Circulating Air Icon
TX1086311A —UN—28DEC10
At Main Menu screen (1), rotate monitor dial (2) to
highlight Air Conditioner. Press monitor dial to display
Air Conditioner menu.
Air Conditioner menu items include:
□ (Cab recirculating air mode symbol is displayed.)
Rotate monitor dial to highlight the cab recirculating
air mode symbol. Press monitor dial to turn ON the
cab recirculating air mode. The color of the preceding
square will turn green and a recirculating air icon (5) will
appear in the air conditioner display in the lower left
corner of the monitor. Press monitor dial again to turn
OFF the recirculating air mode and switch to fresh air
mode. The color of the preceding square will be gray
and a fresh air icon (6) will appear in the air conditioner
display in the lower left corner of the monitor.
Fresh Air Icon
1— Main Menu Screen
2— Monitor Dial
3— Back Button
Continued on next page
2-2-11
4— Home Button
5— Recirculating Air Icon
6— Fresh Air Icon
OUT4001,000071E -19-28APR14-1/2
081214
PN=77
Operation—Monitor Operation
□ A/C
Rotate monitor dial to highlight A/C. Press monitor
dial to turn ON the air conditioner. The color of the
preceding square will turn green and an air conditioner
icon (7) will appear in the air conditioner display in the
lower left corner of the monitor. Press monitor dial
again to turn OFF the air conditioner. The color of the
preceding square will be gray and air conditioner icon
will disappear.
If an exclamation mark appears on the monitor,
communication between the air conditioner and the
monitor is abnormal. See your authorized dealer.
TX1086312A —UN—28DEC10
NOTE: Blower speed switch on switch panel needs to
be ON in order to operate the ON/OFF function
of the air conditioner in the monitor menu.
Air Conditioner Icon
7— Air Conditioner Icon
Press Back button (3) to return to previous screen.
Press Home button (4) to return to default screen.
OUT4001,000071E -19-28APR14-2/2
2-2-12
081214
PN=78
Operation—Monitor Operation
Main Menu—Radio
The Radio menu allows operator to set preferred radio
stations and adjust the tone settings.
TX1086306A —UN—28DEC10
The submenus under Main Menu that appear on monitor
include:
NOTE: Alarm List ONLY appears as a submenu
if there is an actual alarm.
• Alarm List
• Air Conditioner
• Radio
• Work Mode
• Setting Menu
• Information Menu
Main Menu Screen
At Main Menu screen (1), rotate monitor dial (2) to
highlight Radio. Press monitor dial to display Radio menu.
Radio menu items include:
TX1086274A —UN—27DEC10
• CH1 AM _ _ _ _ kHz
• CH2 AM _ _ _ _ kHz
• CH3 AM _ _ _ _ kHz
• CH4 AM _ _ _ _ kHz
• CH5 FM _ _ _ ._ MHz
• CH6 FM _ _ _ ._ MHz
• CH7 FM _ _ _ ._ MHz
• CH8 FM _ _ _ ._ MHz
NOTE: Presetting memory radio stations can also be
done using the keypad on switch panel. See
Operating the AM/FM Radio. (Section 2-1.)
•
•
•
Press radio tuning switch (5) to toggle between AM or
FM frequency. Tune radio to desired AM or FM station
by rotating the radio tuning switch. When desired station
is found, rotate monitor dial to highlight CH1. Press and
hold monitor dial for more than 1 second. Current station
is set. Repeat procedure for seven additional AM or FM
stations using CH2 through CH8. Once the stations are
stored, operator can select these programmed stations
by using keys 1—8 on the switch panel keypad (6).
<<
Rotate monitor dial to highlight <<. Press monitor dial
to seek next lower frequency station. Continue to press
monitor dial to seek next lower frequency station until
desired station is found.
>>
Rotate monitor dial to highlight >>. Press monitor dial to
seek next higher frequency station. Continue to press
monitor dial to seek next higher frequency station until
desired station is found.
TONE
Rotate monitor dial to highlight TONE. Press monitor
dial to adjust tone. (Backlighting will turn orange.)
Rotate monitor dial clockwise to boost treble. Rotate
monitor dial counterclockwise to boost base. Press
monitor dial again to store changes.
Switch Panel
1— Main Menu Screen
2— Monitor Dial
3— Back Button
4— Home Button
5— Radio Tuning Switch
6— Keypad
• AUTO PRESET
Rotate monitor dial to highlight AUTO PRESET. Press
monitor dial to start auto preset process. The AUTO
PRESET scans reception frequency and allocates
stations to CH1 to CH8. AM frequency stations will be
preset to CH1 to CH4 and FM frequency stations will be
preset to CH5 to CH8. Operating the radio during the
scan stops the AUTO PRESET process.
If an exclamation mark appears in the radio display on
the monitor, communication between the radio and the
monitor is abnormal. See your authorized dealer.
Press Back button (3) to return to previous screen.
Press Home button (4) to return to default screen.
OUT4001,000071F -19-28APR14-1/1
2-2-13
081214
PN=79
Operation—Monitor Operation
Main Menu—Work Mode
The Work Mode menu allows operator to select front
attachment.
TX1086306A —UN—28DEC10
The submenus under Main Menu that appear on monitor
include:
NOTE: Alarm List ONLY appears as a submenu
if there is an actual alarm.
• Alarm List
• Air Conditioner
• Radio
• Work Mode
• Setting Menu
• Information Menu
Main Menu Screen
At Main Menu screen (1), rotate monitor dial (2) to
highlight Work Mode. Press monitor dial to display Work
Mode menu.
Work Mode menu items include:
TX1086272A —UN—27DEC10
NOTE: This list of front attachments are examples
only. Personalized list of front attachments can
be entered in monitor through the Attachment
Name Input screen. See Main Menu—Setting
Menu—Attachment Name Input in this section.
• Bucket (bucket icon will also be shown)
• Breaker 1 (breaker icon will also be shown)
Type-A
• Breaker 2 (breaker icon will also be shown)
Type-B
• Pulverizer 1 (pulverizer icon will also be shown)
• Crusher 1 (crusher icon will also be shown)
• Grapple 1 (grapple icon will also be shown)
Switch Panel
Rotate monitor dial to highlight desired front attachment.
Press monitor dial to select the desired attachment for
operation.
—If Bucket work mode was selected, screen will revert
back to the default screen and a bucket icon displays on
monitor in the upper left corner.
—If any other work mode is selected, the following
information is displayed:
• Maximum Pump Flow Rate..........XXX.XX gpm
• Maximum Engine Speed.................XXXX min-¹
• Selector Valve................................O/T or C/V
• 2 Pumps Combined Flow.........OFF/ON
• Breaker Relief Pressure.........OFF/ON
1— Main Menu Screen
2— Monitor Dial
•
3— Back Button
4— Home Button
If adjustments need to be made to this information, see
your authorized dealer. If information is correct and
ready for operation, rotate monitor dial to highlight the
checkmark ( ) and press monitor dial. Screen will revert
back to the default screen and selected attachment icon
displays on monitor in the upper left corner.
Press Back button (3) to return to previous screen.
Press Home button (4) to return to default screen.
OUT4001,0000720 -19-28APR14-1/1
2-2-14
081214
PN=80
Operation—Monitor Operation
Main Menu—Setting Menu
The Setting Menu allows operator to change various
monitor and machine functions.
TX1086306A —UN—28DEC10
The submenus under Main Menu that appear on monitor
include:
NOTE: Alarm List ONLY appears as a submenu
if there is an actual alarm.
• Alarm List
• Air Conditioner
• Radio
• Work Mode
• Setting Menu
• Information Menu
Main Menu Screen
At Main Menu screen (1), rotate monitor dial (2) to highlight
Setting Menu. Press monitor dial to display Setting Menu.
Setting Menu items include:
TX1086272A —UN—27DEC10
• Date and Time
• Attachment Name Input
• Auto Shutdown
• Auto Exhaust Filter Cleaning
• Sub Meter Selection
• Rear View Camera Monitor
• Display Item Selection
• Brightness Adjustment
• Language
• Unit Selection
• Main Menu Sequence Change
Rotate monitor dial to highlight a Setting submenu. Press
monitor dial to display chosen Setting submenu.
Press Back button (3) to return to previous screen.
Switch Panel
Press Home button (4) to return to default screen.
1— Main Menu Screen
2— Monitor Dial
3— Back Button
4— Home Button
OUT4001,0000721 -19-28APR14-1/1
2-2-15
081214
PN=81
Operation—Monitor Operation
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Date and Time
The Date and Time menu provides the capability to
change the date and time settings. Year/month/day format
and 24h/12h display mode can also be changed.
At Setting Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight Date and
Time. Press monitor dial to display Date and Time menu.
Date and Time menu items include:
• Time Setting
•
(present time is displayed here)
- Hour
- Minute
Rotate monitor dial to highlight Time Setting. Press
monitor dial to display Time Setting screen. Rotate
monitor dial to highlight Hour and press monitor dial.
(Backlighting will turn orange.) Rotate monitor dial to
adjust the hour setting. (Rotate clockwise to increment
number and counterclockwise to decrement number.)
Press monitor dial when desired hour setting is reached.
Rotate monitor dial to highlight Minute and press monitor
dial. (Backlighting will turn orange.) Rotate monitor
dial to adjust the minute setting. (Rotate clockwise to
increment number and counterclockwise to decrement
number.) Press monitor dial when desired minute
setting is reached. Rotate monitor dial to highlight check
mark ( ). Press monitor dial to store the Time Settings.
Date Setting
- Year
- Month
- Day
Rotate monitor dial to highlight Date Setting. Press
monitor dial to display Date Setting screen. Rotate
•
monitor dial to highlight Year and press monitor dial.
(Backlighting will turn orange.) Rotate monitor dial to
adjust the year setting. (Rotate clockwise to increment
number and counterclockwise to decrement number.)
Press monitor dial when desired year setting is reached.
Rotate monitor dial to highlight Month and press monitor
dial. (Backlighting will turn orange.) Rotate monitor
dial to adjust the month setting. (Rotate clockwise to
increment number and counterclockwise to decrement
number.) Press monitor dial when desired month
setting is reached. Rotate monitor dial to highlight Day
and press monitor dial. (Backlighting will turn orange.)
Rotate monitor dial to adjust the day setting. (Rotate
clockwise to increment number and counterclockwise to
decrement number.) Press monitor dial when desired
day setting is reached. Rotate monitor dial to highlight
check mark ( ). Press monitor dial to store the Date
Settings.
Display Form
- Time
- Date
Rotate monitor dial to highlight Display Form. Press
monitor dial to display Display Form screen. Rotate
monitor dial to highlight Time and press monitor dial.
Press monitor dial to switch between 12h or 24h
settings. When desired time setting is reached, rotate
monitor dial to highlight Date and press monitor dial.
Press monitor dial to switch between YYYY/MM/DD,
MM/DD/YYYY, or DD/MM/YYYY settings.
Press Back button to return to previous screen.
Press Home button to return to default screen.
OUT4001,0000724 -19-28APR14-1/1
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Attachment
Name Input
The Attachment Name Input menu provides the capability
to personalize front attachment with a specific name.
At Setting Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight
Attachment Name Input. Press monitor dial to display
Attachment Name Input menu. Rotate monitor dial to
highlight desired attachment name. Press monitor dial to
display name change screen. To add specific information
to the attachment name, rotate monitor dial either way to
highlight a character, then press the monitor dial. After
inputting new name, rotate monitor dial to highlight SET
on bottom right corner of monitor. Press monitor dial to
finalize the setting.
NOTE: To delete the last entered character, rotate monitor
dial to highlight BS on bottom left corner of monitor
and then press monitor dial. To delete all entered
characters, rotate monitor dial to highlight ALL
CLEAR and then press monitor dial.
Press Back button to return to previous screen.
Press Home button to return to default screen.
OUT4001,0000726 -19-28APR14-1/1
2-2-16
081214
PN=82
Operation—Monitor Operation
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Auto Shutdown
The Auto Shutdown menu provides the capability to
turn on this feature and set a desired time for machine
shutdown to take place.
At Setting Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight Auto
Shutdown. Press monitor dial to display Auto Shutdown
menu.
Auto Shutdown menu items include:
NOTE: Setting Time minute increment needs to be
set before enabling auto shutdown.
Setting Time
Rotate monitor dial to highlight Setting Time and press
monitor dial. (Backlighting will turn orange.) Rotate
monitor dial to adjust the auto shutdown acting time.
Auto shutdown can be set to activate after 1, 2, 3, 4,
5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 25, or 30 minute increments. Press
monitor dial to store desired time setting.
NOTE: When auto shutdown is ON, the color of the
preceding square is green and A/S will appear on
the default screen. When auto shutdown is OFF,
the color of the preceding square is gray.
NOTE: Thirty seconds before the engine stops, the monitor
will display Engine Shutdown Soon message.
□ ON (Enable)
Press Home button to return to default screen.
Rotate monitor dial to highlight ON (Enable). Press
monitor dial to turn the auto shutdown function ON.
Press monitor dial again to turn the auto shutdown
function OFF.
Press Back button to return to previous screen.
OUT4001,0000727 -19-28APR14-1/1
2-2-17
081214
PN=83
Operation—Monitor Operation
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Auto Exhaust
Filter Cleaning
During exhaust filter auto cleaning, the engine
may run at elevated idle and hot temperatures
for an extended period of time. Exhaust gases
and exhaust filter components may reach
temperatures hot enough to burn people and
ignite or melt common materials.
TX1086450 —UN—06JAN11
CAUTION: Servicing machine during exhaust
filter auto cleaning can result in serious personal
injury. Avoid exposure and skin contact with
hot gases and components.
Exhaust Filter Auto Cleaning Disabled Indicator
TX1086451 —UN—06JAN11
NOTE: Disabling auto exhaust filter cleaning is not
preferred. Whenever possible, auto cleaning should
be enabled to keep soot buildup to a minimum
and to increase overall machine uptime.
If operating in conditions where it may be unsafe for
elevated exhaust temperatures, auto cleaning of the
exhaust filter can be disabled.
The Auto Exhaust Filter Cleaning menu allows the
operator to enable or disable the auto cleaning function
for the exhaust filter.
At Setting Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight Auto
Exhaust Filter Cleaning. Press monitor dial to display
Auto Exhaust Filter Cleaning menu:
NOTE: When auto cleaning is disabled, the color
of the preceding square is green and exhaust
filter auto cleaning disabled indicator (1) will
appear on the default screen.
Exhaust Filter Cleaning Indicator
1— Exhaust Filter Auto
Cleaning Disabled Indicator
2— Exhaust Filter Cleaning
Indicator
indicator will disappear unless exhaust filter auto
cleaning has been disabled by the operator.
When auto cleaning is enabled, the color of
the preceding square is gray and an exhaust
filter cleaning indicator (2) will appear on the
default screen when an auto or parked cleaning
procedure is taking place.
The exhaust filter auto cleaning disabled indicator
will display on the monitor when the key switch is
in ON position. Once the engine is started, the
□ OFF (Disable)
Press monitor dial to turn OFF (disable) auto cleaning.
Press monitor dial again to enable auto cleaning.
Press Back button to return to previous screen.
Press Home button to return to default screen.
OUT4001,0000728 -19-28FEB12-1/1
2-2-18
081214
PN=84
Operation—Monitor Operation
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Sub Meter
Selection
TX1086325A —UN—28DEC10
NOTE: Only one sub meter can be selected at a time.
When one of the selections is ON, the color of
the preceding square is green.
The Sub Meter Selection menu provides the capability
to add a meter on the fuel gauge for fuel consumption
or breaker hours.
At Setting Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight Sub
Meter Selection. Press monitor dial to display Sub Meter
Selection menu.
Fuel Consumption Indicator
Sub Meter Selection menu items include:
Rotate monitor dial to highlight OFF. Press monitor dial
to turn OFF any meters.
□ Fuel Consumption Indicator
Rotate monitor dial to highlight Fuel Consumption
Indicator. Press monitor dial to turn ON the fuel
consumption indicator (1). (Fuel consumption will be
displayed on the fuel gauge on the default screen.)
□ Breaker Hour Meter
Rotate monitor dial to highlight Breaker Hour Meter.
Press monitor dial to turn ON the breaker hour meter
(2). (Breaker hours will be displayed on the fuel gauge
on the default screen.)
Press Back button to return to previous screen.
TX1086326A —UN—28DEC10
□ OFF
Breaker Hour Meter
1— Fuel Consumption Indicator
2— Breaker Hour Meter
Press Home button to return to default screen.
OUT4001,000072A -19-28FEB12-1/1
2-2-19
081214
PN=85
Operation—Monitor Operation
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Rear View
Camera Monitor
CAUTION: The rear view camera image is
designed to supplement other safety practices
and is not intended to be the sole method
of collision avoidance. Always be alert and
aware of the surroundings when operating
this machine to avoid possible injury or
death to operator or others.
TX1086330A —UN—28DEC10
NOTE: When the rear view camera mode is enabled,
the color of the preceding square is green and
rear view image (1) is continuously displayed
on the default screen.
NOTE: For a clear image, clean lens and monitor
before operating the machine. The monitor
and camera lens surface is a resin product.
Lightly wipe the surface with a wet, clean cloth.
Never use an organic solvent.
Rear View Image
The Rear View Camera Monitor menu provides the
capability to turn the camera ON or OFF so the view
behind the machine is shown on the monitor.
TX1086331A —UN—28DEC10
At Setting Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight Rear View
Camera Monitor. Press monitor dial to display Rear View
Camera Monitor menu.
□ ON (Enable)
Press monitor dial to turn ON (enable) the rear view
camera mode on the monitor. Press monitor dial again
to disable rear view camera mode.
Never attempt to change the mounting position of the
rear view camera (2). If rear view camera monitor is not
operating properly, see your authorized dealer.
Press Back button to return to previous screen.
Camera
1— Rear View Image
2— Rear View Camera
Press Home button to return to default screen.
OUT4001,000072B -19-28FEB12-1/1
2-2-20
081214
PN=86
Operation—Monitor Operation
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Display Item
Selection
TX1086332A —UN—28DEC10
NOTE: Only one display item can be selected at a
time. When one of the selections is ON, the color
of the preceding square is green.
The Display Item Selection menu provides the capability
to change what appears on the default screen.
At Setting Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight Display
Item Selection. Press monitor dial to display Display Item
Selection menu.
Manufacturer Logo
Display Item Selection menu items include:
□ Logo
TX1086333A —UN—28DEC10
Rotate monitor dial to highlight Logo. Press monitor dial
to have manufacturer logo (1) appear on default screen.
□ Operational Information
Rotate monitor dial to highlight Operational Information.
Press monitor dial to have operational information (2)
appear on default screen.
□ OFF (Disable)
Rotate monitor dial to highlight OFF (Disable). Press
monitor dial to turn OFF any images.
Press Back button to return to previous screen.
Press Home button to return to default screen.
1— Manufacturer Logo
Operational Information
2— Operational Information
OUT4001,000072F -19-28FEB12-1/1
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Brightness
Adjustment
Rotate monitor dial clockwise for lighter image and
counterclockwise for darker image.
The Brightness Adjustment menu allows operator to
adjust the brightness of the monitor for better viewing.
Press Back button to return to previous screen.
At Setting Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight Brightness
Adjustment. Press monitor dial to display Brightness
Adjustment menu.
Press Home button to return to default screen.
OUT4001,000072C -19-28APR14-1/1
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Language
The Language menu allows operator to change the
language text that appears on the monitor to a specific
preference.
At Setting Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight Language.
Press monitor dial to display Language menu. A list of
different languages appears.
Rotate monitor dial to highlight desired language and
press monitor dial to store setting.
Press Back button to return to previous screen.
Press Home button to return to default screen.
NOTE: Only one language can be selected at a time.
When one of the selections is ON, the color of
the preceding square is green.
OUT4001,000072D -19-28APR14-1/1
2-2-21
081214
PN=87
Operation—Monitor Operation
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Unit Selection
The Unit Selection menu allows operator to change the
unit system that appears on the monitor to either US
or Metric and change temperature display reading on
the monitor between degrees Celcius (°C) or degrees
Farenheit (°F).
At Setting Menu, rotate monitor dial (2) to highlight Unit
Selection. Press monitor dial to display Unit Selection
menu.
Unit Selection menu items include:
•
TX1086278A —UN—27DEC10
• Unit
Rotate monitor dial to highlight Unit and press monitor
dial. Press monitor dial to change setting between US
or Metric.
°C/°F
(Blower Must Be ON)
NOTE: Before changing °C or °F, turn the blower
fan ON by pressing the blower speed switch
(1) on the switch panel.
Rotate monitor dial to highlight °C/°F and press monitor
dial. After displaying Wait message, temperature
reading is changed from previous setting in lower left
corner of the screen on the air conditioner display.
Press monitor dial again to change temperature reading
back to opposite setting.
Switch Panel
1— Blower Speed Switch
2— Monitor Dial
3— Back Button
4— Home Button
Press Home button (4) to return to default screen.
Press Back button (3) to return to previous screen.
OUT4001,000072E -19-28APR14-1/1
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Main Menu
Sequence Change
The Main Menu Sequence Change menu provides
the capability to change the sequence order of some of
the submenus under the Main Menu according to how
frequently they are used.
At Setting Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight Main
Menu Sequence Change. Press monitor dial to display
Main Menu Sequence Change menu.
• Air Conditioner
• Radio
• Work Mode
Rotate monitor dial to highlight the submenu that is
preferred to be shown first. Press monitor dial to change
the submenu sequence.
Press Back button to return to previous screen.
Press Home button to return to default screen.
Main Menu Sequence Change menu items include:
OUT4001,0000730 -19-28APR14-1/1
2-2-22
081214
PN=88
Operation—Monitor Operation
Main Menu—Information Menu
TX1086306A —UN—28DEC10
The Information Menu provides operating hour
information, maintenance items, troubleshooting
(diagnostic trouble codes [DTCs]), engine speed, and
restriction level in the exhaust filter.
The submenus under Main Menu that appear on monitor
include:
NOTE: Alarm List ONLY appears as a submenu
if there is an actual alarm.
• Alarm List
• Air Conditioner
• Radio
• Work Mode
• Setting Menu
• Information Menu
Main Menu Screen
At Main Menu screen (1), rotate monitor dial (2) to
highlight Information Menu. Press monitor dial to display
Information Menu.
Information Menu items include:
TX1086272A —UN—27DEC10
• Operation
• Maintenance
• Troubleshooting
• Monitoring
Press Back button (3) to return to previous screen.
Press Home button (4) to return to default screen.
1— Main Menu Screen
2— Monitor Dial
3— Back Button
4— Home Button
Switch Panel
OUT4001,0000722 -19-28APR14-1/1
2-2-23
081214
PN=89
Operation—Monitor Operation
Main Menu—Information Menu—Operation
• Attachment Operation
The Operation menu provides fuel consumption and
operating hours of the breaker, front attachment, tracks,
and overall machine hours.
At Information Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight
Operation. Press monitor dial to display Operation menu.
NOTE: Total fuel consumption and fuel consumption
rate depend on the operating environment and
the operation method of machine.
•
Operation menu items include:
• Fuel Consumption
•
Rotate monitor dial to highlight Fuel Consumption. Press
monitor dial to display Fuel Consumption information:
- Machine Operation Hours ............... XX h
- Fuel Consumption ............................ XX L
- Average Fuel Consumption Rate....XX.X L/h
Press monitor dial to return to the previous menu. To
reset fuel consumption data, rotate monitor dial to
highlight CLEAR in the bottom right corner of screen
and press monitor dial.
Breaker Operation
Rotate monitor dial to highlight Breaker Operation.
Press monitor dial to display Breaker Operation
information:
- Operating Time ........................XXXXXX.X h
- Machine Operation Hours ............XXXX.X h
- Operation Ratio................................XXX.X %
Press monitor dial to return to the previous menu. To
reset breaker operating data, rotate monitor dial to
highlight CLEAR in the bottom right corner of screen
and press monitor dial.
•
Rotate monitor dial to highlight Attachment Operation.
Press monitor dial to display Attachment Operation
information:
- Operating Time ...........................XXXX.X h
Press monitor dial to return to the previous menu.
To reset attachment operating hours, rotate monitor
dial to highlight CLEAR in the bottom right corner of
screen and press monitor dial.
Travel Operation
Rotate monitor dial to highlight Travel Operation. Press
monitor dial to display Travel Operation information:
- Operating Time ...........................XXXX.X h
Press monitor dial to return to the previous menu. To
reset travel operating hours, rotate monitor dial to
highlight CLEAR in the bottom right corner of screen
and press monitor dial.
Actual Operation
NOTE: The actual operation time includes the
front attachment operation and the travel
operation hours.
Rotate monitor dial to highlight Actual Operation. Press
monitor dial to display Actual Operation information:
- Operating Time ...........................XXXX.X h
Press monitor dial to return to the previous menu. To
reset actual operating hours, rotate monitor dial to
highlight CLEAR in the bottom right corner of screen
and press monitor dial.
Press Back button to return to previous screen.
Press Home button to return to default screen.
OUT4001,0000731 -19-28APR14-1/1
2-2-24
081214
PN=90
Operation—Monitor Operation
Main Menu—Information
Menu—Maintenance
The Maintenance menu provides the capability to notify
the operator when the next maintenance item is due,
shows hours remaining until next maintenance interval,
and allows the interval hours to be reset.
At Information Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight
Maintenance. Press monitor dial to display Maintenance
menu.
Maintenance menu items include:
if any of the maintenance items listed come due for a
change. Press the Home button on switch panel to delete
the notification.
If Maintenance Notice is OFF, no notification is displayed
on the monitor.
To check if a maintenance item is due for a change,
rotate monitor dial through list to reach specific item and
highlight. If a wrench symbol appears next to the item,
service is due. Press monitor dial to display the following
information for each item:
• Previous Maintenance
• Engine Oil
• Engine Oil Filter
• Hydraulic Oil
• Pilot Hydraulic Oil Filter
• Hydraulic Oil Full-Flow Filter
• Pump Transmission Oil
• Travel Reduction Gear Oil
• Swing Reduction Gear Oil
• Swing Bearing Grease
• Air Cleaner Element
• Fuel Filter
• Air Conditioner Filter
• Exhaust Filter
• User Setting 1
• User Setting 2
• Maintenance Notice...........ON or OFF
(date is displayed).............X.X h
• Remains...........................XXX.X h
• Maintenance Interval......XXX.X h
Press monitor dial to return to previous menu with no
changes.
To reset remaining time data, rotate monitor dial to
highlight RESET at the bottom center of monitor and
press monitor dial. The value of remaining hours is reset
to that of change interval. The previous maintenance date
and hours are updated with current date and time.
Rotate monitor dial to highlight Maintenance Notice.
Press monitor dial to turn Maintenance Notice ON. Press
monitor dial again to turn Maintenance Notice OFF.
If Maintenance Notice is ON, a message is displayed on
the monitor for 10 seconds (when the key switch is ON)
To change the maintenance interval, rotate monitor
dial to highlight the wrench with the clock next to it at the
bottom right corner of monitor and press monitor dial.
(Backlighting will turn orange for Maintenance Interval.)
Rotate monitor dial to adjust the time for scheduled hour
maintenance. Press monitor dial to store the change.
Press Back button to return to previous screen.
Press Home button to return to default screen.
DB84312,000002E -19-28APR14-1/1
Main Menu—Information
Menu—Troubleshooting
• Monitor (00)
• Information (00)
The Troubleshooting menu provides access to view any
diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) generated by a controller.
The amount of currently generated DTCs are displayed at
the right side of each item in parenthesis. Rotate monitor
dial to highlight an item displaying DTCs. Press monitor
dial to display the actual DTC numbers. Up to 20 DTCs
can be displayed.
At Information Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight
Troubleshooting. Press monitor dial to begin
Troubleshooting data. After displaying Wait message, the
screen displays controller troubleshooting menu:
Press Back button to return to previous screen.
Press Home button to return to default screen.
• Engine (00)
• Main (00)
OUT4001,0000733 -19-28APR14-1/1
2-2-25
081214
PN=91
Operation—Monitor Operation
Main Menu—Information Menu—Monitoring
The Monitoring menu provides access to view engine
speed and restriction level in the exhaust filter.
At Information Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight
Monitoring. Press monitor dial to display Monitoring menu:
• Actual Engine Speed...........XXXX min-¹
• Exhaust Filter Restriction Level....(displays a bar
graph)
There are five segments to the bar graph to indicate the
restriction status of the exhaust filter.
- If any of the first three segments of the bar graph
display a block, auto cleaning needs to be enabled.
- If the fourth or fifth segment also displays a block, a
parked cleaning needs to be initiated by the operator.
An exhaust filter alarm indicator will also appear on
the monitor.
Press Back button to return to previous screen.
Press Home button to return to default screen.
OUT4001,0000734 -19-28APR14-1/1
2-2-26
081214
PN=92
Operation—Operating the Machine
Before Starting Work
T133556 —UN—24AUG00
Review the operating precautions. See
Safety-Operating Precautions. (Section 1-3.)
Use seat belt when operating machine. Remember to
fasten seat belt even during brief periods of use.
Reading Operator's Manual
TX03679,0001780 -19-21AUG12-1/1
Operator's Daily Machine Check Before
Starting
Safety and Protective Devices Checks
Walk around machine to clear all persons from machine
area before starting machine.
Clear all steps and walking surfaces.
Check condition of guards, shields, and covers.
Overall Machine Checks
Check for worn or frayed electrical wires and loose or
corroded connections.
Inspect machine for bent, broken, or loose parts.
Check for loose or missing hardware.
1
Check for oil leaks, missing or loose hose clamps, kinked
hoses, and lines or hoses that rub against each other or
other parts.
4— Check Engine Oil Level
5— Check/Clean Radiator and
Oil Cooler Outer Fins
TX1000291 —UN—15NOV05
1— Check Pedal and Lever
Movement/Clean Out Cab
Debris
2— Check Hydraulic Oil Level
3— Check Surge Tank Level
2
5
3
4
Inspect Machine Daily
DB84312,00000C4 -19-22FEB12-1/1
2-3-1
081214
PN=93
Operation—Operating the Machine
Engine Break-In Period
IMPORTANT: To avoid engine damage it is critical
to observe the engine break-in period. Extra
care during the first 500 hours of operation
will result in more satisfactory long-term
engine performance and life. DO NOT exceed
500 hours of operation with John Deere
Break-In Plus™ engine oil.
This machine is factory filled with John Deere Break-In
Plus engine oil.
1. Operate the machine at heavy or normal loads with
minimal idling during the break-in period. During the
first 20 hours, avoid prolonged periods of engine idling
or sustained maximum load operation. If engine will
idle longer than 5 minutes, stop engine.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT add make-up oil until the oil
level is BELOW the ADD mark on the dipstick.
John Deere Break-In Plus oil should be used
to make up any oil consumed during the
break-in period. See John Deere Break-In
Plus Engine Oil. (Section 3-1.)
If John Deere Break-In Plus Engine Oil is
not available, use a 10W-30 diesel engine
oil meeting one of the following during the
initial 250 hours of operation:
• API Service Category CJ-4
• ACEA Oil Sequence E9
• ACEA Oil Sequence E6
2. Check engine oil level more frequently during the
engine break-in period.
3. Change oil and oil filter after first 500 hours of operation
(maximum). Fill crankcase with the normal seasonal
viscosity grade oil. See Diesel Engine Oil—Interim
Tier 4 and Stage III B Engines. (Section 3-1.)
4. Watch coolant temperature gauge closely. If coolant
temperature rises above specified limits on the gauge,
reduce load on engine. Unless temperature drops
quickly, stop the engine and determine the cause
before resuming operation. See Troubleshooting.
(Section 4-3.)
5. Watch oil pressure gauge for pressure within
specification.
6. Check belt for proper alignment and seating in pulley
grooves.
Break-In Plus is a trademark of Deere & Company
OUT4001,00005FE -19-10DEC10-1/1
2-3-2
081214
PN=94
Operation—Operating the Machine
Starting Engine
TX1086287A —UN—28DEC10
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to engine.
Temperatures below -20°C (-4°F) require an
additional warmup period. See Cold Weather
Warmup in this section.
Before Starting the Engine
Turn key switch to ON position. The system starting
screen (1) displays for about 2 seconds and then the
default screen (2) is displayed.
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to engine.
Wait until engine preheat indicator (4) is no
longer illuminated before starting the engine.
System Starting Screen
Starting the Engine
TX1090660 —UN—11APR11
1. Move pilot shutoff lever to the locked (UP) position to
start machine.
2. Move engine speed dial (3) to slow idle position.
3. Sound horn to alert persons nearby.
IMPORTANT: Prevent starter damage. Never operate
starter for more than 10 seconds at a time.
If engine does not start, return key switch
to OFF. Wait for more than 30 seconds, then
try again. After a false start, DO NOT turn
key switch until engine stops.
Default Screen
TX1086455A —UN—04JAN11
4. Turn key switch to START. Release the key switch
immediately after the engine has started. Switch will
return to ON position.
After Starting Check
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to engine.
If alarm indicators remain illuminated after
starting engine, IMMEDIATELY STOP THE
ENGINE. Find and correct the problem. See
Main Menu—Alarm List. (Section 2-2.)
After the engine is started, check that no alarm indicators
are shown on display.
Engine Speed Dial
1— System Starting Screen
2— Default Screen
Warming The Engine
3— Engine Speed Dial
4— Engine Preheat Indicator
1. Run engine at 1/3 speed for 30 seconds. Do not run
engine at fast or slow idle. Do not accelerate rapidly
during warmup.
2. Operate machine at less-than-normal loads and
speeds until engine is at normal operating temperature.
OUT4001,000084C -19-19MAR12-1/1
2-3-3
081214
PN=95
Operation—Operating the Machine
Cold Weather Start Aid
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to engine.
Temperatures below -20°C (-4°F) require an
additional warmup period. See Cold Weather
Warmup in this section.
CAUTION: Ether is highly flammable. Do
not use ether when starting an engine
equipped with glow plugs.
This machine is equipped with glow plugs. Glow plugs
are automatically controlled by the engine controller when
the key is turned ON. Do not start engine until the engine
preheat indicator disappears on the monitor.
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to the
engine. The diesel fired coolant heater is
required for temperatures -20°C (-4°F) and
below. See your authorized dealer.
ER79617,0000DC8 -19-28JAN11-1/1
2-3-4
081214
PN=96
Operation—Operating the Machine
Cold Weather Warmup
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from
unexpected machine movement. If hydraulic oil
is cold, hydraulic functions move slowly. DO NOT
attempt normal machine operation until hydraulic
functions move at close-to-normal cycle times.
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to the
engine. The diesel fired coolant heater is
required for temperatures -20°C (-4°F) and
below. See your authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to engine.
Temperatures below -20°C (-4°F) require a
diesel fired coolant heater warmup period. At
-20°C (-4°F) the engine requires 1 hour warmup
period. Temperatures below -20°C (-4°F) require
additional warmup period. See table below.
Diesel Fired Coolant Heater Warmup Period
Temperature
Required Warmup Period Before
Operation
-20°C (-4°F)
1 Hour
-21°C (-5°F)
1 Hour
-22°C (-7°F)
2 Hours
-23°C (-9°F)
2 Hours
-24°C (-11°F)
2 Hours
-25°C (-13°F)
2 Hours
-26°C (-14°F)
2 Hours
-27°C (-16°F)
2 Hours
-28°C (-18°F)
2 Hours
-29°C (-20°F)
3 Hours
-30°C (-22°F)
4 Hours
-31°C (-23°F)
5 Hours
-32°C (-25°F)
6 Hours
-33°C (-27°F)
7 Hours
-34°C (-29°F)
8 Hours
-35°C (-31°F)
9 Hours
-36°C (-32°F)
10 Hours
-37°C (-34°F)
11 Hours
-38°C (-36°F)
12 Hours
-39°C (-38°F)
13 Hours
-40°C (-40°F)
14 Hours
seconds. Engine will maintain 1200 rpm until hydraulic
temperature reaches 2°C (35.6°F) or 15 minutes,
whichever comes first.
2. Run engine at 1/2 speed for 5 minutes. Do not run
at fast or slow idle.
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from
unexpected machine movement. Clear the area of
all persons before running your machine through
the warmup procedure. If machine is inside a
building, warm the travel circuit first and move
the machine to a clear area outside. Cold oil will
cause machine functions to respond slowly.
3. Actuate travel and swing functions slowly, initially
moving only short distances.
4. Operate boom, arm, and bucket functions by moving
cylinders a short distance each direction for the first
time.
5. Continue cycling cylinders by increasing the travel
each cycle, until full stroke is obtained.
6. Swing upperstructure so boom is perpendicular to
tracks.
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from machine
sliding backwards. Keep angle between
boom and arm 90—110°.
7. Keeping the angle between boom and arm 90—110°,
fully actuate bucket close function (cylinder extend)
and lower bucket to raise track off ground.
IMPORTANT: Holding function actuated for more
than 10 seconds can cause damage from
hot spots in the control valve.
8. While rotating raised track in forward direction, actuate
bucket curl function (cylinder extend) for 10 seconds
and release for 5 seconds for a period of 2-1/2 minutes.
9. Repeat procedure with track rotating in reverse
direction.
10. Lower machine to ground.
In extremely cold conditions, an extended warmup period
will be necessary.
Avoid sudden operation of all functions until the engine
and hydraulic oil are thoroughly warm.
1. If temperature is below 0°C (32°F), engine will
start at 800 rpm and ramp to 1200 rpm after 30
11. Repeat steps 6—10 on opposite track.
12. Operate all hydraulic functions to distribute warm oil
in all cylinders, motors, and lines.
13. If hydraulic functions still move slowly, repeat steps
7 and 8.
ER79617,0000DC6 -19-09JAN12-1/1
2-3-5
081214
PN=97
Operation—Operating the Machine
Travel Pedals and Levers
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from
unexpected machine movement. Keep
bystanders clear of machine when traveling.
Keep bystanders clear of machine when traveling.
The instructions below apply when the travel motors (4)
are to the rear of the machine. If the travel motors are to
the front of the machine, the machine moves OPPOSITE
to the direction described.
T137492 —UN—25JAN01
FORWARD TRAVEL (1): Push down on front of both
pedals or push both levers forward.
REVERSE TRAVEL (2): Push down on rear of both
pedals or pull both levers rearward.
NEUTRAL POSITION (3): Travel brakes will automatically
stop and hold the machine.
RIGHT TURN: Push down on front of left pedal or push
left lever forward.
LEFT TURN: Push down on front of right pedal or push
right lever forward.
SHORT TURN (COUNTER-ROTATE): Push down the
front of one pedal and the rear of the other or push one
lever forward and pull the other rearward.
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from machine
tipping. Operate control pedals or levers slowly
when traveling down a slope.
Travel Pedals and Levers
1— Forward Travel
2— Reverse Travel
3— Neutral Position
4— Travel Motor (2 used)
COLD WEATHER OPERATION: Travel pedal and lever
dampers are provided for smooth control. In extremely
cold weather, pedal or lever effort will increase. Operate
pedals or levers several times with pilot shutoff lever in the
locked (UP) position.
TRAVELING DOWN A SLOPE: Operate control pedals or
levers slowly when traveling down a slope.
ER79617,0000E31 -19-21AUG12-1/1
2-3-6
081214
PN=98
Operation—Operating the Machine
Exhaust Filter
Auto Cleaning
The exhaust filter is a critical component in the engine's
emissions control system, which is required to meet
governmental emissions regulations. The exhaust filter
captures soot and ash to prevent its release into the
atmosphere. The soot and ash must be eliminated from
the exhaust filter to keep it functioning properly. The
process of eliminating collected soot is called exhaust
filter cleaning. There are three types of exhaust filter
cleaning available to the operator:
CAUTION: Servicing machine during exhaust
filter auto cleaning can result in serious personal
injury. Avoid exposure and skin contact with
hot gases and components.
During exhaust filter auto cleaning, the engine
may run at elevated idle and hot temperatures
for an extended period of time. Exhaust gases
and exhaust filter components may reach
temperatures hot enough to burn people and
ignite or melt common materials.
• NATURAL/PASSIVE
• AUTO
• PARKED
There are five soot levels to describe the amount of
restriction in the exhaust filter. These levels determine the
type of cleaning that is required:
• LOW
• MODERATE
• HIGH
• VERY HIGH
• SERVICE
With auto cleaning enabled, exhaust filter cleaning is
automatically performed as needed, with no interaction
from the operator. An exhaust filter cleaning indicator
will illuminate on the default screen of the monitor when
the system is actively performing an exhaust filter auto
cleaning. Machine can be operated as normal. When the
exhaust filter auto cleaning process has completed its
cycle, the cleaning indicator will automatically turn off.
NOTE: Disabling exhaust filter auto cleaning is not
preferred. Whenever possible, auto cleaning should
be enabled to keep soot buildup to a minimum
and to increase overall machine uptime.
To observe the current restriction status of the exhaust
filter, an exhaust filter restriction level bar graph is
located in the Information Menu for viewing at any time.
For more information, see Main Menu—Information
Menu—Monitoring. (Section 2-2.)
Auto cleaning is able to activate (if not disabled by the
operator) when the exhaust filter restriction is anywhere
between LOW and HIGH soot levels. Auto cleaning is no
longer available if exhaust filter restriction reaches VERY
HIGH or SERVICE soot levels.
Parked cleaning can only be initiated when the exhaust
filter restriction reaches HIGH or VERY HIGH soot levels.
If exhaust filter restriction reaches SERVICE soot level,
contact your authorized dealer.
In addition to the cleaning procedures, the exhaust filter
also requires maintenance at every 5000 hours to remove
accumulated ash, which is a noncombustible result of
additives used in crankcase lubrication oils and the fuel.
Ash removal CANNOT be performed by the operator.
For more information on exhaust filter ash removal, see
Service Exhaust Filter. (Section 3-3.)
NOTE: Unnecessary idling can cause exhaust filter
soot to accumulate more quickly. For the best
possible exhaust filter operation which requires
the least amount of operator interaction, idling
should be kept to a minimum.
If operating in conditions where it may be unsafe for
elevated exhaust temperatures, auto cleaning can be
disabled through the monitor. For more information, see
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Auto Exhaust Filter Cleaning.
(Section 2-2.) If auto cleaning is disabled by the operator,
an exhaust filter auto cleaning disabled indicator will
appear on the default screen of the monitor and remains
on until auto cleaning is enabled again. If filter restriction
reaches the HIGH soot level with auto cleaning disabled,
an exhaust filter alarm indicator will appear on the default
screen of the monitor to alert the operator to enable auto
cleaning or to initiate a parked cleaning. Operator can
check the restriction level bar graph in the monitor at any
time. See Main Menu—Information Menu—Monitoring.
(Section 2-2.)
Parked Cleaning
CAUTION: Servicing machine during exhaust
filter parked cleaning can result in serious
personal injury. Avoid exposure and skin contact
with hot gases and components.
During exhaust filter parked cleaning, the engine
may run at elevated idle and hot temperatures
for an extended period of time. Exhaust gases
and exhaust filter components may reach
temperatures hot enough to burn people and
ignite or melt common materials.
Natural/Passive Cleaning
During normal machine operation, the exhaust heat will
naturally clean the soot build up in the exhaust filter.
Avoid death or serious injury from machine
movement. Do not leave running machine
unattended during exhaust filter cleaning.
Continued on next page
2-3-7
DB84312,000002F -19-23AUG12-1/2
081214
PN=99
Operation—Operating the Machine
screen appears on monitor. Progress status is displayed
by a bar graph. The cleaning process will continue until
one of the following conditions exist:
IMPORTANT: Avoid machine damage. Always
park machine in a safe location and check
for adequate fuel level before beginning
exhaust filter parked cleaning.
Parked cleaning is a process that allows the system to
clean the exhaust filter. It is most commonly initiated
after extended operation with exhaust filter auto cleaning
disabled or frequent engine shutdowns have occurred
while the auto cleaning process was active. (For more
detailed information, see Exhaust Filter Parked Cleaning
in this section.)
During the cleaning process, the engine speed will be
controlled automatically and the machine must remain
parked to complete the procedure. Complete cleaning
time takes less than 45 minutes, but will vary on several
criteria including fuel type, oil type, duty cycle, ambient
temperature, and the number of previously aborted
exhaust filter cleaning requests.
Parked cleaning can only be initiated if the filter restriction
is at HIGH or VERY HIGH soot levels. It is prompted by
an exhaust filter alarm indicator appearing on the monitor.
If exhaust filter alarm indicator is illuminated and yellow,
filter restriction is at a HIGH soot level and auto cleaning
needs to be enabled or a parked cleaning should be done
soon. If exhaust filter alarm indicator is blinking and yellow
along with the warning alarm indicator, filter restriction is
at a VERY HIGH soot level and a parked cleaning should
be done immediately.
Machine needs to be in a predetermined safe state. This
safe state includes three conditions:
• machine is parked in a safe place with the front
attachment lowered to the ground
• pilot shutoff lever is in locked (UP) position
• engine speed dial is set to slow idle
Once the exhaust filter parked cleaning switch is pressed
and held for 3 seconds, a parked cleaning progress
• there is no soot restriction in the exhaust filter
• 45 minutes has elapsed causing a timeout
• operator cancels the parked cleaning procedure by
•
•
•
lowering the pilot shutoff lever or increasing engine
speed
parked cleaning is aborted due to a system malfunction
engine runs out of fuel
engine is shut off by operator (not recommended)
IMPORTANT: Avoid engine damage. If machine will
NOT be returning to operation immediately after a
parked cleaning procedure, allow the engine and
exhaust filter time to return to normal operating
temperatures BEFORE stopping engine.
The exhaust filter cleaning indicator will be illuminated
on the monitor during the parked cleaning. When parked
cleaning procedure is complete, engine will automatically
return to slow idle and exhaust filter cleaning indicator will
turn off. Machine is ready to return to operation.
Avoid disabling the auto cleaning process unless
absolutely necessary. Repeated disabling of the auto
cleaning process or ignoring prompts to perform a parked
cleaning procedure, will cause engine power limitations
and can eventually lead to dealer required service
cleaning.
Ash Removal
The exhaust filter cleaning procedures listed previously,
clean the soot from the machine's exhaust filter. The
exhaust filter also traps ash deposits over time which
are not removed during an exhaust filter cleaning. When
the exhaust filter has run several thousand hours, these
ash deposits can restrict engine performance and must
be removed. For more information on ash removal, see
Service Exhaust Filter. (Section 3-3.)
DB84312,000002F -19-23AUG12-2/2
2-3-8
081214
PN=100
Operation—Operating the Machine
Exhaust Filter Parked Cleaning
TX1086513 —UN—06JAN11
CAUTION: Servicing machine during exhaust
filter parked cleaning can result in serious
personal injury. Avoid exposure and skin contact
with hot gases and components.
During exhaust filter parked cleaning, the engine
may run at elevated idle and hot temperatures
for an extended period of time. Exhaust gases
and exhaust filter components may reach
temperatures hot enough to burn people and
ignite or melt common materials.
Parked Cleaning Start Screen
Avoid death or serious injury from machine
movement. Do not leave running machine
unattended during exhaust filter cleaning.
TX1086512A —UN—04JAN11
IMPORTANT: Avoid machine damage. Always
park machine in a safe location and check
for adequate fuel level before beginning
exhaust filter parked cleaning.
The exhaust filter parked cleaning process allows the
system to clean the exhaust filter when the filter restriction
is at HIGH or VERY HIGH soot levels. It is most commonly
initiated after extended operation with exhaust filter auto
cleaning disabled or frequent engine shutdowns have
occurred while the auto cleaning process was active.
Operator can check the restriction level bar graph in
the monitor at any time. See Main Menu—Information
Menu—Monitoring. (Section 2-2.)
Exhaust Filter Parked Cleaning Switch
TX1086514 —UN—06JAN11
Before starting the parked cleaning process, the machine
needs to be in a predetermined safe state. This safe state
includes three conditions:
• machine is parked in a safe place with the front
attachment lowered to the ground
• pilot shutoff lever is in locked (UP) position
• engine speed dial is set to slow idle
An exhaust filter alarm indicator (1) on the monitor will
inform the operator when a parked cleaning needs to take
place.
• If the alarm indicator is illuminated yellow, exhaust filter
•
restriction is at HIGH soot level and an exhaust filter
parked cleaning should be done soon.
If the alarm indicator is illuminated yellow and blinking,
exhaust filter restriction is at VERY HIGH soot level
and an exhaust filter parked cleaning should be done
immediately. Warning alarm indicator will also be
illuminated.
Parked Cleaning Progress Screen
1— Exhaust Filter Alarm
Indicator
2— Parked Cleaning Start
Screen
3— Exhaust Filter Parked
Cleaning Switch
4— Exhaust Filter Cleaning
Indicator
5— Parked Cleaning Progress
Screen
6— Bar Graph
held, a parked cleaning start screen (2) appears
on the monitor. Move the pilot shutoff lever to
locked (UP) position and set engine speed dial
to slow idle. Press and hold the parked cleaning
switch again for 3 seconds to begin the exhaust
filter parked cleaning process.
Before starting the parked cleaning process, make sure
the machine is in a safe state as listed previously. Once
these conditions are met, press and hold the exhaust
filter parked cleaning switch (3) on the right console for 3
seconds.
NOTE: If the safe state conditions are NOT met and the
exhaust filter parked cleaning switch is pressed and
Exhaust filter cleaning indicator (4) will illuminate on
the monitor and a parked cleaning progress screen (5)
appears. Progress status is displayed on the bar graph (6).
Continued on next page
2-3-9
DB84312,0000030 -19-09JAN12-1/2
081214
PN=101
Operation—Operating the Machine
During the cleaning process, the engine speed will be
controlled automatically and the machine must remain
parked to complete the procedure. Complete cleaning
time takes less than 45 minutes, but will vary on several
criteria including fuel type, oil type, duty cycle, ambient
temperature, and the number of previously aborted
exhaust filter cleaning requests. Exhaust combustion may
temporarily emit white smoke during the cleaning process.
the parked cleaning process must be started over. For
a system fault, see your authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT: Avoid engine damage. If machine will
NOT be returning to operation immediately after a
parked cleaning procedure, allow the engine and
exhaust filter time to return to normal operating
temperatures BEFORE stopping engine.
NOTE: If machine needs to be operated during the
parked cleaning procedure, press the exhaust
filter parked cleaning switch again. The process
will be cancelled and a message will be displayed
on the monitor informing the operator. Machine
operation can resume, but a parked cleaning must
be performed as soon as possible.
The cleaning process will continue until one of the
following conditions exist:
• 45 minutes has elapsed causing a timeout
• pilot shutoff lever is moved
• engine speed dial is moved
• parked cleaning is aborted due to a system fault
• engine runs out of fuel
• engine is shut off by operator (not recommended)
If any of these conditions happen during the parked
cleaning process, the process will be cancelled and a
message will be displayed on the monitor informing the
operator. The condition will need to be amended and
When there is no soot restriction in the exhaust filter,
the parked cleaning procedure is complete. Engine
will automatically return to slow idle and exhaust filter
cleaning indicator will turn off. A message will appear on
the monitor stating Exhaust Filter Cleaning Complete and
the machine is ready to return to operation.
DB84312,0000030 -19-09JAN12-2/2
Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) Software
Delivery Process
For more information about Service ADVISOR Remote,
consult your local John Deere dealer.
Theory of Operation
Vehicle Reprogramming
Service ADVISOR™ is a diagnostic tool used by John
Deere dealers to perform diagnostics as well as updates
to machine settings and software. Dealers can access
diagnostic trouble codes and diagnostic addresses,
create readings and recordings, and program controllers.
This technology consists of both software and hardware.
Technicians attend a minimum of 8 hours of training to
become certified in utilizing this tool.
NOTE: Factory setting is set to always accept
software downloads.
Service ADVISOR Remote (SAR) is a function of Service
ADVISOR. It allows the dealer technician to connect to
a SAR-enabled machine via the JDLink™ network to
remotely access diagnostic trouble code information and
record diagnostic data, as well as program controllers.
Similar to software (payload) updates in the computer
industry, SAR enables John Deere to remotely deliver
updated software via the JDLink hardware on board.
Remote programming gives John Deere the ability to
update software to enhance the performance of the
machine. This capability can be used to reprogram most
machine controllers. The user actively participates with
the dealer in this process by installing the software update.
Normal machine operation can continue during
the software download process.
Customer will be notified by John Deere or a John Deere
dealer of pending software updates with appropriate
installation instructions via letter or phone.
Customer can determine the appropriate time and place
to install the new software on the machine. For more
information, see Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR)
Operation in this section.
Once the customer initiates installation of the software,
SAR will start and manage the installation of the new
payload to the appropriate machine controllers.
NOTE: Software download speed capability depends
on JDLink cellular coverage.
NOTE: Some vehicle controllers may not be compatible
for SAR reprogramming.
Service ADVISOR is a trademark of Deere & Company
JDLink is a trademark of Deere & Company
OUT4001,000075A -19-26JAN11-1/1
2-3-10
081214
PN=102
Operation—Operating the Machine
Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) Operation
NOTE: The programming alarm indicator is used for
different purposes, but the color of the alarm
indicator changes for each purpose.
TX1086797A —UN—21JAN11
The flex power controller (FPC) will interface with
JDLink™ and the monitor to communicate the availability
of software updates and programming progress. The
Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) switch (1) is wired
directly to the FPC and allows the operator to accept
or decline available updates. Alarm indicators on the
display are controlled through diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) originating from the FPC. The FPC will create the
DTCs under certain conditions, which will then prompt
the monitor to display operator instructions. It will be
necessary to interact with your John Deere dealer or
technician for needed information.
Service ADVISOR™ Remote Switch
TX1087187 —UN—21JAN11
When a software update is available to install, a yellow
programming alarm will appear on the monitor, along with
a message stating:
Programming Alarm
SOFTWARE UPDATE READY
1— Service ADVISOR™
Remote (SAR) Switch
2— DECLINE Software Updates
NOTE: Alarm List ONLY appears as a submenu if
there is an actual alarm.
The Alarm List submenu under the Main Menu will give
instructions to guide the operator through the process.
For viewing alarm instructions, see Main Menu—Alarm
List. (Section 2-2.)
3— ACCEPT Software Updates
If operator chooses to install the new update, the
programming alarm will remain on the monitor, but the
color will change to red and the message will state:
Park machine and stop engine. Installation of the software
can only process if the engine is not running and pilot
shutoff lever is in locked (UP) position.
PROGRAMMING IN PROCESS
NOTE: Before installing software, make sure the
SOFTWARE TERMS AND CONDITIONS have
been read. (Find SOFTWARE TERMS AND
CONDITIONS at the beginning of this manual.)
DO NOT turn OFF machine power until the programming
is complete.
Green LED on SAR switch will blink while programming
is taking place.
Once programming is completed, programming alarm will
turn green and the message will state:
LEDs on the SAR switch will illuminate when this alarm
appears. The left LED will be red and the right LED will
be green.
PROGRAMMING COMPLETED
Press and hold the right side of SAR switch (green LED)
for 3 seconds to begin programming installation. Press left
side of SAR switch (red LED) to cancel software update
and wait until the next power cycle.
Cycle machine power to complete the installation process.
JDLink is a trademark of Deere & Company
Service ADVISOR is a trademark of Deere & Company
Continued on next page
2-3-11
OUT4001,0000778 -19-28JAN11-1/3
081214
PN=103
Operation—Operating the Machine
If a problem occurs during the programming process, a
red program failure alarm will appear on the monitor along
with a red warning alarm. The message on the monitor
will state:
TX1087189 —UN—21JAN11
TX1086352 —UN—06JAN11
PROGRAM FAILURE
Program Failure Alarm
If these alarms appear, contact your authorized dealer
for solutions.
Warning Alarm
OUT4001,0000778 -19-28JAN11-2/3
If conditions exist that will not allow the transfer of new
software to happen, a red unable to program alarm
appears on the monitor along with a yellow warning alarm.
The message on the monitor will state:
TX1087190 —UN—21JAN11
TX1086352 —UN—06JAN11
UNABLE TO REPROGRAM DEVICE
Unable to Program Alarm
Make sure the engine is stopped and pilot shutoff lever
is in locked (UP) position. Press and hold the right side
of SAR switch (green LED) again for 3 seconds to retry
programming or contact your authorized John Deere
dealer.
Warning Alarm
OUT4001,0000778 -19-28JAN11-3/3
2-3-12
081214
PN=104
Operation—Operating the Machine
TX1017662A —UN—17JAN07
TX1017664A —UN—17JAN07
Locking the Hydraulic Coupler to the Attachment—If Equipped
Front Hook on Hydraulic Coupler
Hydraulic Coupler Pin
TX1017663A —UN—17JAN07
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury or death from
unexpected hydraulic coupler movement. Make
sure hydraulic coupler is attached correctly
to attachment. The supplemental lock can be
engaged with the attachment in an incorrect
lock position. A visual check is required each
time the lock operation is performed.
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury. Prevent
injury from hydraulic coupler movement. Keep
bystanders clear of machine.
Bucket Rotated to Full-Curl Position
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible hydraulic coupler
damage from incorrect installation. Attaching
the bucket in a reverse orientation on the
hydraulic coupler is not recommended.
When installed in the reverse orientation,
the bucket or the lift hook interferes with
the arm of the excavator when the bucket is
in full-curl position by extending the bucket
cylinder. This is an inherent part of the
design of the original equipment.
TX1090672A —UN—11APR11
Since the hydraulic coupler interacts with
the arm at full-curl position to unlock the
supplemental lock, the hydraulic coupler will
NOT operate properly when the bucket is
attached in reverse orientation.
NOTE: The safety buzzer located on the hydraulic coupler
control box (3) will sound to alert personnel the
lock/unlock function has been activated.
1. Engage front hook (1) on pin (2). Switch on control
box should be in UNLOCK position.
Hydraulic Coupler Control Box
NOTE: The hydraulic coupler must be held over relief in
order to lock/unlock the hydraulic coupler cylinder.
1— Front Hook
2— Pin
2. Rotate to full-curl position. Press switch to LOCK
position. Hold in full-curl position for 5 seconds.
3— Hydraulic Coupler Control
Box
verify lock plate is behind attachment pin. Switch on
the control box should be in the LOCK position.
3. Slowly uncurl hydraulic coupler. Visually verify
supplemental lock contacts locking plate. Visually
Continued on next page
2-3-13
OUT4001,0000866 -19-23AUG12-1/2
081214
PN=105
Operation—Operating the Machine
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to the
hydraulic coupler. Do not operate attachment
when the supplemental lock is used as the
primary locking device. Doing so could result
in hydraulic coupler malfunction.
4. Continue to slowly uncurl hydraulic coupler. Verify
attachment is properly locked. Switch on the control
box should be in LOCK position.
OUT4001,0000866 -19-23AUG12-2/2
2-3-14
081214
PN=106
Operation—Operating the Machine
TX1017662A —UN—17JAN07
TX1017663A —UN—17JAN07
Unlocking the Hydraulic Coupler From the Attachment—If Equipped
Bucket Rotated to Full-Curl Position
Hydraulic Coupler Pin
TX1017664A —UN—17JAN07
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury or death from
unexpected hydraulic coupler movement. Make
sure hydraulic coupler is attached correctly
to attachment. The supplemental lock can be
engaged with the attachment in an incorrect
lock position. A visual check is required each
time the lock operation is performed.
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury. Prevent
injury from hydraulic coupler movement. Keep
bystanders clear of machine.
Front Hook on Hydraulic Coupler
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible hydraulic coupler
damage from incorrect installation. Attaching
the bucket in a reverse orientation on the
hydraulic coupler is not recommended.
When installed in the reverse orientation,
the bucket or the lift hook interferes with
the arm of the excavator when the bucket is
in full-curl position by extending the bucket
cylinder. This is an inherent part of the
design of the original equipment.
TX1090672A —UN—11APR11
Since the hydraulic coupler interacts with
the arm at full-curl position to unlock the
supplemental lock, the hydraulic coupler will
NOT operate properly when the bucket is
attached in reverse orientation.
1. Keep attachment close to ground. Switch should be in
LOCK position.
NOTE: The hydraulic coupler must be held over relief in
order to unlock the hydraulic coupler cylinder.
2. Rotate hydraulic coupler to full-curl position to release
supplemental lock. Switch should be in LOCK position.
NOTE: The safety buzzer located on the hydraulic coupler
control box (3) will sound to alert personnel the
lock/unlock function has been activated.
Hydraulic Coupler Control Box
1— Front Hook
2— Pin
3— Hydraulic Coupler Control
Box
3. Press switch to UNLOCK position. Hold in full-curl
position for 5 seconds.
Continued on next page
2-3-15
OUT4001,0000867 -19-19MAR12-1/2
081214
PN=107
Operation—Operating the Machine
4. Slowly uncurl hydraulic coupler. Front hook (1) will
release from pin (2). Switch should be in UNLOCK
position.
OUT4001,0000867 -19-19MAR12-2/2
Control Lever Pattern Operation
T137500 —UN—25JAN01
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury from unexpected
machine movement. Never place any part of
body beyond window frame to avoid serious
crushing injury from boom. Boom could lower
if the control lever is accidentally bumped
or otherwise engaged. Immediately replace
a missing or broken window.
Prevent injury from unexpected control lever
function. Be aware of the control lever pattern
used on the machine before operating.
Excavator Control Lever Pattern
The machine comes equipped from the factory with the
excavator control lever pattern. A label, with both the
excavator and backhoe control lever patterns, is installed
on the right cab window.
T137498 —UN—25JAN01
Check the patterns on the label, and then carefully operate
the control levers to verify the pattern on machine.
To change the pattern from excavator to backhoe, see
Control Lever Pattern Conversion in this section.
NOTE: A control pattern selector is an available field kit,
that when installed, allows operator to change the
control lever pattern using a mechanical valve.
Backhoe Control Lever Pattern
Control levers return to neutral when released. Functions
will stop and remain positioned. The parking brake for
swing and travel will engage.
5— Boom Down
6— Boom Up
7— Bucket Curl
8— Bucket Dump
T137499 —UN—25JAN01
1— Arm Out
2— Arm In
3— Swing Left
4— Swing Right
Boom, Arm, Bucket Movement
OUT4001,0000868 -19-24AUG12-1/1
2-3-16
081214
PN=108
Operation—Operating the Machine
Mechanical Control Lever Pattern
Selector—If Equipped
The machine pilot control levers can be changed from the
standard EXCAVATOR control pattern (1) to a BACKHOE
control pattern (2). To change control pattern:
1. Park machine on a level surface.
2. Run engine at slow idle speed without load for 3
minutes.
3. Place pilot shutoff lever in the locked (UP) position.
TX1102031A —UN—29NOV11
4. Turn key switch to OFF position to stop engine.
Remove key from switch.
5. Open the left service door to access the mechanical
control lever pattern selector.
6. Remove tie band (3).
7. Remove locking screw (4).
8. Turn selector lever to the standard EXCAVATOR
control pattern or BACKHOE control pattern.
9. Install tie band.
Mechanical Control Lever Pattern Selector
1— EXCAVATOR Control
Pattern
2— BACKHOE Control Pattern
3— Tie Band
4— Locking Screw
DB84312,000003F -19-23NOV11-1/1
2-3-17
081214
PN=109
Operation—Operating the Machine
Control Lever Pattern Conversion
A
C
1. Park and prepare machine for service.
CAUTION: To avoid injury from escaping fluid
under pressure, stop engine and relieve the
pressure in the system before disconnecting or
connecting hydraulic or other lines. Tighten all
connections before applying pressure.
D
2. Release hydraulic oil tank pressure by pushing
pressure release button on top of hydraulic oil tank.
B
TX1137117 —UN—17JUN13
NOTE: When going from excavator to backhoe pattern,
moving boom up (A) hose to arm in (D) port,
a fabricated hose size -6 JIC male x female
approximately 150 mm (6 in.) long, is needed.
41
3. Switch pilot line boom up (A) with arm in (D) port.
Switch pilot line boom down (B) with arm out (C) port.
4. To view control lever patterns, see Control Lever
Pattern Operation in this section.
Pilot Control Valve Side
EXCAVATOR PATTERN
PILOT SIGNAL MANIFOLD
FUNCTIONS
Right
Left
PILOT CONTROL
VALVE SIDE
CONTROL
VALVE SIDE
BUCKET DUMP
H
8
BOOM DOWN
B
2
BUCKET CURL
G
7
BOOM UP
A
1
SWING RIGHT
F
6
ARM OUT
C
3
SWING LEFT
E
5
ARM IN
D
4
41— Pilot Signal Manifold (pilot
control valve side)
A—Boom Up
B—Boom Down
C—Arm Out
D—Arm In
BACKHOE PATTERN
PILOT SIGNAL MANIFOLD
FUNCTIONS
Right
NOTE: LETTERS AND NUMBERS ARE ON
THE HOUSINGS NEXT TO THE PORTS
Left
PILOT CONTROL
VALVE SIDE
CONTROL
VALVE SIDE
BUCKET DUMP
H
8
ARM OUT
C
3
BUCKET CURL
G
7
ARM IN
D
4
SWING RIGHT
F
6
BOOM DOWN
B
2
SWING LEFT
E
5
BOOM UP
A
1
NOTE: LETTERS AND NUMBERS ARE ON
THE HOUSINGS NEXT TO THE PORTS
MM16284,0001B12 -19-22AUG13-1/1
2-3-18
081214
PN=110
Operation—Operating the Machine
Operating in Water and Mud
TX1086781A —UN—11JAN11
Be careful not to operate the machine in water or mud
above the upper deck surface of the undercarriage,
causing the swing bearing and rotary manifold to be
submerged.
If the swing bearing and rotary manifold are submerged,
remove cover from underneath center of machine.
Remove drain plug (1) to drain water and mud.
Clean swing gear area. Install plug and cover. Lubricate
swing gear and swing bearing.
Drain Plug (view from underneath)
1— Drain Plug
ER79617,0000DB3 -19-27MAY11-1/1
Driving Up a Steep or Slippery Slope
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from machine
roll-over. Use this technique only on a short slope.
Machine depends on support of boom/arm/bucket
during entire procedure until machine reaches
top of slope. Repositioning the bucket during
this procedure is NOT recommended. DO NOT
swing upperstructure during this procedure. DO
NOT reposition bucket during this procedure.
1. Wear seat belt.
2. Position undercarriage so travel motors will be on
uphill end of machine.
3. Push bucket into the ground.
4. When boom is on uphill end of machine; pull machine
using boom and arm cylinder to help travel motors.
When boom is on downhill end of machine; push
machine using boom and arm cylinder to help travel
motors.
VD76477,00001F4 -19-09JAN12-1/1
Lifting
CAUTION: Avoid possible injury from unexpected
machine movement. Lifting requires special care.
Observe these rules when lifting with the machine:
• Never use machine to lift people.
• Do not exceed lift capacity limits.
• Keep everyone clear of raised loads.
• Never attach sling or chain to bucket teeth.
• Use tether lines to guide loads.
• Use hand signals to communicate with others.
TX1087169A —UN—20JAN11
NOTE: For buckets without a loop, see your
authorized dealer.
1. Use proper rigging to attach and stabilize loads.
2. Curl bucket and retract arm. Fasten sling or chain to
bucket loop (1).
3. Check stability by carefully doing a trial lift:
• Raise load just off of ground.
• Swing load all the way to one side.
• Move load slowly away from machine.
• Lower load immediately if machine is not stable.
Bucket Loop
1— Bucket Loop
ER79617,0000DD6 -19-19MAR12-1/1
2-3-19
081214
PN=111
Operation—Operating the Machine
Lower Boom With Engine Stopped
X9811 —UN—23AUG88
When an engine stops during operation, the boom cannot
be lowered using the pilot controller because there is no
pilot pressure oil to move the boom valve spool.
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from
unexpected machine movement. Clear all
persons from the area before lowering the
boom with the engine stopped.
1. Remove control valve access cover.
CAUTION: To avoid injury from escaping oil
under pressure, stop engine and relieve the
pressure in the system before disconnecting or
connecting hydraulic or other lines. Tighten all
connections before applying pressure.
Lower Boom with Engine Stopped
IMPORTANT: Never loosen screw more than two
turns as screw may come off.
2. Loosen nut (1). Loosen boom manual lower screw
(2) 1/2 turn. The boom will start to lower. The
boom lowering speed can be somewhat adjusted by
loosening screw more.
3. After the bucket is lowered to the ground, tighten
screw, then nut to specifications.
1— Nut
TX1000642 —UN—29NOV05
Specification
Hex Key Wrench—Size................................................................... 4 mm
Screw—Torque.............................................................................7.0 N·m
5.2 lb.-ft.
Nut (1)—Torque..........................................................................13.0 N·m
9.4 lb.-ft.
2— Boom Manual Lower Screw
Control Valve-Right Side Shown
DB84312,0000088 -19-04MAR14-1/1
2-3-20
081214
PN=112
Operation—Operating the Machine
Parking the Machine
IMPORTANT: During freezing weather, prevent
damage to undercarriage components from
frozen mud and dirt. Machine must be
parked on a solid level surface to prevent
tracks freezing in the ground.
1. Park machine on a solid level surface.
During freezing weather, clean mud and dirt from
tracks, rollers and track frames. Clean the steps and
walkways after parking the machine.
TX1087012A —UN—18JAN11
If tracks are frozen in the ground, slowly raise the
machine using boom to free the tracks. Move machine
carefully.
2. Lower equipment to the ground.
3. Turn auto-idle switch (1) to the A/I OFF position.
IMPORTANT: Turbocharger can be damaged
if procedure to shutdown engine is not
done properly.
Switch Panel
4. Run engine with engine speed dial (2) at 1/3 position
without load for 2 minutes.
5. Turn engine speed dial to slow idle position.
TX1087013A —UN—18JAN11
6. Turn key switch (3) to the OFF position. Remove key
from switch.
7. Place pilot shutoff lever (4) to locked (UP) position.
IMPORTANT: Prevent cab electrical component
damage from bad weather. Windows, roof
vent, and cab door must be closed to
prevent rain from entering.
8. Close windows, roof vent, and cab door.
Pilot Shutoff Lever
9. Lock all access doors and compartments.
1— Auto-Idle Switch
2— Engine Speed Dial
3— Key Switch
4— Pilot Shutoff Lever
ER79617,0000DCF -19-09JAN12-1/1
2-3-21
081214
PN=113
Operation—Operating the Machine
Loading and Unloading for Transport
T137507 —UN—25JAN01
CAUTION: Use extra care to prevent tipover
or unexpected movement when loading and
unloading machine for transport. Observe these
rules when loading and unloading machine:
• Keep the trailer bed clean.
• Locate trailer on a level and stable surface.
• Chock trailer wheels.
• Always wear seat belt.
• Use loading ramps. Keep ramps at a low
angle and firmly attached to trailer.
• Turn auto-idle switch to the A/I OFF position.
Loading Machine On A Trailer
Use slow speed operating modes and
move machine carefully.
1. When loading machine, use bucket for support with
angle of arm to boom at 90° (1).
T7405BJ —UN—29NOV90
IMPORTANT: Prevent machine or trailer damage. DO
NOT allow machine or bucket to impact trailer.
2. Position machine on trailer as shown. Fasten machine
to trailer at designated tie down (2) areas.
3. When unloading machine, use bucket for support with
angle of arm to boom at 90°.
Moving Machine On Trailer
TX1086371A —UN—03JAN11
2— Tie Down (4 used)
Tie Downs (front side shown)
T137505 —UN—25JAN01
1— 90° Arm to Boom
Unloading Machine From A Trailer
ER79617,0000D83 -19-19MAR12-1/1
2-3-22
081214
PN=114
Operation—Operating the Machine
Towing Machine
T137511 —UN—25JAN01
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from
unexpected machine movement. Block
both tracks when disconnecting travel
gear cases. When travel gear cases are
disconnected, machine has no brakes and
can move. The machine will roll free on a
slope or while being towed.
1. Block tracks.
2. Drain oil from each travel gear case.
Sun Gear
3. Remove cover from each gear case.
4. Remove sun gear (1) from each gear case.
1— Sun Gear
5. Install cover. Fill gear case with oil.
ER79617,0000A94 -19-09JAN12-1/1
Lifting the Machine
TX1156707 —UN—27MAR14
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from
unexpected machine movement when lifting
the machine. Check lifting capacity of crane
before lifting the excavator. Lift load only
as high as necessary.
Keep all people clear of raised load.
NOTE: The center of gravity (2) will vary depending
on the kind of attachment.
Lifting Machine
NOTE: Refer to decals on machine for correct lift
points (1). There are 2 lift points on each
side of the undercarriage.
1— Lifting Points
2— Center of Gravity
3— Support Bar
1. Fully extend boom, arm, and bucket cylinders.
2. Position boom straight ahead of the upperstructure.
3. Turn key switch to OFF. Remove key from switch.
4. Pull pilot control shutoff lever to locked position.
5. Route appropriate lifting device through lifting points (1)
and under both sides of the track frame as illustrated.
6. Attach appropriate lifting device to crane.
Specification
160GLC —Approximate
Weight...................................................................................... 18 017 kg
39 685 lb.
Specification
180GLC—Approximate
Weight...................................................................................... 20 120 kg
44 317 lb.
7. Slowly lift machine.
JS93577,00008EC -19-02APR14-1/1
2-3-23
081214
PN=115
Maintenance—Machine
Diesel Fuel
Consult your local fuel distributor for properties of the
diesel fuel available in your area.
In general, diesel fuels are blended to satisfy the low
temperature requirements of the geographical area in
which they are marketed.
Diesel fuels specified to EN 590 or ASTM D975 are
recommended. Renewable diesel fuel produced by
hydrotreating animal fats and vegetable oils is basically
identical to petroleum diesel fuel. Renewable diesel that
meets EN 590 or ASTM D975 is acceptable for use at all
percentage mixture levels.
Sulfur Content for Tier 3 and Stage III A Engines
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 1000
mg/kg (1000 ppm) is RECOMMENDED.
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content 1000—2000 mg/kg
(1000—2000 ppm) REDUCES the oil and filter change
interval.
• BEFORE using diesel fuel with sulfur content greater
than 2000 mg/kg (2000 ppm), contact your John Deere
dealer.
Sulfur Content for Tier 2 and Stage II Engines
Required Fuel Properties
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 2000
In all cases, the fuel shall meet the following properties:
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content 2000—5000 mg/kg
mg/kg (2000 ppm) is RECOMMENDED.
(2000—5000 ppm) REDUCES the oil and filter change
interval.
BEFORE using diesel fuel with sulfur content greater
than 5000 mg/kg (5000 ppm), contact your John Deere
dealer.
Cetane number of 43 minimum. Cetane number greater
than 47 is preferred, especially for temperatures below
–20 °C (–4 °F) or elevations above 1500 m (5000 ft.).
•
Cold Filter Plugging Point (CFPP) should be at least 5
°C (9 °F) below the expected lowest temperature or Cloud
Point below the expected lowest ambient temperature.
Sulfur Content for Other Engines
Fuel lubricity should pass a maximum scar diameter of
0.52 mm as measured by ASTM D6079 or ISO 12156-1.
A maximum scar diameter of 0.45 mm is preferred.
Diesel fuel quality and sulfur content must comply with
all existing emissions regulations for the area in which
the engine operates. DO NOT use diesel fuel with sulfur
content greater than 10000 mg/kg (10000 ppm).
Sulfur content for Interim Tier 4, Final Tier 4,
Stage III B, and Stage IV Engines
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 5000
mg/kg (5000 ppm) is RECOMMENDED.
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content greater than 5000
mg/kg (5000 ppm) REDUCES the oil and filter change
interval.
IMPORTANT: Do not mix used diesel engine oil or any
other type of lubricating oil with diesel fuel.
Improper fuel additive usage may cause damage
on fuel injection equipment of diesel engines.
• Use ONLY ultra low sulfur diesel (ULSD) fuel with a
maximum of 15 mg/kg (15 ppm) sulfur content.
DX,FUEL1 -19-17JUN13-1/1
Diesel Fuel Specifications
The engine in this machine is designed to operate only
with ultra low sulfur diesel (ULSD) fuel. Use of fuel
other than ULSD will reduce the efficiency and durability
of the engine, will harm and permanently damage the
engine’s advanced emissions control systems, reduce
fuel economy, and possibly prevent the engine from
running at all. Emission-related warranties are likely to
be rendered void by the use of fuel that does not meet
these specifications.
OUT4001,000060A -19-10JAN12-1/1
3-1-1
081214
PN=116
Maintenance—Machine
Lubricity of Diesel Fuel
Most diesel fuels manufactured in the United States,
Canada, and the European Union have adequate lubricity
to ensure proper operation and durability of fuel injection
system components. However, diesel fuels manufactured
in some areas of the world may lack the necessary lubricity.
IMPORTANT: Make sure the diesel fuel used
in your machine demonstrates good
lubricity characteristics.
If fuel of low or unknown lubricity is used, add John Deere
Fuel-Protect Diesel Fuel Conditioner (or equivalent) at
the specified concentration.
Lubricity of BioDiesel Fuel
Fuel lubricity can improve significantly with BioDiesel
blends up to B20 (20% BioDiesel). Further increase in
lubricity is limited for BioDiesel blends greater than B20.
Fuel lubricity should pass a maximum scar diameter of
0.52 mm as measured by ASTM D6079 or ISO 12156-1.
A maximum scar diameter of 0.45 mm is preferred.
DX,FUEL5 -19-07FEB14-1/1
Handling and Storing Diesel Fuel
CAUTION: Reduce the risk of fire. Handle fuel
carefully. DO NOT fill the fuel tank when engine
is running. DO NOT smoke while you fill the
fuel tank or service the fuel system.
Fill the fuel tank at the end of each day's operation to
prevent water condensation and freezing during cold
weather.
Keep all storage tanks as full as practicable to minimize
condensation.
Ensure that all fuel tank caps and covers are installed
properly to prevent moisture from entering. Monitor water
content of the fuel regularly.
When using BioDiesel fuel, the fuel filter may require more
frequent replacement due to premature plugging.
Check engine oil level daily prior to starting engine. A
rising oil level may indicate fuel dilution of the engine oil.
IMPORTANT: The fuel tank is vented through the
filler cap. If a new filler cap is required, always
replace it with an original vented cap.
When fuel is stored for an extended period or if there is a
slow turnover of fuel, add a fuel conditioner to stabilize the
fuel and prevent water condensation. Contact your fuel
supplier or John Deere dealer for recommendations.
DX,FUEL4 -19-15FEB13-1/1
3-1-2
081214
PN=117
Maintenance—Machine
Biodiesel Fuel
Biodiesel is a fuel comprised of monoalkyl esters of long
chain fatty acids derived from vegetable oils or animal
fats. Biodiesel blends are biodiesel mixed with petroleum
diesel fuel on a volume basis.
Before using fuel containing biodiesel review the Biodiesel
Use Requirements and Recommendations in this
Operator’s Manual.
Environmental laws / regulations may encourage or
prohibit the use of biofuels. Operators should consult
with appropriate governmental authorities prior to using
biofuels.
US / Canada
While 5% blends are preferred (B5), biodiesel
concentrations up to a 20% blend (B20) in petroleum
diesel fuel can be used in all John Deere engines.
Biodiesel blends up to B20 can be used ONLY if the
biodiesel (100% biodiesel or B100) meets ASTM D6751
(US), EN 14214 (EU), or equivalent specification. Expect
a 2% reduction in power and a 3% reduction in fuel
economy when using B20.
Biodiesel concentrations above B20 may harm the
engine’s emission control systems and should not be
used in the US and Canada. Risks may include, but
not be limited to, more frequent exhaust filter parked
cleanings, soot accumulation, and increased intervals for
ash removal.
Biodiesel users in the U.S. are strongly encouraged
to purchase biodiesel blends from a BQ9000 Certified
Marketer and sourced from a BQ9000 Accredited
Producer (as certified by the National Biodiesel Board).
Certified Marketers and Accredited Producers can be
found at the following website: http://www.bq9000.org.
John Deere approved fuel conditioners containing
detergent/dispersant additives are required when using
B20 blends and recommended when using lower biodiesel
blends. Biodiesel blends up to B20 must be used within
90 days of the date of biodiesel manufacture. Biodiesel
blends above B20 must be used within 45 days from the
date of biodiesel manufacture.
Biodiesel Use Recommendations
When using biodiesel blends up to B20 the following must
be considered:
• Cold weather flow degradation
• Stability and storage issues (moisture absorption,
oxidation, microbial growth)
• Possible filter restriction and plugging (usually a problem
when first switching to biodiesel on used engines)
Request a certificate of analysis from your fuel distributor
to ensure that the fuel is compliant with the specifications
provided in this Operator’s Manual.
Consult your John Deere dealer for approved fuel
conditioners to improve storage and performance with
biodiesel fuels.
The following must also be considered when using
biodiesel blends above B20:
• Possible coking and/or blocked injector nozzles,
resulting in power loss and engine misfire if John
Deere approved fuel conditioners containing
detergent/dispersant additives are not used
• Possible crankcase oil dilution, requiring more frequent
oil changes
• Possible lacquering and/or seizure of internal
Other regions
John Deere engines can operate on biodiesel blends
below and above B20 (up to 100% biodiesel). Operate
at levels above B20 ONLY if the biodiesel meets the
EN 14214 specification (primarily available in Europe).
Engines operating on biodiesel blends above B20 may
not fully comply with all applicable emissions regulations.
Expect up to a 12% reduction in power and an 18%
reduction in fuel economy when using 100% biodiesel.
John Deere approved fuel conditioners containing
detergent/dispersant additives are required.
Biodiesel Use Requirements
The petroleum diesel portion of all biodiesel blends must
meet the requirements of ASTM D975 (US) or EN 590
(EU) commercial standard.
When using biodiesel fuel, the fuel filter may require more
frequent replacement due to premature plugging. Check
engine oil level daily prior to starting engine. A rising oil
level may indicate fuel dilution of the engine oil.
components
• Possible formation of sludge and sediments
• Possible thermal oxidation of fuel at elevated
temperatures
• Possible compatibility issues with other materials
(including copper, lead, zinc, tin, brass, and bronze)
used in fuel handling equipment
• Possible reduction in water separator efficiency
• Possible damage to paint if exposed to biodiesel
IMPORTANT: Raw pressed vegetable oils are
NOT acceptable for use as fuel in any
concentration in John Deere engines. Their
use could cause engine failure.
OUT4001,0000671 -19-29MAR11-1/1
3-1-3
081214
PN=118
Maintenance—Machine
Testing Diesel Fuel
A fuel analysis program can help to monitor the quality
of diesel fuel. The fuel analysis can provide critical
data such as cetane number, fuel type, sulfur content,
water content, appearance, suitability for cold weather
operations, bacteria, cloud point, acid number, particulate
contamination, and whether the fuel meets specification.
Contact your John Deere dealer for more information on
diesel fuel analysis.
DX,FUEL6 -19-14APR11-1/1
Fuel Filters
The importance of fuel filtration cannot be overemphasized
with modern fuel systems. The combination of increasingly
restrictive emission regulations and more efficient engines
requires fuel system to operate at much higher pressures.
Higher pressures can only be achieved using fuel injection
components with very close tolerances. These close
manufacturing tolerances have significantly reduced
capacities for debris and water.
John Deere brand fuel filters have been designed and
produced specifically for John Deere engines.
To protect the engine from debris and water, always
change engine fuel filters as specified in this manual.
DX,FILT2 -19-14APR11-1/1
3-1-4
081214
PN=119
Maintenance—Machine
Minimizing the Effect of Cold Weather on Diesel Engines
John Deere diesel engines are designed to operate
effectively in cold weather.
However, for effective starting and cold weather operation,
a little extra care is necessary. The following information
outlines steps that can minimize the effect that cold
weather may have on starting and operation of your
engine. See your John Deere dealer for additional
information and local availability of cold weather aids.
Use Winter Grade Fuel
When temperatures fall below 0°C (32°F), winter grade
fuel (No. 1D in North America) is best suited for cold
weather operation. Winter grade fuel has a lower cloud
point and a lower pour point.
Cloud point is the temperature at which wax will begin to
form in the fuel and this wax causes fuel filters to plug.
Pour point is the lowest temperature at which movement
of the fuel is observed.
NOTE: On an average, winter grade diesel fuel has a lower
BTU (heat content) rating. Using winter grade fuel
may reduce power and fuel efficiency, but should not
cause any other engine performance effects. Check
the grade of fuel being used before troubleshooting
for low power complaints in cold weather operation.
chemistry, or equivalent fuel conditioner to treat non-winter
grade fuel (No. 2D in North America) during the cold
weather season. This generally extends operability
to about 10°C (18°F) below the fuel cloud point. For
operability at even lower temperatures, use winter grade
fuel.
IMPORTANT: Treat fuel when outside temperature
drops below 0°C (32°F). For best results, use
with untreated fuel. Follow all recommended
instructions on label.
BioDiesel
When operating with biodiesel blends, wax formation
can occur at warmer temperatures. Begin using John
Deere PREMIUM BIODIESEL FUEL CONDITIONER
(winter formula) at 5°C (41°F) to treat biodiesel fuels
during the cold-weather season. Use B5 or lower blends
at temperatures below 0°C (32°F). Use only winter grade
petroleum diesel fuel at temperatures below -10°C (14°F).
In colder weather, engines operating with biodiesel may
have more frequent parked cleanings, soot accumulation,
and increased intervals for ash removal from the exhaust
filter.
Winterfronts
Use of fabric, cardboard, or solid winterfronts is not
recommended with any John Deere engine. Their use
can result in excessive engine coolant, oil, and charge
air temperatures. This can lead to reduced engine life,
loss of power and poor fuel economy. Winterfronts may
also put abnormal stress on fan and fan drive components
potentially causing premature failures. If winterfronts are
used, they should never totally close off the grill frontal
area. Approximately 25% area in the center of the grill
should remain open at all times. At no time should the air
blockage device be applied directly to the radiator core.
Air Intake Heater
An air intake heater is an available option for some
engines to aid cold weather starting.
CAUTION: Ether is highly flammable. Do not
use ether when starting an engine equipped
with glow plugs or an air intake heater.
Coolant Heater
An engine block heater (coolant heater) is an available
option to aid cold weather starting.
Seasonal Viscosity Oil and Proper Coolant
Concentration
Use seasonal grade viscosity engine oil based on the
expected air temperature range between oil changes
and a proper concentration of low silicate antifreeze as
recommended. (See Diesel Engine Oil and Heavy Duty
Diesel Engine Coolant in this section.)
Diesel Fuel Flow Additive
Radiator Shutters
If equipped with a thermostatically controlled radiator
shutter system, this system should be regulated in such a
way that the shutters are completely open by the time the
coolant reaches 93°C (200°F) to prevent excessive intake
manifold temperatures. Manually controlled systems
are not recommended. If air-to-air aftercooling is used,
the shutters must be completely open by the time the
intake manifold air temperature reaches the maximum
allowable temperature out of the charge air cooler. For
more information, see your John Deere dealer.
Use John Deere PREMIUM DIESEL FUEL
CONDITIONER (winter formula), which contains antigel
DB84312,0000035 -19-08MAY12-1/1
3-1-5
081214
PN=120
Maintenance—Machine
Alternative and Synthetic Lubricants
Conditions in certain geographical areas may require
lubricant recommendations different from those printed in
this manual.
Synthetic lubricants may be used if they meet the
performance requirements as shown in this manual.
Some John Deere brand coolants and lubricants may not
be available in your location.
The temperature limits and service intervals shown in
this manual apply to both conventional and synthetic
lubricants.
Consult your John Deere dealer to obtain information and
recommendations.
Re-refined base stock products may be used if the
finished lubricant meets the performance requirements.
DX,ALTER -19-11APR11-1/1
Mixing of Lubricants
In general, avoid mixing different brands or types of oil.
Oil manufacturers blend additives in their oils to meet
certain specifications and performance requirements.
Consult your John Deere dealer to obtain specific
information and recommendations.
Mixing different oils can interfere with the proper
functioning of these additives and degrade lubricant
performance.
DX,LUBMIX -19-18MAR96-1/1
Lubricant Storage
Your equipment can operate at top efficiency only when
clean lubricants are used.
Use clean containers to handle all lubricants.
Store lubricants and containers in an area protected from
dust, moisture, and other contamination. Store containers
on their side to avoid water and dirt accumulation.
Make certain that all containers are properly marked to
identify their contents.
Properly dispose of all old containers and any residual
lubricant they may contain.
DX,LUBST -19-11APR11-1/1
3-1-6
081214
PN=121
Maintenance—Machine
John Deere Break-In Plus™ Engine Oil
New engines are filled at the factory with either John
Deere Break-In™ or Break-In Plus™ Engine Oil. During
the break-in period, add John Deere Break-In or Break-In
Plus Engine Oil, respectively, as needed to maintain the
specified oil level.
Operate the engine under various conditions, particularly
heavy loads with minimal idling, to help seat engine
components properly.
Change the oil and filter at 250 hours maximum for
Break-In Oil or 500 hours maximum for Break-In Plus Oil
during the initial operation of a new or rebuilt engine.
IMPORTANT: Do not use Plus-50™ II, Plus-50, or
engine oils meeting any of the following for the
initial break-in of a new or rebuilt engine:
API CJ-4
ACEA E9
API CI-4 PLUS
ACEA E7
API CI-4
ACEA E6
API CH-4
ACEA E5
API CG-4
ACEA E4
API CF-4
ACEA E3
API CF-2
API CF
After engine overhaul, fill the engine with either John
Deere Break-In or Break-In Plus Engine Oil.
If John Deere Break-In or Break-In Plus Engine Oil is not
available, use a 10W-30 diesel engine oil meeting one of
the following during the first 250 hours of operation:
• API Service Classification CE
• API Service Classification CD
• API Service Classification CC
• ACEA Oil Sequence E2
• ACEA Oil Sequence E1
These oils will not allow the engine to
break in properly.
John Deere Break-In Plus Engine Oil can be used for all
John Deere diesel engines at all emission certification
levels.
After the break-in period, use John Deere Plus-50 II, John
Deere Plus-50, or other diesel engine oil as recommended
in this manual.
Break-In is a trademark of Deere & Company.
Break-In Plus is a trademark of Deere & Company
Plus-50 is a trademark of Deere & Company.
OUT4001,000067D -19-31MAR11-1/1
3-1-7
081214
PN=122
104˚F
30˚C
86˚F
20˚C
68˚F
10˚C
50˚F
0˚C
32˚F
-10˚C
14˚F
• API Service Category CJ-4
• ACEA Oil Sequence E9
• ACEA Oil Sequence E6
-20˚C
-4˚F
-30˚C
-22˚F
DO NOT use engine oil containing more than 1.0%
sulfated ash, 0.12% phosphorus, or 0.4% sulfur.
-40˚C
-40˚F
John Deere Plus-50™ II is the recommended
engine oil.
Extended service intervals may apply when John Deere
Plus-50 II engine oil is used. Refer to the engine oil drain
interval table and consult your John Deere dealer for more
information.
If John Deere Plus-50 II engine oil is not available, engine
oil meeting one or more of the following may be used:
TX1114353 —UN—22MAY12
40˚C
SAE 5W-30
Use oil viscosity based on the expected air temperature
range during the period between oil changes.
SAE 10W-30
122˚F
SAE 10W-40
50˚C
SAE 15W-40
Diesel Engine Oil—Interim Tier 4 and Stage
III B Engines
SAE 0W-40
Maintenance—Machine
Oil Viscosities for Air Temperature Ranges
Multi-viscosity diesel engine oils are preferred.
Diesel fuel quality and fuel sulfur content must comply
with all existing emissions regulations for the area in
which the engine operates.
IMPORTANT: Use only ultra low sulfur diesel
(ULSD) fuel with a maximum sulfur content
of 15 mg/kg (15 ppm).
Plus-50 is a trademark of Deere & Company
VD76477,00004E6 -19-23MAY12-1/1
3-1-8
081214
PN=123
Maintenance—Machine
Engine Oil and Filter Service Intervals — Interim Tier 4, Final Tier 4, Stage IIIB, and Stage
IV Engines
• Use only approved oil types.
Recommended oil and filter service intervals are based
on a combination of oil pan capacity, type of engine oil
and filter used, and sulfur content of the diesel fuel.
Actual service intervals also depend on operation and
maintenance practices.
Approved Oil Types:
Use oil analysis to evaluate the condition of the oil and to
aid in selection of the proper oil and filter service interval.
Contact your John Deere dealer for more information on
engine oil analysis.
NOTE: The 500 hour extended oil and filter change
interval is only allowed if all of the following
conditions are met:
Change the oil and oil filter at least once every 12 months
even if the hours of operation are fewer than the otherwise
recommended service interval.
Diesel fuel sulfur content affects engine oil and filter
service intervals. Higher fuel sulfur levels reduce oil and
filter service intervals.
Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 15 mg/kg
(15 ppm) is REQUIRED.
• John Deere Plus-50™ II
• “Other Oils” include API CJ-4, ACEA E9, and ACEA E6
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less
than 15 mg/kg (15 ppm)
• Use of John Deere Plus-50™ II oil
• Use of an approved John Deere oil filter
Engine Oil and Filter Service Intervals
John Deere Plus-50™ II
500 hours
Other Oils
250 hours
Oil analysis may extend the service interval of “Other Oils” to a
maximum not to exceed the interval of Plus-50™ II oils.
IMPORTANT: To avoid engine damage:
• Reduce oil and filter service intervals by 50%
when using BioDiesel blends greater than B20.
Oil analysis may allow longer service intervals.
Plus-50 is a trademark of Deere & Company
DX,ENOIL15,IT4,120toMAX -19-07FEB14-1/1
Oil Filters
Filtration of oils is critically important for proper operation
and lubrication. John Deere brand oil filters have been
designed and produced specifically for John Deere
applications.
John Deere filters adhere to engineering specifications for
quality of the filter media, filter efficiency rating, strength
of the bond between the filter media and the element end
cap, fatigue life of the canister (if applicable), and pressure
capability of the filter seal. Non-John Deere branded oil
filters might not meet these key John Deere specifications.
Always change oil filters regularly as specified in this
manual.
DX,FILT1 -19-11APR11-1/1
3-1-9
081214
PN=124
40˚C
104˚F
30˚C
86˚F
20˚C
68˚F
10˚C
50˚F
0˚C
32˚F
-10˚C
14˚F
Flushing system is required when changing
from zinc-free to zinc-based oils. Contact
authorized dealer for the flushing procedure.
Avoid mixing different brands of oils. Oil
manufacturers engineer their oils to meet
certain specifications and requirements.
Mixing different oils can degrade lubricant
and machine performance.
Super EX 46HN
DO NOT MIX ZINC-BASED AND ZINC-FREE OILS.
-20˚C
-4˚F
Use oil viscosity based on the expected air temperature
range during the period between oil changes.
-30˚C
-22˚F
Low Temperature Operation
-40˚C
-40˚F
•
•
•
Do not mix zinc-based and zinc-free oils.
A preferred ISO 32 hydraulic oil may be added to the
machine for low temperature operations. Hydraulic
system oil viscosity must be 32Cst at 40°C minimum
and must not be operated when ambient temperature
exceeds 30°C (86°F).
When switching back to warm weather operation a
preferred ISO46 hydraulic oil may be added to the
machine. The hydraulic system oil viscosity must be
40Cst at 40°C minimum and must not be operated
when ambient temperature exceeds 40°C (104°F).
Seasonal Hydraulic Flushing
• Do not mix zinc-based and zinc-free oils.
• Two hydraulic tank flushes are required when changing
hydraulic oils for seasonal operation. Drain and refill
tank with new oil (ISO32-cold, ISO46-warm.). Operate
machine to mix oil in system. Drain and refill tank again.
Check oil viscosity.
The following oil is preferred:
5000 hour change interval:
TX1079198 —UN—24JUN10
122˚F
Premium AW32
50˚C
IMPORTANT: This machine is factory filled with Super
EX 46HN extended life zinc-free hydraulic oil.
Premium AW 46
Hydraulic Oil
Daphne Super Hydro A 32
Maintenance—Machine
Hydraulic Oil
1500 hour change interval:
IMPORTANT: Avoid damage to the machine.
Zinc-based oils must not be mixed with 2500
hour and 5000 hour zinc-free oils.
The following products may be zinc-based and can be
used provided a complete hydraulic system flush has
been performed. Contact your dealer for this procedure.
Premium AW oil: AW46 or AW32 (for low temperature
operation)
Biodegradable Hydraulic Oil:
IMPORTANT: Other fire resistant and readily
biodegradable oil (also called FR oils) are
not approved in John Deere Construction
and Forestry equipment.
Use only Exxon Mobil EAL Envirosyn 46H Synthetic
Esther Oil when a biodegradable oil is required. (Contact
your John Deere dealer for Registration and Routine Oil
Analysis to meet warranty requirements.)
• Zinc-Free Super EX 46HN oil from John Deere
2500 hour change interval:
• Zinc-Free Daphne Super Hydro A 32 (For low
temperature operation.)
ER79617,0000E41 -19-29APR14-1/1
3-1-10
081214
PN=125
Maintenance—Machine
Swing Gear Case and Travel Gear Case Oils
Use oil viscosity based on the expected air temperature
range during the period between oil changes.
The following oils are preferred:
• John Deere GL-5 Gear Lubricant
• John Deere EXTREME-GARD™
Other oils may be used if they meet the following:
TS1653 —UN—14MAR96
• API Service Category GL-5
Swing Gear Case Oil
EXTREME-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
VD76477,00001F6 -19-29APR14-1/1
Pump Drive Gear Case Oil
IMPORTANT: This machine can use 15W/40 engine oil
or 80/90 gear oil in the pump drive gear case.
Use oil viscosity based on the expected air temperature
range during the period between oil changes.
The following oil is preferred:
• John Deere Plus-50™ II
The following oil is also recommended:
• John Deere Torq-Gard™
T197398 —UN—21JAN04
Other oils may be used if they meet one or more of the
following:
• API Service Category CI-4
• API Service Category CH-4
• API Service Category CG-4
Pump Gear Case Oil
Plus-50 is a trademark of Deere & Company
Torq-Gard is a trademark of Deere & Company
DB84312,000008E -19-29APR14-1/1
3-1-11
081214
PN=126
Maintenance—Machine
Track Adjuster, Working Tool Pivot, Swing
Bearing, and Swing Bearing Gear Grease
Use grease based on NLGI consistency numbers and the
expected air temperature range during the service interval.
The following grease is preferred:
• John Deere SD Polyurea Grease
The following greases are also recommended:
• John Deere HD Lithium Complex Grease
• John Deere HD Water Resistant Grease
• John Deere GREASE-GARD™
TS1673 —UN—31OCT03
Other greases may be used if they meet the following:
• NLGI Performance Classification GC-LB
IMPORTANT: Some types of grease thickener are not
compatible with others. Consult your grease
supplier before mixing different types of grease.
Gear Grease
GREASE-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
OUT4001,00007D4 -19-21AUG12-1/1
3-1-12
081214
PN=127
Maintenance—Machine
Diesel Engine Coolant (engine with wet sleeve cylinder liners)
• Coolant concentrate meeting ASTM D6210
Preferred Coolants
requirements in a 40—60% mixture of concentrate with
quality water
The following pre-mix engine coolants are preferred:
• John Deere COOL-GARD™II
• John Deere COOL-GARD II PG
COOL-GARD II pre-mix coolant is available in several
concentrations with different freeze protection limits as
shown in the following table.
COOL-GARD II pre-mix
Freeze Protection Limit
COOL-GARD II 20/80
-9 °C (16 °F)
COOL-GARD II 30/70
-16 °C (3 °F)
COOL-GARD II 50/50
-37 °C (-34 °F)
COOL-GARD II 55/45
-45 °C (-49 °F)
COOL-GARD II PG 60/40
-49 °C (-56 °F)
COOL-GARD II 60/40
-52 °C (-62 °F)
If coolant meeting one of these specifications is
unavailable, use a coolant concentrate or pre-mix coolant
that has a minimum of the following chemical and physical
properties:
• Provides cylinder liner cavitation protection according to
•
•
either the John Deere Cavitation Test Method or a fleet
study run at or above 60% load capacity
Is formulated with a nitrite-free additive package
Protects the cooling system metals (cast iron, aluminum
alloys, and copper alloys such as brass) from corrosion
Water Quality
Not all COOL-GARD II pre-mix products are available in
all countries.
Water quality is important to the performance of the
cooling system. Distilled, deionized, or demineralized
water is recommended for mixing with ethylene glycol and
propylene glycol base engine coolant concentrate.
Use COOL-GARD II PG when a non-toxic coolant
formulation is required.
Coolant Drain Intervals
Additional Recommended Coolants
Drain and flush the cooling system and refill with fresh
coolant at the indicated interval, which varies with the
coolant used.
The following engine coolant is also recommended:
• John Deere COOL-GARD II Concentrate in a 40—60%
When COOL-GARD II or COOL-GARD II PG is used, the
drain interval is 6 years or 6000 hours of operation.
IMPORTANT: When mixing coolant concentrate with
water, do not use less than 40% or greater
than 60% concentration of coolant. Less than
40% gives inadequate additives for corrosion
protection. Greater than 60% can result in
coolant gelation and cooling system problems.
If a coolant other than COOL-GARD II or COOL-GARD II
PG is used, reduce the drain interval to 2 years or 2000
hours of operation.
mixture of concentrate with quality water.
Other Coolants
Other ethylene glycol or propylene glycol base coolants
may be used if they meet the following specification:
IMPORTANT: Do not use cooling system sealing
additives or antifreeze that contains
sealing additives.
Do not mix ethylene glycol and propylene
glycol base coolants.
Do not use coolants that contain nitrites.
• Pre-mix coolant meeting ASTM D6210 requirements
COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
DX,COOL3 -19-15MAY13-1/1
3-1-13
081214
PN=128
Maintenance—Machine
Drain Intervals for Diesel Engine Coolant
Drain and flush the cooling system and refill with fresh
coolant at the indicated interval, which varies with the
coolant used.
John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Premix, COOL-GARD
II PG Premix and COOL-GARD II Concentrate are
maintenance free coolants for up to six years or 6000
hours of operation, provided that the cooling system is
topped off using only John Deere COOL-GARD II Premix
or COOL-GARD II PG Premix.
Test the coolant condition annually with Coolant Test
Strips designed for use with John Deere COOL-GARD
II coolants. If the test strip chart indicates that additive
is required, add John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant
Extender as directed.
If John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Premix, COOL-GARD II
PG Premix, or COOL-GARD II Concentrate is used, but
the coolant is not tested OR additives are not replenished
by adding John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender,
the drain interval is four years or 4000 hours of operation.
This drain interval only applies to COOL-GARD II coolants
that have been maintained within a 40—60% mixture of
concentrate with quality water.
If a coolant other than COOL-GARD II, or COOL-GARD
II PG is used, reduce the drain interval to two years or
2000 hours of operation.
COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
DX,COOL11 -19-14APR11-1/1
John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Coolant Extender
Some coolant additives gradually deplete during
engine operation. For COOL-GARD™ II pre-mix and
COOL-GARD II Concentrate, replenish coolant additives
between drain intervals by adding COOL-GARD II Coolant
Extender.
COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender should not be added
unless indicated by COOL-GARD II Test Strips. These
test strips provide a simple, effective method to check the
freeze point, additive levels, and pH of your engine coolant.
Test the coolant solution at intervals of 12 months and
whenever excessive coolant is lost through leaks or
overheating.
IMPORTANT: Do not use COOL-GARD II Test
Strips with COOL-GARD II PG.
COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender is not intended for use
with nitrite-containing coolants.
IMPORTANT: Do not add a supplemental coolant
additive when the cooling system is drained
and refilled with any of the following:
• John Deere COOL-GARD II
• John Deere COOL-GARD II PG
The use of non-recommended supplemental coolant
additives can result in additive drop-out, gelation of the
coolant, or corrosion of cooling system components.
Add the recommended concentration of COOL-GARD
II Coolant Extender. DO NOT add more than the
recommended amount.
COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender is a chemically matched
additive system for use with all COOL-GARD II coolants.
COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
DX,COOL16 -19-15MAY13-1/1
3-1-14
081214
PN=129
Maintenance—Machine
Supplemental Coolant Additives
Some coolant additives will gradually deplete during
engine operation. For nitrite-containing coolants,
replenish coolant additives between drain intervals by
adding a supplemental coolant additive as determined
necessary by coolant testing.
John Deere Liquid Coolant Conditioner is recommended
as a supplemental coolant additive for nitrite-containing
coolants.
John Deere Liquid Coolant Conditioner is not designed
for use with John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Premix,
COOL-GARD II PG Premix, or COOL-GARD II
Concentrate.
• John Deere COOL-GARD II
• John Deere COOL-GARD II PG
If other coolants are used, consult the coolant supplier
and follow the manufacturer's recommendation for use of
supplemental coolant additives.
The use of non-recommended supplemental coolant
additives may result in additive drop-out and gelation of
the coolant.
Add the manufacturer's recommended concentration of
supplemental coolant additive. DO NOT add more than
the recommended amount.
IMPORTANT: Do not add a supplemental coolant
additive when the cooling system is drained
and refilled with any of the following:
COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
DX,COOL4 -19-14APR11-1/1
Operating in Warm Temperature Climates
John Deere engines are designed to operate using
recommended engine coolants.
Always use a recommended engine coolant, even when
operating in geographical areas where freeze protection
is not required.
IMPORTANT: Water may be used as coolant in
emergency situations only.
Foaming, hot surface aluminum and iron
corrosion, scaling, and cavitation occur when
water is used as the coolant, even when
coolant conditioners are added.
Drain cooling system and refill with
recommended engine coolant as soon
as possible.
DX,COOL6 -19-15MAY13-1/1
3-1-15
081214
PN=130
Maintenance—Machine
Additional Information About Diesel Engine Coolants and John Deere COOL-GARD™
II Coolant Extender
Engine coolants are a combination of three chemical
components: ethylene glycol (EG) or propylene glycol
(PG) antifreeze, inhibiting coolant additives, and quality
water.
Coolant Specifications
John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Premix either EG or
PG, are fully formulated coolants that contain all three
components in their correct concentrations. DO NOT
add an initial charge of John Deere COOL-GARD II
Coolant Extender to COOL-GARD II Premix. DO NOT
add any other supplemental coolant additive or water to
COOL-GARD II Premix.
John Deere COOL-GARD II Concentrate contains both
ethylene glycol and inhibiting coolant additives. Mix this
product with quality water, but DO NOT add an initial
charge of John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender
or any other supplemental coolant additive.
Replenish Coolant Additives
Some coolant additives will gradually deplete during
engine operation. Periodic replenishment of inhibitors
is required, even when John Deere COOL-GARD II
Premix or COOL-GARD II Concentrate is used. Follow
the recommendations in this manual for the use of John
Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender.
Why use John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant
Extender?
Operating without proper coolant additives will result in
increased corrosion, cylinder liner erosion and pitting, and
other damage to the engine and cooling system. A simple
mixture of ethylene glycol or propylene glycol and water
will not give adequate protection.
John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender is a
chemically matched additive system designed to fortify the
proprietary additives used in John Deere COOL-GARD II
Premix and COOL-GARD II Concentrate and to provide
optimum protection for up to six years or 6000 hours of
operation.
Avoid Automotive-type Coolants
Never use automotive-type coolants (such as those
meeting ASTM D3306). These coolants do not contain the
correct additives to protect heavy-duty diesel engines. Do
not treat an automotive engine coolant with supplemental
coolant additives because the high concentration of
additives can result in additive fallout.
Water Quality
Water quality is important to the performance of the
cooling system. Distilled, deionized, or demineralized
water is recommended for mixing with ethylene glycol
and propylene glycol base engine coolant concentrate.All
water used in the cooling system should meet the
following minimum specifications for quality:
Chlorides
<40 mg/L
Sulfates
<100 mg/L
Total dissolved solids
<340 mg/L
Total hardness
<170 mg/L
pH
5.5 to 9.0
Freeze Protection
The relative concentrations of glycol and water in the
engine coolant determine its freeze protection limit.
Ethylene Glycol
Freeze Protection Limit
40%
-24°C (-12°F)
50%
-37°C (-34°F)
60%
-52°C (-62°F)
Propylene Glycol
Freeze Protection Limit
40%
-21°C (-6°F)
50%
-33°C (-27°F)
60%
-49°C (-56°F)
DO NOT use a coolant-water mixture greater than 60%
ethylene glycol or 60% propylene glycol.
COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
DX,COOL17 -19-20APR11-1/1
3-1-16
081214
PN=131
Maintenance—Machine
Testing Diesel Engine Coolant
Maintaining adequate concentrations of glycol and
inhibiting additives in the coolant is critical to protect the
engine and cooling system against freezing, corrosion,
and cylinder liner erosion and pitting.
Test the coolant solution at intervals of 12 months or less
and whenever excessive coolant is lost through leaks or
overheating.
Coolant Test Strips
Add only the recommended concentration of John Deere
COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender. DO NOT add more
than the recommended amount.
When Using Nitrite-Containing Coolants
Compare the test strip results to the supplemental coolant
additive (SCA) chart to determine the amount of inhibiting
additives in your coolant and whether more John Deere
Liquid Coolant Conditioner should be added.
Coolant test strips are available from your John Deere
dealer. These test strips provide a simple, effective
method to check the freeze point and additive levels of
your engine coolant.
Add only the recommended concentration of John Deere
Liquid Coolant Conditioner. DO NOT add more than the
recommended amount.
When Using John Deere COOL-GARD II
Coolant Analysis
John Deere COOL-GARD II Premix™ , COOL-GARD
II PG Premix and COOL-GARD II Concentrate are
maintenance free coolants for up to six years or 6000
hours of operation, provided that the cooling system is
topped off using only John Deere COOL-GARD II Premix
or COOL-GARD II PG premix. Test the coolant condition
annually with coolant test strips designed for use with
John Deere COOL-GARD II coolants. If the test strip
chart indicates that additive is required, add John Deere
COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender as directed.
For a more thorough evaluation of your coolant, perform a
coolant analysis. The coolant analysis can provide critical
data such as freezing point, antifreeze level, pH, alkalinity,
nitrite content (cavitation control additive), molybdate
content (rust inhibitor additive), silicate content, corrosion
metals, and visual assessment.
Contact your John Deere dealer for more information on
coolant analysis.
COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
DX,COOL9 -19-11APR11-1/1
Disposing of Coolant
Improperly disposing of engine coolant can threaten the
environment and ecology.
TS1133 —UN—15APR13
Use leakproof containers when draining fluids. Do not use
food or beverage containers that may mislead someone
into drinking from them.
Do not pour waste onto the ground, down a drain, or into
any water source.
Inquire on the proper way to recycle or dispose of waste
from your local environmental or recycling center, or from
your authorized John Deere dealer.
Recycle Waste
OUT4001,0000685 -19-09JUL10-1/1
3-1-17
081214
PN=132
Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance
Service Machine at Specified Intervals
TX1102188A —UN—28NOV11
Lubricate and make service checks and adjustments at
intervals shown on the periodic maintenance chart and on
the following pages.
The periodic maintenance chart is located on the inside of
the right service door.
Perform service on items at multiples of the original
requirement. For example, at 500 hours also service
those items (if applicable) listed under 250 hours, 100
hours, 50 hours, and 10 hours or daily.
Periodic Maintenance Chart
DB84312,0000043 -19-12JAN12-1/1
Check the Hour Meter Regularly
NOTE: Hour meter display is located in the upper
right corner of the monitor.
TX1086525A —UN—05JAN11
Hour meter (1) displays total machine operation hours.
Use the hour meter to determine when your machine
needs periodic maintenance.
Turn key to the ON position to view the default screen
and the hour meter.
Intervals on the periodic maintenance chart are for
operating in normal conditions. If operating the machine in
severe conditions, machine should be serviced at shorter
intervals.
Hour Meter
1— Hour Meter
ER79617,0000D92 -19-05JAN11-1/1
3-2-1
081214
PN=133
Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance
Prepare Machine for Maintenance
T6811AI —UN—18OCT88
Before performing maintenance procedures in the
following chapters and before leaving operator's seat,
park machine as described below unless another position
is specified in the procedure.
1. Park machine on a level surface as shown.
2. Lower equipment to the ground.
3. Turn auto-idle switch (1) to the A/I OFF position.
IMPORTANT: Turbocharger can be damaged
if procedure to shutdown engine is not
done properly.
Machine Position
4. Run engine with engine speed dial (2) at 1/3 position
without load for 2 minutes.
5. Turn engine speed dial to slow idle position.
6. Turn key switch (3) to the OFF position. Remove key
from switch.
7. Place pilot shutoff lever (4) to locked (UP) position.
TX1087012A —UN—18JAN11
3— Key Switch
4— Pilot Shutoff Lever
Switch Panel
TX1087013A —UN—18JAN11
1— Auto-Idle Switch
2— Engine Speed Dial
Pilot Shutoff Lever
ER79617,0000D96 -19-30APR12-1/1
3-2-2
081214
PN=134
Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance
Open Access Doors for Service
T214860A —UN—04OCT05
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from door
closing. Secure door in the OPEN position.
To hold door open, remove rod (1) from stored position (2)
and insert in tab (3).
1— Rod
2— Stored Position
3— Tab
Access Door Hold
VD76477,00001C1 -19-28MAR11-1/1
Open Engine Cover for Service
TX1086587A —UN—06JAN11
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from cover
closing. Unlock latch. Pull open latch to unlock
cover. Raise the cover until the end of the
bar is securely locked into catch.
1. Unlock latch (1).
2. Pull open latch to unlock cover.
3. Raise the cover until the end of the bar is securely
locked into catch (2).
2— Catch
Engine Lock (closed position shown)
TX1105218A —UN—10JAN12
1— Latch
Engine Cover Catch
DB84312,00000A0 -19-17MAY12-1/1
Fuel Tank
CAUTION: Fuel is flammable and may ignite if
spilled on hot engine. To prevent injury, handle
fuel carefully. If engine is hot or running, DO NOT
fill the fuel tank. DO NOT smoke while filling
fuel tank or working on fuel system.
IMPORTANT: Avoid engine damage. If machine has
run out of fuel, engine will not start. Contact
your authorized dealer for instructions.
To avoid condensation, fill the fuel tank at the end of each
work day. Shut off engine before filling.
160GLC and 180GLC—Specification
Fuel Tank—Capacity.................................................................... 320.0 L
84.5 gal.
DB84312,0000037 -19-29DEC11-1/1
3-2-3
081214
PN=135
Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance
Hydraulic Breaker and Crusher Attachments
Hydraulic breaker or crusher operation subjects the
machine’s hydraulic system to possible contamination
and accelerated deterioration. The hydraulic return
filter and hydraulic oil must be replaced more often to
prevent damage to hydraulic pumps and other hydraulic
components. Change the hydraulic return filter and oil at
the intervals recommended below based on the amount
of machine operating time the attachment is used.
IMPORTANT: Avoid mixing different brands or types
of oils. Oil manufacturers engineer their oils to
meet certain specifications and performance
requirements. Mixing different oil types can
degrade lubricant and machine performance.
This excavator is factory filled with Super EX
46HN extended life zinc-free hydraulic oil. Avoid
servicing this excavator with products that do
not meet this specification. If oils have been
mixed or if alternate service oils are desired,
the complete hydraulic system needs to be
totally flushed by an authorized dealer.
NOTE: John Deere recommends the addition of
the hydraulic filter restriction indicator kit
with the attachment.
Percentage of Operating Time
Hydraulic Return Filter
Hydraulic Oil
Breaker or Crusher Used
Change Interval (hours)
Change Interval (hours)
100
100
600
60
150
800
40
200
1000
20
300
1300
DW90712,000076A -19-11JUN07-1/1
Fluid Analysis Program Test Kits and the 3-Way Coolant
Test Kit are John Deere fluid sampling products to help you
monitor machine maintenance and system condition. The
objective of a fluid sampling program is to ensure machine
availability when you need it and to reduce repair costs by
identifying potential problems before they become critical.
Engine, hydraulic, power train, and coolant samples should
be taken from each system on a periodic basis, before
a filter or fluid change interval. Certain systems require
more frequent sampling. Consult your authorized John
Deere dealer on a maintenance program for your specific
application. Your authorized John Deere dealer has the
sampling products and expertise to assist you in lowering
your overall operating costs through fluid sampling.
TX1003513A —UN—20FEB06
Fluid Analysis Program Test Kits and 3-Way
Coolant Test Kit
TX,ANALYSIS -19-20JAN11-1/1
3-2-4
081214
PN=136
Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance
Service Intervals
Model: 160GLC and 180GLC
PIN/Serial Number:
Hour Meter Reading:
SERVICE INTERVALS
Service your machine at intervals shown on this chart. Also, perform service on items at multiples of the original requirement. For example, at 500
hours also service those items (if applicable) listed under 250 hours, 100 hours, 50 hours, and 10 hours or daily.
FLUID SAMPLING
Fluid samples should be taken from each system at its recommended change interval prior to actually draining the fluid. Regular oil sampling will
extend the operational life of your machine.
As Required
□ Remove and clean fuel tank inlet screen
□ Check and adjust track sag
□ Check windshield washer fluid level
□ Clean rear camera lens—if equipped
□ Check and clean air cleaner dust unloader valve
□ Add coolant extender as indicated by COOL-GARD™ II test strips
□ Service exhaust filter
Every 10 Hours or Daily
□ Check hydraulic tank oil level
□ Check engine oil level
□ Check engine coolant level
□ Lubricate hydraulic coupler—if equipped
Every 50 Hours or Weekly
□ Drain water and sediment from fuel tank sump
□ Drain primary fuel filter and water separator
□ Drain auxiliary fuel filter and water separator—if equipped
□ Drain final fuel filter
Every 100 Hours
□ Lubricate working tool pivots
□ Inspect and re-torque track hardware
Every 250 Hours
□ Check swing gear case oil level
□ Check travel gear case oil level
□ Check pump drive gear case oil level
□ Drain water and sediment from hydraulic tank
□ Check battery electrolyte level and terminals
□ Take engine oil sample
Every 500 Hours
□ Lubricate front end pin joints
□ Lubricate swing bearing
□ Lubricate swing bearing gear
□ Take diesel fuel sample
□ Drain and refill engine oil and replace filter
□ Take swing gear case oil sample
□ Replace primary fuel filter and water separator
□ Take hydraulic oil sample
□ Replace auxiliary fuel filter and water separator—if equipped
□ Take engine coolant sample
□ Replace final fuel filter
□ Take travel gear case oil sample
□ Check air intake hoses
□ Take pump drive gear case oil sample
□ Clean cab fresh air and cab recirculating air filters (replace every 6 cleanings)
Every 1000 Hours
□ Drain and refill swing gear case oil
□ Inspect serpentine belt
□ Replace hydraulic tank oil filter
□ Replace air cleaner elements
□ Replace pilot oil filter
□ Replace air cleaner dust unloader valve
□ Drain and refill pump drive gear case oil
□ Check coolant
□ Remove and clean open crankcase ventilation (OCV) hose
Every 2000 Hours
□ Check and adjust engine valve lash
□ Drain and refill travel gear case oil
□ Replace open crankcase ventilation (OCV) filter
Continued on next page
3-2-5
DB84312,000009E -19-26JUL13-1/2
081214
PN=137
Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance
Every 5000 Hours
□ Drain and refill hydraulic tank oil
□ Replace hydraulic tank vent cap filter
Every 6000 Hours
□ Drain, flush and refill engine cooling system
COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
DB84312,000009E -19-26JUL13-2/2
3-2-6
081214
PN=138
Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance
Required Parts
REQUIRED PARTS
Insure machine performance and availability; use only genuine John Deere parts. Verify part numbers are current and that any
associated parts are also on hand, i.e., filter O-rings.
Part Number
Description
Every 250
Hours
Every 500
Hours
Every 1000
Hours
Every 2000
Hours
Every 5000
Hours
Every 6000
Hours
Engine Oil Filter
RE539279
1
1
1
1
1
Primary Fuel Filter Element
RE541922
1
1
1
1
1
Final Fuel Filter Element
RE544394
1
1
1
1
1
Auxiliary Fuel Filter
Element—If Equipped
AT365870
1
1
1
1
1
FYA00033065
1
1
1
1
4630525
1
1
1
1
Primary Air Filter
AT332908
1
1
1
1
Secondary Air Filter
AT332909
1
1
1
1
Dust Unloader Valve
R48568
1
1
1
1
Hydraulic Tank Oil Filter
Pilot Oil Filter
Open Crankcase Ventilation
(OCV) Filter
RE540710
1
Engine Rocker Arm Gasket
R52449
1
Hydraulic Tank Vent Cap Filter
4437838
Diesel Particulate Filter
(component of exhaust filter)
As Required
Cab Fresh Air Filter
4S00686
As Required
Cab Recirculating Air Filter
4S00685
API GL-5 Gear Oil
Hitachi SUPER EX 46HN
Hydraulic Oil
COOL-GARD™ II Pre-Mix
Coolant Extender
TY26674
1
1
RE551147
Plus-50™ II Engine Oil
1
As Required
14.5 L
(3.8 gal.)
1
TY62961
15.4 L
(4.0 gal.)
15.4 L
(4.0 gal.)
15.4 L
(4.0 gal.)
15.4 L
(4.0 gal.)
6.2 L
(1.6 gal.)
19.8 L
(5.2 gal.)
6.2 L
(1.6 gal.)
19.8 L
(5.2 gal.)
125.0 L
(33.0 gal.)
2908-0501
23.5 L
(6.2 gal.)
TY26575
TY26603
As Required
Fluid Analysis Kits2
Diesel Engine Oil
AT346594
1
1
1
1
1
Hydraulic Oil
AT346594
1
1
1
1
1
1
Travel Gear Case Oil
AT346594
2
2
2
2
2
Swing Gear Case Oil
AT346594
1
1
1
1
1
Pump Drive Gear Case Oil
AT346594
1
1
1
1
1
Diesel Fuel
AT180344
1
1
1
1
1
Engine Coolant
TY26873
1
1
1
1
1
COOL-GARD™ II Test Strips
TY26605
1
1
1
1
1
For recommended oil viscosities based on operating temperatures, see Maintenance-Machine. (Section 3-1.)
2
Based on fluid analysis results, intervals may need to be adjusted for your operating conditions. Consult your local John Deere dealer.
Plus-50 is a trademark of Deere & Company
COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
DB84312,00000B9 -19-12AUG14-1/1
3-2-7
081214
PN=139
Maintenance—As Required
Remove and Clean Fuel Tank Inlet Screen
Clean fuel tank inlet screen (1) using solvent or diesel
fuel to remove any debris.
T135186 —UN—06NOV00
Replace screen if damaged.
1— Fuel Tank Inlet Screen
Fuel Tank Inlet Screen
ER79617,0000A84 -19-19MAR12-1/1
Check Windshield Washer Fluid Level
1. On left side of machine, open service door to access
windshield washer fluid bottle (1).
TX1101877A —UN—22NOV11
NOTE: During winter season, use all-season windshield
washer fluid which will not freeze.
2. Check fluid level in windshield washer fluid bottle and
refill as required.
1— Windshield Washer Fluid
Bottle
Windshield Washer Fluid Level
DB84312,000003A -19-22NOV11-1/1
Check and Clean Air Cleaner Dust Unloader
Valve
TX1101878A —UN—22NOV11
IMPORTANT: Avoid machine damage. A missing,
damaged, or hardened air cleaner dust unloader
valve (1) will make the dust cup precleaner
ineffective, causing very short element life. Valve
should suck closed above 1/3 engine speed.
NOTE: If operating in high dust conditions, squeeze dust
valve every 2 hours of operation to release dust.
1. On left side of machine, open service door to access
air cleaner dust unloader valve (1).
2. Squeeze air cleaner dust unloader valve to remove
dust from the air cleaner.
Air Cleaner Dust Unloader Valve
1— Air Cleaner Dust Unloader
Valve
3. Check condition of dust unloader valve. Replace if
hardened or damaged.
DB84312,000003B -19-23NOV11-1/1
3-3-1
081214
PN=140
Maintenance—As Required
Check and Adjust Track Sag
Check Track Sag
T121723 —UN—10JUN99
1. Swing upperstructure 90°, and lower bucket to raise
track off ground.
2. Keep the angle (1) between boom and arm 90—110°,
and position the bucket’s round side on the ground.
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from
unexpected machine movement. Place blocks
under machine frame to support machine
while measuring track sag.
Machine Position
3. Place blocks under machine frame to support machine.
TX1103806 —UN—16DEC11
4. Rotate track forward two full rotations and then in
reverse two full rotations.
5. Measure distance (2) at middle track roller from bottom
of track frame to top surface of track shoe.
Specification
Track—Sag.........................................................................285—320 mm
11.2—12.6 in.
1— Boom-To-Arm Angle
2— Distance
Track Sag Measurement
DB84312,00000A1 -19-18MAY12-1/2
Adjust Track Sag
T135187 —UN—06NOV00
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to track
components. DO NOT use the grease fitting on
the track adjusting cylinder for lubrication. Use
this fitting ONLY for track adjustment.
1. To tighten track, connect a grease gun to grease fitting
(1) (located through access hole (4) in track frame.)
Add grease until sag is within recommended limits.
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from high
pressure grease. DO NOT remove grease
fitting (1) from nut (2).
Grease Fitting
2. To loosen, slowly turn nut (2) counterclockwise; grease
will escape through the bleed hole (3).
T135188 —UN—06NOV00
3. When amount of track sag is satisfactory, turn nut
clockwise to tighten.
Specification
Nut—Torque..................................................................................90 N·m
66.4 lb.-ft.
1— Grease Fitting
2— Nut
3— Bleed Hole
4— Access Hole
Access Hole
DB84312,00000A1 -19-18MAY12-2/2
3-3-2
081214
PN=141
Maintenance—As Required
Clean Rear Camera Lens—If Equipped
TX1086324A —UN—28DEC10
Inspect camera lens (1) for any accumulation of dirt, mud,
snow, ice, or debris.
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury. DO NOT
climb on machine when inspecting or
cleaning rear camera lens.
NOTE: The camera lens surface is a resin product.
Lightly wipe the surface with a wet, clean cloth.
Never use an organic solvent.
Rear Camera
Clean lens as necessary.
1— Camera Lens
ER79617,0000D75 -19-01MAR11-1/1
3-3-3
081214
PN=142
Maintenance—As Required
Check Coolant
TS281 —UN—15APR13
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from hot
spraying fluids. Shut off engine. Remove filler
cap only when cool enough to touch with bare
hands. Slowly loosen cap to relieve pressure
before removing completely.
IMPORTANT: John Deere COOL-GARD™ II
Coolant Extender does not protect against
freezing. Coolant extender prevents rust,
scale, and liner cavitation.
Pressurized Fluids
NOTE: Check coolant every 1000 hours or 1 year,
or when replacing 1/3 or more of coolant. Add
coolant extender as indicated by John Deere
COOL-GARD™ II test strips.
1. Open engine cover. Remove surge tank cap (1) and
test coolant solution. Use the following kit to check
coolant:
• COOL-GARD II Test Strips
Coolant test strips provide an effective method to
check freeze point and additive levels of engine
coolant. See your authorized dealer for COOL-GARD
II test strips and follow instructions on kit.
TX1101879A —UN—22NOV11
Specification
Cooling System—Capacity.................................................................................................... 23.5 L
6.2 gal.
2. Add John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender
as necessary. Follow instructions on container for
amount.
3. Install surge tank cap.
Surge Tank
4. Close engine cover.
1— Surge Tank Cap
COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
DB84312,000003D -19-04JUN14-1/1
3-3-4
081214
PN=143
Maintenance—As Required
Service Exhaust Filter
The exhaust filter (1) is designed to retain residual ash,
which is a noncombustible result of additives used in
crankcase lubrication oils and the fuel. As ash levels
rise, the capacity for soot storage is reduced. Engine
performance can be reduced due to increased exhaust
system back pressure. The residual ash must be removed
from the filter. Ash removal is performed by removing
the exhaust filter from machine and having it cleaned by
specialized equipment or replacing the exhaust filter.
Do NOT attempt to remove exhaust filter from machine.
Contact your authorized dealer to remove exhaust
filter for ash removal or replacement.
TX1102580A —UN—02DEC11
CAUTION: Under federal, state, and/or local laws
or regulations, exhaust filter ash may be classified
as a hazardous waste. Hazardous waste must
be disposed of in accordance with all applicable
federal, state and local laws or regulations
governing hazardous waste disposal. Only a
qualified service provider should remove ash
from the exhaust filter. See your authorized dealer
for exhaust filter ash handling and disposal.
Exhaust Filter
1— Exhaust Filter
Failure to follow the approved ash removal methods may
violate U.S. federal, state and local hazardous waste
laws, along with damage to the exhaust filter resulting in
potential denial of the emissions warranty.
DB84312,0000056 -19-06DEC11-1/1
3-3-5
081214
PN=144
Maintenance—10 Hours or Daily
Check Engine Oil Level
IMPORTANT: Prevent engine damage. DO NOT run
engine when oil level is below the ADD mark.
The most accurate oil level reading is obtained when the
engine is cold before starting the engine for the day’s
operation.
1. Park machine on a level surface.
2. Shut off engine and allow oil to drain into oil pan for
10 minutes.
TX1102463A —UN—30NOV11
3. Open engine cover to access engine.
4. Make sure dipstick (1) is fully seated.
5. Remove dipstick to check oil level.
BEFORE THE ENGINE IS STARTED: The engine
is full when oil level is in the cross-hatch area (3). It
is acceptable to run the engine when the oil level is
above the ADD mark.
AFTER THE ENGINE HAS BEEN RUN: Allow the oil
to drain into the oil pan for 10 minutes before checking
the oil level. Ten minutes after shutdown the engine oil
level must be above the ADD mark.
Oil Dipstick and Filler Cap
6. If necessary, remove filler cap (2) to add oil.
ADD
T216546 —UN—29NOV05
3
IMPORTANT: If oil level is low, the engine can be
damaged. DO NOT operate the engine when
oil level is below the ADD mark.
FULL
7. If oil level is below ADD mark, add oil as necessary.
See Diesel Engine Oil—Interim Tier 4 and Stage III
B Engines. (Section 3-1.)
8. Install dipstick and close engine cover.
1— Dipstick
2— Filler Cap
Dipstick Cross-Hatch Area
3— Cross-Hatch Area
DB84312,000004C -19-04JUN14-1/1
3-4-1
081214
PN=145
Maintenance—10 Hours or Daily
Check Engine Coolant Level
IMPORTANT: Avoid machine damage. Mixing different
coolant types can degrade coolant and machine
performance. Avoid mixing different brands
or types of coolant. Coolant manufacturers
engineer their coolants to meet certain
specifications and performance requirements.
TS281 —UN—15APR13
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from hot
spraying fluids. Shut off engine. Remove filler
cap only when cool enough to touch with bare
hands. Slowly loosen cap to relieve pressure
before removing completely.
Pressurized Fluids
1. Open engine cover and check coolant level in surge
tank (1).
2. With engine cold, coolant level must be between MIN
COLD and MAX COLD marks on surge tank.
3. If coolant is below MIN COLD mark, add coolant to
surge tank. See Heavy Duty Diesel Engine Coolant.
(Section 3-1.)
TX1101880A —UN—22NOV11
4. If surge tank is empty, check for leaks in tank, hoses,
and radiator. Repair as required, then refill with
coolant.
5. Close engine cover.
1— Surge Tank
Surge Tank
DB84312,000003E -19-04JUN14-1/1
3-4-2
081214
PN=146
Maintenance—10 Hours or Daily
Machine Position
TS281 —UN—15APR13
T6811AI —UN—18OCT88
Check Hydraulic Tank Oil Level
Pressurized Fluids
IMPORTANT: Prevent damage to hydraulic system
components. DO NOT run engine without
oil in hydraulic tank.
Avoid machine damage. Mixing different oil
types can degrade lubricant and machine
performance. Oil manufacturers engineer
their oils to meet certain specifications and
performance requirements.
TX1101882A —UN—22NOV11
Avoid machine damage. This excavator is
factory filled with Super EX 46HN extended
life zinc-free hydraulic oil. Avoid servicing
this excavator with products that do not meet
this specification. If oils have been mixed
or if alternate service oils are desired, the
complete hydraulic system needs to be totally
flushed by an authorized dealer.
1. Park machine on a level surface, and position machine
with arm cylinder fully retracted and bucket cylinder
fully extended.
Hydraulic Oil Level Gauge
2. Stop engine.
3. On right side of machine, check hydraulic oil level
gauge (1) on hydraulic tank. Oil must be between
marks on window.
TX1101884A —UN—03JAN12
If necessary, add oil.
To add oil:
CAUTION: High pressure release of oil from
pressurized system can cause serious burns
or penetrating injury. Relieve pressure by
pushing pressure release button.
a. Push pressure release button (2).
Hydraulic Tank Cover
b. Remove cap screws (3).
1— Hydraulic Oil Level Gauge
2— Pressure Release Button
c. Remove hydraulic tank cover (4).
3— Cap Screw (6 used)
4— Hydraulic Tank Cover
d. Add oil.
e. Install cover and cap screws.
DB84312,000003C -19-21MAY12-1/1
3-4-3
081214
PN=147
Maintenance—10 Hours or Daily
Lubricate Hydraulic Coupler—If Equipped
NOTE: Cylinders that are supplied without grease zerks
DO NOT need to be lubricated.
TX1017854A —UN—22JAN07
To keep hydraulic coupler in proper working condition it
must be lubricated on a daily basis.
Most hydraulic couplers are supplied with a cylinder
grease zerk (1) located on the head end of the cylinder
or the cylinder barrel, a lock arm grease zerk (2), and a
grease zerk on each side of the hydraulic coupler for the
locking wedge.
Apply grease to fittings until it escapes from joints. See
Track Adjuster, Working Tool Pivot, Swing Bearing, and
Swing Bearing Gear Grease. (Section 3-1.)
Lubrication Points
1— Cylinder Grease Zerk
2— Lock Arm Grease Zerk
VD76477,0001376 -19-27MAY11-1/1
3-4-4
081214
PN=148
Maintenance—Every 50 Hours or Weekly
Drain Water and Sediment from Fuel Tank
Sump
1. Park machine on a level surface. Rotate
upperstructure 90° for easier access.
T6811AJ —UN—18OCT88
2. Stop engine.
3. Remove fuel tank fill cap.
4. Open right service door to access the drain valve (1)
for the fuel tank.
NOTE: Drain waste into a container. Dispose
of waste properly.
Machine Position
5. Open drain valve for several seconds to drain water
and sediment into a container. Dispose of waste
properly. Close drain valve.
TX1102194A —UN—28NOV11
6. Close service door and install fuel tank fill cap.
1— Drain Valve
Drain Valve
DB84312,0000044 -19-21MAY12-1/1
Drain Primary Fuel Filter and Water Separator
1. Open right service door to access primary fuel filter
and water separator (1).
NOTE: Drain waste into a container. Dispose
of waste properly.
2. Open drain valve (2) to extract water from fuel system.
Drain fluid until water and sediment is removed. Collect
waste in a container and dispose of waste properly.
3. Close drain valve.
2— Drain Valve
TX1102058A —UN—23NOV11
1— Primary Fuel Filter and
Water Separator
Primary Fuel Filter and Water Separator
DB84312,0000042 -19-28NOV11-1/1
3-5-1
081214
PN=149
Maintenance—Every 50 Hours or Weekly
Drain Final Fuel Filter
1. Open right service door to access final fuel filter (1).
NOTE: Drain waste into a container. Dispose
of waste properly.
2. Open drain valve (2) on bottom of filter to extract water
from fuel system. Drain fluid until water and sediment
is removed. Collect waste in a container and dispose
of waste properly.
3. Close drain valve.
2— Drain Valve
TX1102059A —UN—23NOV11
1— Final Fuel Filter
Final Fuel Filter
DB84312,0000040 -19-28NOV11-1/1
Drain Auxiliary Fuel Filter and Water
Separator—If Equipped
1. Open right service door to access auxiliary fuel filter
and water separator (1).
NOTE: Drain waste into a container. Dispose
of waste properly.
2. Open drain valve (3) on bottom of water separator
bowl (2) to extract water from fuel system. Drain until
water and sediment is removed. Collect waste in a
container and dispose of waste properly.
1— Auxiliary Fuel Filter and
Water Separator
2— Water Separator Bowl
TX1102060A —UN—23NOV11
3. Close drain valve.
3— Drain Valve
Auxiliary Fuel Filter
DB84312,0000041 -19-28NOV11-1/1
3-5-2
081214
PN=150
Maintenance—Every 100 Hours
Lubricate Working Tool Pivots
TX1000687 —UN—23NOV05
Lubricate working tool pivots (4 points) until grease
escapes from joints. Lubricate every 4 hours for first 20
hours. Lubricate every 10 hours during first 30—100
hours and when working in mud and water.
Four Points
VD76477,000036F -19-27MAY11-1/1
3-6-1
081214
PN=151
Maintenance—Every 100 Hours
Inspect and Re-Torque Track Hardware
T6352AH —UN—23FEB89
Each inspection and re-torquing should be documented
by completing a service report for each unit, placing a
copy of this report in the machine file, and forwarding a
copy to the manufacturer’s attention.
For shoes with missing or loose cap screws and nuts,
remove shoes and clean the mating surface of shoes
and links before replacing cap screws and nuts. The
cap screws must be replaced because they have been
stretched to yield previously.
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible machine damage.
Operating a machine with loose shoes can
cause the cap screws and holes in the shoes
and links to wear, making it difficult to keep
the shoes tight. Loose shoes can also cause
hardware malfunction and loss of shoes.
Improper track shoe cap screw torque will
result in serious damage to the undercarriage
components, shorter life expectancy, and
will void the manufacturer's warranty on the
undercarriage components.
Cap Screw Torque Sequence
3. Re-torque cap screws in sequence to specification.
Specification
Cap Screw—Final
Torque.........................................................................................804 N·m
593 lb.-ft.
Torquing Replacement Track Shoe Hardware
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible machine damage.
Clean shoe and link surfaces of dirt, paint,
and debris before installation.
Checking Track Shoe Hardware Torque
1. Tighten cap screws in sequence to specification.
Specification
Cap Screw—Torque....................................................................804 N·m
593 lb.-ft.
2. Cap screws that have turned have reduced tightness
and need to be re-torqued.
3. Check track shoe holes for wear or damage. Replace
as necessary.
Re-Torquing Track Shoe Hardware
1. Clean shoe and link surfaces of dirt or paint.
2. Tighten cap screws in sequence to specification.
Specification
Cap Screw—Initial
Torque.........................................................................................136 N·m
100 lb.-ft.
3. Torque cap screws in sequence to specification.
Specification
Cap Screw—Final
Torque.........................................................................................804 N·m
593 lb.-ft.
1. Loosen cap screw.
2. Tighten cap screws in sequence to specification.
Specification
Cap Screw—Initial
Torque.........................................................................................136 N·m
100 lb.-ft.
KR46761,00009A5 -19-29JUL13-1/1
3-6-2
081214
PN=152
Maintenance—Every 250 Hours
Check Swing Gear Case Oil Level
1. Park machine on a level surface.
TX1102184A —UN—28NOV11
2. Remove dipstick (1). Wipe dipstick clean and replace
completely into tube.
3. Remove dipstick. Oil must be in the dipstick
cross-hatch area (3).
4. If oil is needed, remove filler cap (2), and add oil.
5. Check oil level.
6. Replace filler cap.
Swing Gear Case
3— Dipstick Cross-Hatch Area
3
ADD
T216546 —UN—29NOV05
1— Dipstick
2— Filler Cap
FULL
Dipstick Cross-Hatch Area
DB84312,0000045 -19-04JUN14-1/1
3-7-1
081214
PN=153
Maintenance—Every 250 Hours
Drain Water and Sediment from Hydraulic
Tank
1. Park machine on a level surface.
TS281 —UN—15APR13
2. Stop engine.
CAUTION: High pressure release of oil from
pressurized system can cause serious burns
or penetrating injury. The hydraulic tank is
pressurized. Relieve pressure by pushing
pressure release button (1).
3. Push the pressure release button (1) to relieve
pressure.
Pressurized Fluids
4. Remove cap screws (3).
5. Remove hydraulic tank oil cover (2).
TX1102206A —UN—01DEC11
NOTE: Drain waste into a container. Dispose
of waste properly.
6. After oil is cool, loosen drain valve cap screw (4) for
several seconds to drain water and sediment into
a container. Do not remove cap screw completely.
Dispose of waste properly.
7. Check hydraulic oil level. See Check Hydraulic Tank
Oil Level. (Section 3-4.)
Hydraulic Tank Oil Cover
8. Tighten drain valve cap screw, and install hydraulic
tank oil cover and cap screws.
3— Cap Screw (4 used)
4— Drain Valve Cap Screw
TX1086692A —UN—07JAN11
1— Pressure Release Button
2— Hydraulic Tank Oil Cover
Drain Valve Cap Screw
DB84312,0000046 -19-21MAY12-1/1
3-7-2
081214
PN=154
Maintenance—Every 250 Hours
Check Pump Drive Gear Case Oil Level
1. Open right service door to access pump drive gear
case.
TX1103069A —UN—08DEC11
2. Remove dipstick (1).
3. Wipe dipstick clean and insert completely into tube.
4. Remove dipstick.
5. Oil level must be approximately halfway below the H
mark. Insert dipstick.
To add oil:
Pump Drive Gear Case
1. Remove filler plug (2).
2. Add oil.
3. Install filler plug.
2— Filler Plug
T145092 —UN—31AUG01
1— Dipstick
Pump Drive Gear Case Oil Level
DB84312,0000074 -19-21MAY12-1/1
3-7-3
081214
PN=155
Maintenance—Every 250 Hours
Check Battery Electrolyte Level and
Terminals
CAUTION: Battery gas can explode. Keep sparks
and flames away from batteries. Use a flashlight
to check battery electrolyte level.
NEVER check battery charge by placing
a metal object across the posts. Use a
voltmeter or hydrometer.
ALWAYS remove grounded (-) battery clamp
first and replace it last.
Sulfuric acid in battery electrolyte is
poisonous. It is strong enough to burn skin,
eat holes in clothing, and cause blindness
if splashed into eyes.
Avoid the hazard by:
TS203 —UN—23AUG88
1. Filling batteries in a well-ventilated area.
2. Wearing eye protection and rubber gloves.
3. Avoiding breathing fumes when
electrolyte is added.
4. Avoiding spilling or dripping electrolyte.
5. Use proper jump start procedure.
If you spill acid on yourself:
1. Flush your skin with water.
2. Apply baking soda or lime to help
neutralize the acid.
3. Flush your eyes with water for 15—30 minutes.
Get medical attention immediately.
If acid is swallowed:
Avoid Acid Burns
2. Drink large amounts of water or milk, but
do not exceed 1.9 L (2 quarts).
3. Get medical attention immediately.
1. Remove battery box cover.
1. Do not induce vomiting.
Continued on next page
3-7-4
TX14740,0001CBE -19-05MAR13-1/3
081214
PN=156
Maintenance—Every 250 Hours
IMPORTANT: If water is added to batteries during
freezing weather, batteries must be charged
after water is added to prevent batteries from
freezing. Charge battery using a battery
charger or by running the engine.
T137535 —UN—25JAN01
2. Fill each cell to within specified range with distilled
water. DO NOT overfill.
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury. ALWAYS
remove grounded (-) battery clamp first
and replace it last.
3. Disconnect battery clamps, grounded clamp first.
3— Electrolyte Level Range
T137536 —UN—25JAN01
1— Battery Post
2— Fill Tube
Battery Terminal and Fill Hole
Fill Level
TX14740,0001CBE -19-05MAR13-2/3
4. Clean battery terminals (1) and clamps with a stiff
brush.
5. Apply lubricating grease (2) around battery terminal
base only.
1— Battery Terminal
T137537 —UN—25JAN01
6. Install and tighten clamps, grounded clamp last.
2— Lubricating Grease
Terminal and Grease
TX14740,0001CBE -19-05MAR13-3/3
3-7-5
081214
PN=157
Maintenance—Every 250 Hours
Check Travel Gear Case Oil Level
1. Park the machine on level ground rotating travel gear
case until positioned as shown.
TX1000270 —UN—15NOV05
2. Stop engine.
CAUTION: High pressure release of oils from
pressurized system can cause serious burns.
Wait for travel gear case oil to cool. Keep body and
face away from check plug (2). Gradually loosen
check plug to release air to relieve pressure.
3. After travel gear case has cooled, slowly loosen check
plug (2) to release air to relieve pressure.
4. Remove check plug. Oil must be to bottom of hole.
5. If necessary, remove fill plug (1), and add oil until oil
flows out of oil level check plug hole.
6. Wrap threads of plugs with sealing-type tape. Install
plug. Tighten plugs to specification.
Travel Gear Case
1— Fill Plug
2— Check Plug
3— Drain Plug
7. Check second travel gear case oil level.
Specification
Plug—Torque.................................................................................50 N·m
36.9 lb.-ft.
DB84312,000007D -19-20MAR12-1/1
Take Engine Oil Sample
See your authorized dealer.
OUT4001,000039B -19-14MAR12-1/1
3-7-6
081214
PN=158
Maintenance—Every 500 Hours
Lubricate Front End Pin Joints
hours. Lubricate every 10 hours during first 30—100
hours and when working in mud and water.
T134954 —UN—01NOV00
T136448 —UN—18DEC00
Lubricate front end pin joints (20 points) until grease
escapes from joints. Lubricate every 4 hours for first 20
Nine Points
Five Points
T134957 —UN—01NOV00
T134956 —UN—01NOV00
Four Points
Two Points
VD76477,0000368 -19-27MAY11-1/1
3-8-1
081214
PN=159
Maintenance—Every 500 Hours
Lubricate Swing Bearing
T134968 —UN—01NOV00
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from
unexpected machine movement if controls are
moved by another person. Lubricating swing
bearing and rotating the upperstructure must be
done by one person. Before you lubricate swing
bearing, clear the area of all persons.
1. Park machine on a level surface.
2. Stop engine.
3. Lubricate swing bearing with 8 shots of grease at both
grease fittings.
4. Start engine. Raise bucket several inches off the
ground and turn upperstructure 45 degrees.
Swing Bearing
5. Repeat steps 2—4 three times.
NOTE: It is not necessary to start the engine the last time.
VD76477,0000396 -19-26MAR12-1/1
Lubricate Swing Bearing Gear
T136458 —UN—18DEC00
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from
unexpected machine movement if controls are
moved by another person. Lubricating swing
bearing gear and rotating the upperstructure
must be done by one person.
1. Remove swing bearing gear access cover (1).
2. Grease must be 13—25 mm (1/2—1 in.) deep
measured from the bottom of the ring gear. The grease
must also be free of contamination by dirt and water.
If the grease is contaminated, remove grease and
replace with clean grease.
IMPORTANT: If water or mud is found in swing
gear area, see Operating in Water and
Mud. (Section 2-3.)
Access Cover
1— Access Cover
4. Remove any excess grease from over the top of the
swing drive pinion.
3. Add grease as required (approximately 0.5 kg [1.1 lb.]
every 90°). See Maintenance—Machine. (Section
3-1.)
5. Install access cover.
IMPORTANT: Excessive grease can damage the
swing gear case seal.
ER79617,0000DE4 -19-11JUL13-1/1
3-8-2
081214
PN=160
Maintenance—Every 500 Hours
Replace Primary Fuel Filter and Water
Separator
1. Ensure key switch is in the OFF position.
2. Open right service door to access primary fuel filter
and water separator.
3. Thoroughly clean exterior of primary fuel filter and
water separator assembly and surrounding area.
TX1102554A —UN—02DEC11
CAUTION: Fuel in filter may be under high
pressure. Escaping fuel under pressure can
penetrate the skin and cause serious injury.
Relieve pressure before removing filter.
4. Disconnect the water-in-fuel (WIF) sensor wiring (2).
5. Loosen drain valve (1) to relieve pressure and drain
water and contaminates from water separator bowl (3)
into a suitable container. Dispose of waste properly.
Close drain valve.
6. Remove water separator bowl from filter element.
Clean and dry separator bowl.
7. Inspect bowl. Replace if necessary.
8. Remove filter element and seal from mounting base
and discard.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT prefill fuel filters. Debris
in unfiltered fuel will damage fuel system
components.
Primary Fuel Filter and Water Separator
1— Drain Valve
2— Water-in-Fuel (WIF) Sensor
Wiring
3— Water Separator Bowl
10. Install water separator bowl. Tighten 1/2 turn after seal
contacts mounting base.
11. Connect WIF sensor wiring.
Only lubricate filter seal with diesel fuel
before installing.
12. Prime fuel system and bleed air. See Bleed Fuel
System. (Section 4-1.)
9. Install new filter element.
DB84312,0000050 -19-06DEC11-1/1
3-8-3
081214
PN=161
Maintenance—Every 500 Hours
Replace Final Fuel Filter
NOTE: Do not clean fuel tank inlet screen and change
fuel filter at the same time. Clean fuel tank inlet
screen and run engine before changing fuel filter.
1. Ensure key switch is in the OFF position.
2. Open right service door to access final fuel filter (1).
TX1102450A —UN—30NOV11
3. Thoroughly clean exterior of final fuel filter and
surrounding area.
NOTE: Some fuel will be present in final fuel filter housing.
4. Remove final fuel filter using a filter wrench. Dispose
of used filter properly.
5. Clean filter mounting base (2).
IMPORTANT: DO NOT prefill fuel filters. Debris
in unfiltered fuel will damage fuel system
components.
Final Fuel Filter
1— Final Fuel Filter
2— Mounting Base
Only lubricate filter seal with diesel fuel
before installing.
6. Install new final fuel filter onto mounting base. Rotate
filter housing clockwise by hand. Tighten one turn
after seal contacts mounting base.
7. Prime fuel system and bleed air. See Bleed Fuel
System. (Section 4-1.)
DB84312,000004D -19-01DEC11-1/1
3-8-4
081214
PN=162
Maintenance—Every 500 Hours
Replace Auxiliary Fuel Filter and Water
Separator—If Equipped
1. Ensure key switch is in the OFF position.
2. Open right engine service door to access auxiliary fuel
filter and water separator (1).
3. Thoroughly clean exterior of auxiliary fuel filter and
water separator assembly and surrounding area.
TX1102060A —UN—23NOV11
CAUTION: Fuel in filter may be under high
pressure. Escaping fuel under pressure can
penetrate the skin and cause serious injury.
Relieve pressure before removing filter.
NOTE: Drain waste into a container. Dispose
of waste properly.
4. Loosen drain valve (3) to relieve pressure and drain
contaminates from water separator bowl (2). Dispose
of waste properly. Close drain valve.
5. Rotate auxiliary fuel filter counterclockwise and
remove from mounting base. Remove water separator
bowl from auxiliary fuel filter. Dispose of used fuel
filter properly.
Auxiliary Fuel Filter and Water Separator
1— Auxiliary Fuel Filter and
Water Separator
2— Water Separator Bowl
3— Drain Valve
6. Clean filter mounting base.
7. Clean and dry water separator bowl. Replace if
necessary.
8. Install water separator bowl to new auxiliary fuel filter.
9. Install new auxiliary fuel filter onto mounting base.
Rotate filter housing clockwise by hand. Tighten
1/2—3/4 turn after seal contacts mounting base.
10. Prime fuel system and bleed air. See Bleed Fuel
System. (Section 4-1.)
IMPORTANT: DO NOT prefill fuel filters. Debris
in unfiltered fuel will damage fuel system
components.
11. Operate engine and check for leaks.
Only lubricate filter seal with diesel fuel
before installing.
12. Tighten filter element and bowl only enough to stop
leaks.
DB84312,0000048 -19-13JAN12-1/1
Check Air Intake Hoses
1. Check air intake hoses (1) for cracks. Replace as
necessary.
TX1103075A —UN—08DEC11
2. Check for loose connections and tighten clamps as
necessary.
1— Air Intake Hose
Air Intake Hose
DB84312,0000075 -19-09DEC11-1/1
3-8-5
081214
PN=163
Maintenance—Every 500 Hours
Drain and Refill Engine Oil and Replace Filter
1. Run engine to warm oil.
2. Park machine on a level surface.
3. Stop engine.
4. Remove middle access cover under the machine.
Open drain valve on side of engine oil pan. Allow oil to
drain into a container. Dispose of waste oil properly.
5. Close drain valve and install access cover.
TX1102558A —UN—02DEC11
6. Turn engine oil filter (3) counterclockwise to remove.
Clean mounting surface on base.
7. Apply thin film of oil to rubber gasket of new filter.
8. Install new filter. Turn filter clockwise by hand until
gasket touches mounting surface.
9. Tighten filter 1/2—3/4 turn more.
10. Remove filler cap (2) and fill engine with oil. See
Diesel Engine Oil—Interim Tier 4 and Stage III B
Engines. (Section 3-1.)
Engine Oil Filter
160GLC and 180GLC—Specification
Engine Oil With
Filter—Capacity.............................................................................. 14.5 L
3.8 gal.
11. Install filler cap.
12. Start engine.
13. Stop engine, remove dipstick (1) and check oil level.
Engine is full when oil level is in the cross-hatch area.
1— Dipstick
2— Filler Cap
TX1102463A —UN—30NOV11
14. Check for any leakage at filter. Tighten filter just
enough to stop leakage.
3— Engine Oil Filter
Engine Oil Filler Cap and Dipstick
DB84312,0000051 -19-13JAN12-1/1
3-8-6
081214
PN=164
Maintenance—Every 500 Hours
Clean Cab Fresh Air and Cab Recirculating
Air Filters
TX1102304A —UN—29NOV11
NOTE: Replace filters after the sixth cleaning.
Removing Cab Fresh Air Filter:
1. Unlock cab side cover (1) on left side of machine with
key to access fresh air filter (2).
2. Squeeze tab on each side of the filter to remove.
Removing Cab Recirculating Air Filter:
1. Move operator's seat forward to access recirculating
air filter (3) located under the rear deck.
Cab Side Cover
2. Squeeze tab (4) on right side of filter to remove.
Cleaning Filters:
TX1102306A —UN—29NOV11
1. Clean filters in one of two ways:
CAUTION: Avoid injury from flying debris. Clear
area of bystanders and wear personal protection
equipment including eye protection. Reduce
compressed air to less than 196 kPa (1.96 bar)
(28.4 psi) when using for cleaning purposes.
• Use compressed air opposite to the normal air flow.
• Wash filters with water. Soak the filters in warm,
Cab Fresh Air Filter
soapy water for 5 minutes. Flush filter. Allow filter to
dry before installing.
1— Cab Side Cover
2— Fresh Air Filter
TX1013147A —UN—12OCT06
2. Install filter.
3— Recirculating Air Filter
4— Tab
Cab Recirculating Air Filter
DB84312,0000049 -19-26MAR12-1/1
Take Fluid Samples
See your authorized dealer for taking the following fluid
samples:
• Hydraulic Oil
• Coolant
• Diesel Fuel
• Swing Gear Case Oil
• Travel Gear Case Oil
• Pump Drive Gear Case Oil
ER79617,0000A8F -19-22MAR10-1/1
3-8-7
081214
PN=165
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours
Drain and Refill Swing Gear Case Oil
TX1102184A —UN—28NOV11
Specification
Swing Gear Case—Oil
Capacity........................................................................................... 6.2 L
1.6 gal.
1. To drain oil, remove drain plug through access hole
under machine. Dispose of waste properly.
2. Install plug.
3. Remove filler cap (2), and add oil. See Swing Gear
Case and Travel Gear Case Oils. (Section 3-1.)
Swing Gear Case Oil
4. Install filler cap.
5. Check oil level on dipstick (1).
1— Dipstick
2— Filler Cap
DB84312,000004A -19-29DEC11-1/1
3-9-1
081214
PN=166
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours
Replace Hydraulic Tank Oil Filter
1. Park machine on a level surface with arm cylinder fully
retracted and bucket cylinder fully extended.
T6811AI —UN—18OCT88
2. Stop engine.
CAUTION: High pressure release of oil from
pressurized system can cause serious burns
or penetrating injury. The hydraulic tank
is pressurized. DO NOT remove hydraulic
cap. Relieve pressure by pushing the
pressure release button (7).
3. To release pressure, push the pressure release button
(7).
Machine Position
4. Remove cap screws (8) and remove shield (9).
TX1102566A —UN—12JAN12
5. Hold down hydraulic oil filter cover (1) against light
spring load when removing the last two cap screws (2).
6. Remove spring (3), valve (5), and filter element (4).
7. Remove and discard filter element and O-ring (6).
NOTE: Remove element, and inspect for metal particles
and debris in bottom of filter canister. Excessive
amounts of brass and steel particles can indicate a
hydraulic pump, motor, or valve malfunction, or a
malfunction in process. A rubber type of material
can indicate cylinder packing problem.
Top of Hydraulic Tank
8. Install filter element, valve, and spring.
9. Install cover and tighten cap screws to specification.
Specification
Cap Screw—Torque......................................................................50 N·m
36.9 lb.-ft.
10. Install shield.
6— O-Ring
7— Pressure Release Button
8— Cap Screw (4 used)
9— Shield
TX1087387 —UN—27JAN11
1— Cover
2— Cap Screw (6 used)
3— Spring
4— Filter Element
5— Valve
Hydraulic Filter Element
DB84312,0000053 -19-04JUN14-1/1
3-9-2
081214
PN=167
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours
Replace Pilot Oil Filter
TX1102353A —UN—30NOV11
CAUTION: High pressure release of oil from
pressurized system can cause serious burns
or penetrating injury. The hydraulic tank is
pressurized. Relieve pressure by pushing
the pressure release button (5).
1. To relieve hydraulic pressure, push the pressure
release button (5).
2. Open right service door to access pilot oil filter (4).
3. Remove filter canister (1) from head cover by turning
counterclockwise.
Hydraulic Tank Cover
4. Clean head cover contact area.
5. Remove filter element (2) and O-ring (3).
TX1102568A —UN—02DEC11
6. Install new O-ring and filter element.
7. Install filter canister clockwise by hand. Check for any
leakage.
4— Pilot Oil Filter
5— Pressure Release Button
Pilot Oil Filter
T136461 —UN—19DEC00
1— Filter Canister
2— Filter Element
3— O-Ring
Filter Canister
DB84312,0000052 -19-06DEC11-1/1
3-9-3
081214
PN=168
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours
Drain and Refill Pump Drive Gear Case Oil
1. Open right service door to access pump drive gear
case.
TX1103136A —UN—08DEC11
2. Remove filler plug (2).
NOTE: Drain waste into a container. Dispose
of waste properly.
3. Remove drain plug (3). Allow oil to drain into a
container. Dispose of waste oil properly.
4. Apply liquid pipe thread sealant to drain plug. Install
plug.
Pump Drive Gear Case
Specification
Pump Drive Gear
Case—Oil Capacity.......................................................................... 0.9 L
1.0 qt
T145092 —UN—31AUG01
5. Add oil.
6. Remove dipstick (1), and check oil level. Oil level must
be approximately halfway below H mark.
7. Install filler plug.
8. Install dipstick.
9. Close right service door.
Pump Drive Gear Case Oil Level
1— Dipstick
2— Filler Plug
3— Drain Plug
DB84312,0000076 -19-04JUN14-1/1
Remove and Clean Open Crankcase
Ventilation (OCV) Hose
1. Open engine cover on top of machine.
IMPORTANT: Restrictions in the OCV hose can
cause sludge to form in crankcase. This
can lead to clogging of oil passages, filters,
and screens, resulting in serious engine
damage. Avoid engine damage by cleaning
the OCV hose at shorter intervals if operating
machine in dusty conditions.
3. Inspect OCV hose for dirt and debris.
4. Clean OCV hose with solvent and compressed air if
restricted.
TX1103138A —UN—08DEC11
2. Remove the open crankcase ventilation (OCV) hose
(1).
OCV Hose
1— Open Crankcase Ventilation
(OCV) Hose
5. Install OCV hose and close engine cover.
DB84312,0000077 -19-20MAR12-1/1
3-9-4
081214
PN=169
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours
Inspect Serpentine Belt
1. Check belt (1) regularly for wear, especially for cracks
at the bottom of grooves and for frayed edges.
2. If necessary, replace belt.
3. Install a 1/2 in. drive socket wrench to the belt tension
adjuster (2). Turn wrench to pull tension adjuster
pulley away from belt, releasing belt tension.
4. Hold tension adjuster away from belt while removing
old belt and installing new belt.
TX1105030 —UN—07JAN12
5. Slowly release wrench tension to allow tension
adjuster to move against new belt. Tension is
automatically adjusted.
6. Remove wrench.
1— Belt
2— Belt Tension Adjuster
3— Alternator
4— Crankshaft Pulley
5— Idler Pulley
Serpentine Belt
OUT4001,0000AE1 -19-06JAN12-1/1
3-9-5
081214
PN=170
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours
Replace Air Cleaner Elements
1. Open left service door to access the air cleaner.
TX1102260A —UN—29NOV11
2. Release latch (1) to unlock and remove cover.
3. Remove primary element (2).
4. Remove secondary element (3).
5. Clean the inside of the filter canister.
6. Install elements, making sure the secondary element
is centered in canister.
7. Replace cover and secure latch.
Air Cleaner Cover Latch
8. Close service door.
3— Secondary Element
TX1102257A —UN—29NOV11
1— Latch (3 used)
2— Primary Element
TX1102452A —UN—30NOV11
Primary Air Cleaner Element
Secondary Air Cleaner Element
DB84312,000004B -19-01DEC11-1/1
Replace Air Cleaner Dust Unloader Valve
TX1101878A —UN—22NOV11
NOTE: A missing, damaged, or hardened dust
unloader valve (1) will cause the air filter
elements to be ineffective.
1. Open left service door to access dust unloader valve
(1).
2. Twist and pull on dust unloader valve to remove dust
unloader valve from the air cleaner cover.
3. Install new dust unloader valve on air cleaner cover.
Dust Unloader Valve
1— Dust Unloader Valve
DB84312,000004E -19-29DEC11-1/1
3-9-6
081214
PN=171
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours
Check Coolant
See Check Coolant. (Section 3-3.)
OUT4001,0000365 -19-28JUL14-1/1
3-9-7
081214
PN=172
Maintenance—Every 2000 Hours
Check and Adjust Engine Valve Lash
See your authorized dealer for engine valve clearance
adjustment.
CED,OUO1032,2768 -19-06APR10-1/1
Drain and Refill Travel Gear Case Oil
1. Park the machine on level ground rotating travel gear
case until pictured as shown.
TX1000270 —UN—15NOV05
2. Stop engine.
CAUTION: High pressure release of oils from
pressurized system can cause serious burns.
Wait for travel gear case oil to cool. Keep body
and face away from check plug. Gradually
loosen check plug to release pressure.
3. After travel gear case has cooled, slowly loosen check
plug (2) to release pressure.
NOTE: Drain waste into a container. Dispose
of waste properly.
Travel Gear Case
1— Fill Plug
2— Check Plug
4. Remove drain plug (3). Allow oil to drain into a
container. Dispose of waste oil properly.
5. Wrap threads of drain plug with a sealing-type tape.
Install plug. Tighten plug to specification.
Specification
Plug—Torque.................................................................................50 N·m
36.9 lb.-ft.
6. Remove oil fill plug (1).
7. Add oil until oil flows out of oil level check plug hole.
3— Drain Plug
Specification
Travel Gear Case—Oil
Capacity (each)................................................................................ 6.8 L
1.7 gal.
8. Wrap threads of check plug, and fill plug with
sealing-type tape. Install plugs. Tighten plugs to
specification.
9. Change oil of second travel gear case.
DB84312,000004F -19-25MAY12-1/1
Replace Open Crankcase Ventilation (OCV)
Filter
1. Open engine cover on top of machine.
TX1104748A —UN—04JAN12
2. Remove open crankcase ventilation (OCV) filter cap
(1) by turning counterclockwise.
3. Remove OCV filter element.
4. Inspect filter housing for dirt and debris.
5. Install new OCV filter element.
6. Install OCV filter cap. Hand tighten only.
Open Crankcase Ventilation Filter
7. Close engine cover.
1— Open Crankcase Ventilation
(OCV) Filter Cap
DB84312,000008D -19-12JAN12-1/1
3-10-1
081214
PN=173
Maintenance—Every 5000 Hours
Drain and Refill Hydraulic Tank Oil
TS281 —UN—15APR13
NOTE: Change original factory fill hydraulic oil after first
5000 hours. Change every 5000 hours thereafter
if using Super EX 46HN, if using alternative oils
see Hydraulic Oil. (Section 3-1.)
NOTE: Perform this service at the 5000 hour interval when
operating in normal conditions. When operating with
an attachment, drain and refill as necessary.
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury from high
pressure fluid. High pressure release of oil
from pressurized system can cause serious
burns or penetrating injury. Relieve pressure
by pushing pressure release button (5).
Pressurized Fluids
T6811AJ —UN—18OCT88
IMPORTANT: Prevent damage to hydraulic
system components. DO NOT run engine
without oil in the tank.
Avoid mixing different brands or types of
oils. Oil manufacturers engineer their oils to
meet certain specifications and performance
requirements. Mixing different oil types can
degrade lubricant and machine performance.
This excavator is factory filled with Super EX
46HN extended life zinc-free hydraulic oil. Avoid
servicing this excavator with products that do
not meet this specification. If oils have been
mixed or if alternate service oils are desired,
the complete hydraulic system needs to be
totally flushed by an authorized dealer.
TX1102484A —UN—02DEC11
Machine Position
1. Park machine on level surface with upperstructure
rotated 90° for easier access.
2. Position machine with arm cylinder fully retracted and
bucket cylinder fully extended.
3. Stop engine.
Hydraulic Tank Oil Cover
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury from high
pressure fluid. High pressure release of oil
from pressurized system can cause serious
burns or penetrating injury. Relieve pressure
by pushing pressure release button.
5— Pressure Release Button
6— Cap Screw (6 used)
4. To relieve pressure, press the pressure release button
(5).
5. Remove cap screws (6).
7— Hydraulic Tank Oil Cover
With Suction Screen
Specification
Hydraulic Tank—Oil
Capacity....................................................................................... 125.0 L
33.0 gal.
6. Remove hydraulic tank oil cover with suction screen
(7).
Continued on next page
3-11-1
DB84312,0000054 -19-04JUN14-1/2
081214
PN=174
Maintenance—Every 5000 Hours
NOTE: Drain waste into a container. Dispose
of waste properly.
TX1086692A —UN—07JAN11
7. Remove drain valve cap screw (4). Allow oil to drain
into a container. Dispose of waste oil properly.
8. Clean inside of tank and suction screen.
NOTE: The hydraulic tank oil filter and pilot oil filter can
be changed at this point in the procedure. See
Maintenance-Every 1000 Hours. (Section 3-9.)
9. Install suction screen with cover. Suction screen must
seal against outlet pipe in bottom of tank. If necessary,
loosen nut (2) to adjust rod length.
Drain Valve Cap Screw
10. Replace cap screw.
IMPORTANT: If the hydraulic pump is not filled with
oil, it will be damaged when the engine is started.
Specification
Suction Screen Rod
(1)—Length................................................................................. 869 mm
34.2 in.
Suction Screen Rod
Nut—Torque..................................................................................17 N·m
150 lb.-in.
Hydraulic Cover Cap
Screw—Torque..............................................................................50 N·m
36.9 lb.-ft
T135193 —UN—06NOV00
11. Add oil until it is between marks on sight glass.
Suction Screen
TX1103140A —UN—08DEC11
12. Remove air bleed plugs (3) from hydraulic pump until
oil flows from bleed holes.
13. Install air bleed plugs in hydraulic pump.
14. Check oil level in sight glass. Add oil if necessary.
Install and tighten tank cover.
15. Purge air from cylinders and swing motor by slowly
cycling hydraulic functions.
1— Suction Screen Rod
2— Suction Screen Rod Nut
3— Bleed Plug (2 used)
4— Drain Valve Cap Screw
Bleed Plugs
DB84312,0000054 -19-04JUN14-2/2
3-11-2
081214
PN=175
Maintenance—Every 5000 Hours
TS281 —UN—15APR13
T6811AI —UN—18OCT88
Replace Hydraulic Tank Vent Cap Filter
Pressurized Fluids
Machine Position
1. Park and position machine on solid level surface as
shown. Stop engine.
TX1102488A —UN—03JAN12
CAUTION: High pressure release of oil from
pressurized system can cause serious burns
or penetrating injury. Relieve by pushing
pressure release button.
To prevent possible burn injury from hot
hydraulic oil, wait for hydraulic oil to cool
before starting work.
2. Push the pressure release button (1) on top of the
hydraulic tank oil cover (5).
Hydraulic Tank Oil Cover
3. Turn hydraulic tank vent cap filter cover (2) clockwise
about a 1/4 turn. Turn rubber cap over pressure
release button counterclockwise to remove.
4. Turn hydraulic tank vent cap filter cover
counterclockwise to remove.
5. Remove vent cap filter (3). Install new filter.
IMPORTANT: Do not allow water or contaminants
between cover and body (4).
6. Install filter cover until it comes in contact with the filter
element. Then, further tighten the cover 1/4 turn.
1— Pressure Release Button
2— Hydraulic Tank Vent Cap
Filter Cover
3— Vent Cap Filter
TX1001448 —UN—16DEC05
7. Tighten rubber cap clockwise by hand. While holding
rubber cap, securely tighten filter cover by rotating
counterclockwise 5—10° by hand.
4— Body
5— Hydraulic Tank Oil Cover
Hydraulic Tank Oil Vent Cap
DB84312,0000055 -19-04JUN14-1/1
3-11-3
081214
PN=176
Maintenance—Every 6000 Hours
Drain Cooling System
TS281 —UN—15APR13
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from hot
spraying fluids. Shut off engine. Remove filler
cap only when cool enough to touch with bare
hands. Slowly loosen cap to relieve pressure
before removing completely.
1. Check coolant hoses for cracks and leaks. Replace if
necessary.
2. Tighten clamps.
3. Check radiator, charge air, and oil cooler for dirt,
grease, leaks, and loose or broken mountings. Clean
radiator, charge air, and oil cooler fins.
Pressurized Fluids
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from hot
spraying fluids. Shut off engine. Remove filler
cap only when cool enough to touch with bare
hands. Slowly loosen cap to relieve pressure
before removing completely.
4. Remove surge tank cap (1) to relieve pressure.
TX1101879A —UN—22NOV11
Specification
Cooling System—Capacity.................................................................................................... 23.5 L
6.2 gal.
5. Remove cover from underside of machine to access
radiator drain valve (2).
NOTE: Drain waste into a container. Dispose
of waste properly.
6. Turn radiator drain valve counterclockwise to open.
Allow coolant to drain into a container. Dispose of
waste coolant properly.
Surge Tank Cap
7. Close radiator drain valve and replace cover.
1— Surge Tank Cap
TX1103142A —UN—08DEC11
8. Install surge tank cap.
2— Radiator Drain Valve
Radiator Drain Valve
DB84312,0000078 -19-04JUN14-1/1
3-12-1
081214
PN=177
Maintenance—Every 6000 Hours
Cooling System Fill and Deaeration Procedure
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from hot
spraying fluids. Shut off engine. Remove filler
cap only when cool enough to touch with bare
hands. Slowly loosen cap to relieve pressure
before removing completely.
TS281 —UN—15APR13
IMPORTANT: Avoid mixing different brands or types
of coolant. Coolant manufacturers engineer
their coolants to meet certain specifications
and performance requirements. Mixing
different coolant types can degrade coolant
and machine performance.
Use only permanent-type low silicate ethylene
glycol base antifreeze in coolant solution. Other
types of antifreeze may damage cylinder seals.
Pressurized Fluids
John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Pre-Mix
coolant is recommended when adding new
coolant to cooling system.
Follow directions on container for correct
mixture ratio.
FREEZING TEMPERATURES: Fill with permanent-type,
low silicate, ethylene glycol antifreeze (without stop-leak
additive) and clean, soft water.
TX1101879A —UN—22NOV11
Fill
Remove surge tank cap (1) to relieve pressure. Fill surge
tank to above the full hot mark. Replace surge tank cap.
Deaeration
The cooling system requires several warmup and cool
down cycles to deaerate. It will NOT deaerate during
normal operation. Only during warmup and cool down
cycles will the system deaerate.
1. Start engine. Run engine until coolant reaches a warm
temperature.
Surge Tank Cap
1— Surge Tank Cap
2. Stop engine. Allow coolant to cool.
5. If necessary, fill surge tank to above the MIN COLD
mark.
3. Check coolant level at surge tank.
4. Repeat steps 1—3 until surge tank coolant level is
repeatedly at the same level (stabilized).
NOTE: The level of the coolant in the cooling system
MUST BE repeatedly checked after all drain and
refill procedures to insure that all air is out of the
system which allows the coolant level to stabilize.
Check coolant level only when the engine is cold.
Specification
Cooling System—Capacity.................................................................................................... 23.5 L
6.2 gal.
COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
DB84312,0000079 -19-11MAR14-1/1
3-12-2
081214
PN=178
Miscellaneous—Machine
Bleed Fuel System
IMPORTANT: DO NOT prefill fuel filters. Debris
in unfiltered fuel will damage fuel system
components.
1. Turn key to the ON position to energize ignition system
and fuel pump. Let pump run for 60 seconds to prime
fuel system.
NOTE: This procedure should be performed after each fuel
filter change or when the engine has run out of fuel.
2. After 60 seconds, turn key to the OFF position.
Air can enter fuel system when changing fuel filters or
when machine has run out of fuel. Air in the fuel system
can prevent the engine from starting or cause rough idle.
This machine is equipped with an electric priming pump.
Prime fuel system and bleed air as follows:
4. Run engine for 5 minutes at slow idle.
3. Turn key back to the ON position.
ER79617,0000DF9 -19-28APR14-1/1
Clean Radiator, Oil Cooler, Charge Air
Cooler, and Fuel Cooler
TX1105217A —UN—10JAN12
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from rotating
fan and flying debris. Shut off engine before
opening cover. Avoid rotating fan and fan blast.
1. Turn machine off.
2. Open the engine cover until the end of the bar is
securely locked into catch (1).
3. Attach an air wand to an air compressor, and blow dirt
and debris back through cooling system.
Engine Cover Catch
4. Close engine cover.
5. Open left service door to access coolers.
TX1103290A —UN—12DEC11
6. Use compressed air to clean out the heat exchanger
(5).
7. Close left service door.
1— Catch
2— Fuel Cooler
3— Air Conditioner Condenser
4— Charge Air Cooler
5— Radiator
6— Hydraulic Oil Cooler
Coolers
Continued on next page
4-1-1
DB84312,000007E -19-12JAN12-1/2
081214
PN=179
Miscellaneous—Machine
If machine is equipped with a hydraulic reverse fan
function, use the reversing fan switch to clean the cooling
system. The reversing fan switch is located on the left
console.
TX1000844A —UN—29NOV05
NOTE: The reversing fan function shall not be
reactivated within 1 minute of its last completion
(this time includes AUTO cycle).
The reversing fan switch has three positions:
• AUTO: Every 60 minutes the radiator cooling fan will
•
•
automatically reverse direction for 30 seconds without
intervention from the operator.
OFF: Fan resumes normal operation.
MANUAL: When pressed and held for 3 seconds, the
fan will reverse direction for 30 seconds when right
portion of switch is pressed.
Reversing Fan Switch—If Equipped
DB84312,000007E -19-12JAN12-2/2
Do Not Service or Adjust Injection Nozzles
or High-Pressure Fuel Pump
If injection nozzles are not working correctly or are dirty,
the engine will not run normally. (See your authorized
dealer for service.)
Changing the high-pressure fuel pump in any way not
approved by the manufacturer will end the warranty. (See
your copy of the John Deere warranty on this machine.)
Do not service a high pressure fuel pump that is not
operating correctly. See your authorized dealer.
VD76477,0000366 -19-11AUG14-1/1
Do Not Service Control Valves, Cylinders,
Pumps, or Motors
If these parts need service, see your authorized John
Deere dealer.
Special tools and information are needed to service
control valves, cylinders, pumps, or motors.
TX,90,DH2537 -19-20JUL12-1/1
Precautions for Alternator and Regulator
When batteries are connected, follow these rules:
1. Disconnect negative (-) battery cable when you work
on or near alternator or regulator.
5. Do not disconnect or connect any alternator or
regulator wires while batteries are connected or while
alternator is operating.
6. Connect batteries or a booster battery in the correct
polarity (positive [+] to positive [+] and negative [-] to
negative [-]).
2. DO NOT TRY TO POLARIZE ALTERNATOR OR
REGULATOR.
3. Be sure alternator wires are correctly connected
BEFORE you connect batteries.
7. Do not disconnect the batteries when engine is
running and alternator is charging.
4. Do not ground alternator output terminal.
8. Disconnect battery cables before you connect battery
charger to the batteries. If machine has more than one
battery, each battery must be charged separately.
CED,OUO1021,185 -19-05NOV08-1/1
4-1-2
081214
PN=180
Miscellaneous—Machine
Handling, Checking, and Servicing Batteries
Carefully
TS204 —UN—15APR13
CAUTION: Battery gas can explode. Keep sparks
and flames away from batteries. Use a flashlight
to check battery electrolyte level.
Never check battery charge by placing
a metal object across the posts. Use a
voltmeter or hydrometer.
Always remove grounded negative (-) battery
clamp first, and replace it last.
Exploding Battery Gas
Sulfuric acid in battery electrolyte is
poisonous. It is strong enough to burn skin,
eat holes in clothing, and cause blindness
if splashed into eyes.
Avoid the hazard by:
1. Filling batteries in a well-ventilated area.
2. Wearing eye protection and rubber gloves.
3. Avoiding breathing fumes when
electrolyte is added.
4. Avoiding spilling or dripping electrolyte.
5. Use proper jump start procedure.
If you spill acid on yourself:
1. Flush contacted skin with water.
2. Apply baking soda or lime to contacted
area to help neutralize the acid.
3. Flush eyes with water for 15—30 minutes.
Get medical attention immediately.
If acid is swallowed:
TS203 —UN—23AUG88
1. Do not induce vomiting.
2. Drink large amounts of water or milk, but
do not exceed 1.9 L (2 qt.).
3. Get medical attention immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
If electrolyte spills on the floor, use one of the following
mixtures to neutralize the acid: 0.5 kg (1 lb.) baking soda
in 4 L (1 gal.) water, or 0.47 L (1 pt.) household ammonia
in 4 L (1 gal.) water.
Battery Electrolyte
IMPORTANT: Do not overfill the battery cells.
Check the specific gravity of electrolyte in each battery cell.
Continued on next page
4-1-3
DB84312,00000C3 -19-11MAR13-1/2
081214
PN=181
Miscellaneous—Machine
See your authorized dealer for JT05460
SERVICEGARD™ battery and coolant tester. Follow
directions included with the tester.
T85402 —UN—10NOV88
A fully charged battery will have a corrected specific
gravity reading of 1.260. If the reading is below 1.200,
charge the battery.
Battery and Coolant Tester
SERVICEGARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
DB84312,00000C3 -19-11MAR13-2/2
Using Battery Charger
TS204 —UN—15APR13
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from exploding
battery. Do not charge a battery if the battery
is frozen or it may explode. Warm battery to
16°C (60°F) before charging.
Turn off charger before connecting or
disconnecting it.
IMPORTANT: Do not use battery charger as a
booster if a battery has a 1.150 specific
gravity reading or lower.
Disconnect battery ground (-) clamp before
you charge batteries in the machine to prevent
damage to electrical components.
Prevent Battery Explosions
A battery charger may be used as a booster to start engine.
Ventilate the area where batteries are being charged.
N36890 —UN—07OCT88
Stop or cut back charging rate if battery case feels hot,
or is venting electrolyte. Battery temperature must not
exceed 52°C (125°F).
Charger
OUT4001,0000239 -19-03JAN12-1/1
4-1-4
081214
PN=182
Miscellaneous—Machine
Using Booster Batteries—24-Volt System
T7233JN —UN—21MAY90
Before boost starting, machine must be properly shutdown
to prevent unexpected machine movement when engine
starts.
CAUTION: An explosive gas is produced while
batteries are in use or being charged. Keep flames
or sparks away from the battery area. Make sure
the batteries are charged in a well-ventilated area.
IMPORTANT: The machine electrical system is a
24-volt negative (-) ground. Connect two 12-volt
booster batteries together as shown for 24-volts.
1. Connect one end of the positive cable to the positive
terminal of the machine batteries (A) and the other end
to the positive terminal of the booster batteries (B).
2. Connect one end of the negative cable to the negative
terminal of the booster batteries. Connect the other
end of the negative cable to the machine frame as far
away from the machine batteries as possible.
Booster Batteries, 2-Battery Application
A—Machine Battery (2 used)
B—Booster Battery (2 used)
disconnect the other end of the negative cable from
the negative terminal of the booster batteries.
5. Disconnect positive cable from booster batteries and
machine batteries.
3. Start engine.
4. Immediately after starting engine disconnect the end
of the negative cable from the machine frame. Then
OUT4001,0000238 -19-11AUG14-1/1
Replacing Batteries
TX1103240A —UN—09DEC11
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury from battery acid.
Sulfuric acid in battery electrolyte is poisonous. It
is strong enough to burn skin, eat holes in clothing
and cause blindness if splashed into eyes.
NOTE: Reserve capacity is the time in minutes it
takes a fully charged battery at 26.6°C (80°F)
to drop below 10 volts.
Your machine has two 12-volt batteries (1) with negative
(-) ground connected in series to provide 24-volts.
Use only batteries which meet the following specifications.
Batteries
Specification
Battery—Cold Cranking
Amps At -18°C (0°F) per
Battery.............................................................................................. 1400
Battery—Minutes
Reserve Capacity At 25
Amps per Battery................................................................................ 440
If one battery in a 24-volt system has failed but the other is
still good, replace the failed battery with one of the same
1— Battery (2 used)
type. For example, replace a failed maintenance-free
battery with a new maintenance-free battery. Different
types of batteries may have different rates of charge. This
difference could overload one of the batteries and cause it
to fail.
DB84312,000007A -19-12DEC11-1/1
4-1-5
081214
PN=183
Miscellaneous—Machine
Fluid Sampling Test Ports—If Equipped
Engine Oil Test Port
TX1103244A —UN—09DEC11
On right side of machine, open engine service door to
access the engine oil test port (1).
1— Engine Oil Test Port
Engine Oil Test Port
DB84312,000007B -19-12DEC11-1/2
Hydraulic Oil Test Port
On right side of machine, open engine service door to
access the hydraulic oil test port (1).
TX1103242A —UN—09DEC11
2— Hydraulic Oil Test Port
Hydraulic Oil Test Port
DB84312,000007B -19-12DEC11-2/2
Welding On Machine
weld area so electrical current does not
pass through any bearings.
IMPORTANT: Disconnect both negative and
positive battery cables and microprocessor
unit (if applicable).
Remove or protect all parts that can be
damaged by heat or weld splatter.
Have only a qualified welder do this job.
Connect welder ground clamp close to each
TX,WOM -19-20JAN11-1/1
4-1-6
081214
PN=184
Miscellaneous—Machine
Clean the Machine Regularly
T6642EJ —UN—18OCT88
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury from flying
debris. Be careful when removing any grease,
oil, fuel, or debris build-up.
IMPORTANT: Directing pressurized water at
electronic/electrical components or connectors,
bearings and hydraulic seals, fuel injection
pumps or other sensitive parts and components
may cause product malfunctions. Reduce
pressure and spray at a 45—90° angle.
High pressure washing (greater than 1379 kPa (13.8
bar) (200 psi) can damage freshly painted finishes. Paint
should be allowed to air dry for 30 days minimum after
receipt of machine before cleaning with high pressure. Use
low pressure wash operations until 30 days have elapsed.
Clean Machine Regularly
Do not spray heat exchangers at an angle.
ER79617,0000D50 -19-24APR14-1/1
Adding 12—Volt Accessories
IMPORTANT: This machine has a 24-volt electrical
system. Installing 12-volt accessories without
addition of 24-volt to 12-volt converter
may cause battery failure.
and manufacturer’s recommendations to determine the
capacity of the converter required and its installation
requirements. If standard equipment, verify if amperage
is adequate for application.
This machine is equipped with a 12-volt,
5-amp outlet.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT connect an accessory to one
battery. Connecting a 12-volt accessory to one
battery will cause one battery to overcharge,
and the other battery to undercharge,
causing battery failure.
When possible, use 24-volt accessories. If 12-volt
accessories are added, use a 24-volt to 12-volt converter.
Converters are available from your John Deere dealer.
Converter capacity requirements depend on the load
of the accessories installed. Follow electronic dealer
TX,90,DH3734 -19-29MAY14-1/1
JDLink™ Machine Monitoring System
(MMS)—If Equipped
and forestry equipment is being used, as well as critical
machine health data and service status.
JDLink™ is an equipment monitoring and information
delivery system. JDLink™ automatically collects and
manages information about where and how construction
For more information, see your authorized dealer or visit
www.deere.com (browse to Construction, Services and
Support, JDLink™).
JDLink is a trademark of Deere & Company
VD76477,0001541 -19-20JUL12-1/1
4-1-7
081214
PN=185
Miscellaneous—Machine
Replacing Fuses
The fuse box is located inside the cab underneath the left
rear panel labeled FUSE.
IMPORTANT: Install fuse with correct amperage
rating to prevent electrical system damage
from overload.
Remove cover.
Amperage Rating
Color
1
Black
3
Violet
4
Pink
5
Tan
7-1/2
Brown
10
Red
15
Light Blue
20
Yellow
25
Natural (white)
30
Light Green
Fuse Color Codes
F10
F20
F30
F40
F9
F19
F29
F39
F8
F18
F28
F38
F7
F17
F27
F37
F6
F16
F26
F36
F5
F15
F25
F35
F4
F14
F24
F34
F3
F13
F23
F33
F2
F12
F22
F32
F1
F11
F21
F31
TX1157166
TX1157166 —UN—03APR14
Early Production (S.N. —XXXXXX)
Fuse Blocks
F1 — LAMP 20 Amp fuse
F2 — WIPER 10 Amp fuse
F3 — HEATER 20 Amp fuse
F4 — SOLENOID 20 Amp fuse
F5 — OPT. 1 (ALT) 5 Amp fuse
F6 — OPT. 2 (ALT) 20 Amp fuse
F7 — START 5 Amp fuse
F8 — ECU 30 Amp fuse
F9 — BACK UP 10 Amp fuse
F10 — CONTROLLER 5 Amp fuse
F11 — NOT USED
F12 — RADIO 5 Amp fuse
F13 — LIGHTER 10 Amp fuse
F14 — MONITOR 5 Amp fuse
F15 — AUX 10 Amp fuse
F16 — START AID 20 Amp fuse
F17 — POWER ON 5 Amp fuse
F18 — IDLE STOP 5 Amp fuse
F19 — HORN 10 Amp fuse
F20 — OPT.3 (BAT) 5 Amp fuse
F21 — SEAT HEATER 10 Amp fuse
F22 — CAB LAMP FRONT 10 Amp fuse
Continued on next page
4-1-8
DB84312,00000D4 -19-22MAY14-1/4
081214
PN=186
Miscellaneous—Machine
F23
F24
F25
F26
F27
F28
F29
F30
F31
— CAB LAMP REAR 10 Amp fuse
— 12V UNIT 10 Amp fuse
— IMOBI 5 Amp fuse
— QUICK HITCH 5 Amp fuse
— AUX 3 5 Amp fuse
— NOT USED
— NOT USED
— NOT USED
— SEAT COMPR 10 Amp fuse
F32 — CAB LAMP FRONT +2 10 Amp fuse
F33 — WARNING LAMP 10 Amp fuse
F34 — AUX 2 10 Amp fuse
F35 — NOT USED
F36 — NOT USED
F37 — NOT USED
F38 — NOT USED
F39 — NOT USED
F40 — NOT USED
Continued on next page
4-1-9
DB84312,00000D4 -19-22MAY14-2/4
081214
PN=187
Miscellaneous—Machine
F10
F20
F30
F40
F9
F19
F29
F39
F8
F18
F28
F38
F7
F17
F27
F37
F6
F16
F26
F36
F5
F15
F25
F35
F4
F14
F24
F34
F3
F13
F23
F33
F2
F12
F22
F32
F1
F11
F21
F31
TX1157166
TX1157166 —UN—03APR14
Late Production (S.N. XXXXXX— )
Fuse Blocks
F1 — LAMP 20 Amp Fuse
F2 — WIPER 10 Amp Fuse
F3 — HEATER 20 Amp Fuse
F4 — SOLENOID 20 Amp Fuse
F5 — OPT. 1 (ALT) 20 Amp Fuse
F6 — OPT. 2 (ALT) 20 Amp Fuse
F7 — START 5 Amp Fuse
F8 — ECU P1 20 Amp Fuse
F9 — BACK UP 10 Amp Fuse
F10 — CONTROLLER 5 Amp Fuse
F11 — TRAVEL ALARM 5 Amp Fuse
F12 — RADIO 5 Amp Fuse
F13 — LIGHTER 10 Amp Fuse
F14 — MONITOR 5 Amp Fuse
F15 — AUX 10 Amp Fuse
F16 — 12V UNIT 10 Amp Fuse
F17 — POWER ON 5 Amp Fuse
F18 — IDLE STOP 5 Amp Fuse
F19 — HORN 10 Amp Fuse
F20 — OPT.3 (BAT) 5 Amp Fuse
F21 — SEAT HEATER 10 Amp Fuse
F22 — CAB LAMP FRONT 10 Amp Fuse
F23 — CAB LAMP REAR 10 Amp Fuse
F24 — IMOBI 5 Amp Fuse
F25 — QUICK HITCH 5 Amp Fuse
F26 — AUX 3 5 Amp Fuse
F27 — NOT USED
F28 — NOT USED
F29 — NOT USED
F30 — NOT USED
F31 — SEAT COMPR 10 Amp Fuse
F32 — CAB LAMP FRONT +2 10 Amp Fuse
F33 — WARNING LAMP 10 Amp Fuse
F34 — AUX 2 10 Amp Fuse
F35 — DIAG 5 Amp Fuse
F36 — ECU P2 20 Amp Fuse
F37 — ECU P3 20 Amp Fuse
F38 — ECU P4 20 Amp Fuse
F39 — NOT USED
F40 — NOT USED
Continued on next page
4-1-10
DB84312,00000D4 -19-22MAY14-3/4
081214
PN=188
Miscellaneous—Machine
JDLink™ In-Line Fuse—If Equipped
NOTE: JDLink in-line fuses may be equipped on early
and late serial number machines.
TX1104628A —UN—03JAN12
1. Turn machine off.
2. Open battery compartment access door.
3. Remove cap screws (2) from cover to access the 7.5
Amp JDLink™ unswitched power in-line fuse (1) on
the yellow wire.
4. To deactivate the JDLink™ Machine Monitoring
System, remove the unswitched power in-line fuse.
Cover
5. Install cover and cap screws.
6. Close access door.
3— JDLink™ Ground In-Line
Fuse (7.5 Amp Fuse)
4— JDLink™ Switched Power
In-Line Fuse (3 Amp Fuse)
TX1024511A —UN—15DEC10
1— JDLink™ Unswitched
Power In-Line Fuse
2— Cap Screws (3 used)
JDLink In-line Fuse
JDLink is a trademark of Deere & Company
DB84312,00000D4 -19-22MAY14-4/4
Replacing Bucket Teeth
CAUTION: Guard against injury from flying pieces
of metal; wear goggles or safety glasses.
T95784 —UN—10NOV88
IMPORTANT: Angle the drift toward the bucket to
avoid damaging the rubber pin lock.
1. Use a hammer and drift to drive out locking pin.
NOTE: Alternate buckets may use different tooth
assemblies.
Bucket Teeth
2. Remove tooth.
Continued on next page
4-1-11
04T,90,M16 -19-28MAR11-1/3
081214
PN=189
Miscellaneous—Machine
3. Inspect rubber pin lock (A) for damage. Replace if
necessary.
4. If rubber pin lock has moved, reposition in slot in
adapter tooth shank.
T95785 —UN—10NOV88
A—Rubber Pin Lock
Rubber Pin Lock
04T,90,M16 -19-28MAR11-2/3
5. Position the new tooth over the tooth shank.
6. Drive the locking pin into the hole fully.
T95786 —UN—10NOV88
NOTE: Check bucket teeth periodically so that wear does
not extend to the bucket tooth shank.
Tooth Shank
04T,90,M16 -19-28MAR11-3/3
4-1-12
081214
PN=190
Miscellaneous—Machine
Replacing Bucket Tooth Tip—Heavy-Duty
Bucket
1. Clean tooth (A) and tooth tip (B).
T6879EE —UN—06DEC88
2. Insert lock removal tool under U-shaped pin (C).
CAUTION: Avoid possible injury. Pin may fly
after it is released from tooth tip. Keep a firm
grip on pin to prevent injury.
3. Remove pin.
4. Turn tooth tip counterclockwise and pull it towards you
to remove.
Bucket Tooth Tip—Heavy-Duty Bucket
5. Clean tooth shank.
6. Replace U-shaped pin at same time you replace tooth
tip.
T7527DO —UN—27JUN91
7. Insert tooth tip on shank turning tip clockwise.
8. Install U-shaped pin. Side of pin marked "FRONT" (D)
must face tooth tip. Make sure pin is firmly engaged
over tooth tip.
A—Tooth
B—Tooth Tip
C—Pin
D—"Front" Mark
U-Shaped Pin—Heavy-Duty Bucket
04T,90,K273 -19-23AUG12-1/1
Replacing Bucket Teeth—TK Series
TX1150806 —UN—10JAN14
IMPORTANT: Prevent machine damage. Check
bucket teeth periodically so that wear does
not extend to the bucket tooth shank.
1. Remove pin (1) by rotating counterclockwise 180°
using a ratchet and socket.
2. Remove tooth.
3. Inspect pin and rubber locks (2) for damage. Replace
if necessary.
4. Position the new tooth over the tooth shank.
Pin
5. Install pin by rotating clockwise 180°.
2— Rubber Lock (2 used)
TX1150895 —UN—10JAN14
1— Pin
Rubber Lock
DB84312,00000BC -19-20JAN14-1/1
4-1-13
081214
PN=191
Miscellaneous—Machine
Removing the Bucket
2. Remove snap rings and locking pins.
1. Lower bucket to the ground.
3. Slide O-ring seals out of way. Remove bucket pins.
04T,90,M35 -19-28AUG09-1/1
Track Sag General Information
To maximize undercarriage life, keep track sag within
specification. Tracks may require adjustment several
times during a working day due to changing soil type and
moisture content.
Adjust tracks in the actual operating conditions.
TIGHT TRACK: Packing causes a tight track. If material
packs in the undercarriage, adjust tracks with the material
packed in the components.
While the track spring will recoil and the machine can
continue to operate with a tight track, continued operation
will result in excessive pin and bushing wear, sprocket
popping, tooth tip wear, and excessive loads on the entire
undercarriage and travel drive system.
Machine productivity and fuel consumption are also
adversely affected because increased horsepower is
needed to move the machine.
LOOSE TRACK: A loose track has more side to side
motion, increasing side wear on the links, rollers, and front
idler. An excessively loose track will slap at high ground
speeds, resulting in high impact loads on the sprocket
teeth, bushings, and carrier rollers.
VD76477,00001F7 -19-28AUG09-1/1
Check Track Shoe Hardware
T6352AH —UN—23FEB89
Tracks shoes should be checked periodically for loose
or missing cap screws and nuts. For shoes with missing
or loose cap screws and nuts, remove shoes and clean
the mating surface of shoes and links before tightening
cap screws and nuts. The cap screws should be replaced
because they have been stretched to yield previously.
Operating a machine with loose shoes can cause the cap
screws and holes in the shoes and links to wear making
it difficult to keep the shoes tight. Loose shoes can also
cause hardware failure and loss of shoes.
1. Clean the mating surface of shoe and links. Install
shoes.
2. Apply a light coating of oil to cap screw threads before
installing.
3. Install nuts with the rounded corners against milled
surface of link and chamfered side is away from link.
Cap Screw Tightening Sequence
Check that nuts are square with the milled surface of
link and there is full contact between nut and milled
surface. As necessary, hold the nut so it does not turn.
4. Starting at any cap screw, tighten all cap screws in
sequence shown to specification.
TX14740,0001CFC -19-03JAN12-1/1
Hardware Torque Specifications
Check cap screws and nuts to be sure they are tight.
If hardware is loose, tighten to torque shown on the
following charts unless a special torque is specified.
TX,90,FF1225 -19-15MAR93-1/1
4-1-14
081214
PN=192
Miscellaneous—Machine
Unified Inch Bolt and Screw Torque Values
TS1671 —UN—01MAY03
Bolt or Screw
Size
1/4
5/16
3/8
7/16
SAE Grade 2a
SAE Grade 1
b
c
Lubricatedb
Dry
Lubricated
SAE Grade 5, 5.1 or 5.2
Dryc
Lubricatedb
Dryc
SAE Grade 8 or 8.2
Lubricatedb
Dryc
N·m
lb.-in.
N·m
lb.-in.
N·m
lb.-in.
N·m
lb.-in.
N·m
lb.-in.
N·m
lb.-in.
N·m
lb.-in.
N·m
3.7
33
4.7
42
6
53
7.5
66
9.5
84
12
106
13.5
120
17
150
N·m
lb.-ft.
N·m
lb.-ft.
28
20.5
35
26
7.7
13.5
68
120
22
194
N·m
lb.-ft.
9.8
86
12
106
15.5
137
17.5
155
22
194
27
240
N·m
lb.-ft.
N·m
lb.-ft.
N·m
lb.-ft.
28
20.5
35
26
44
32.5
lb.-in.
19.5
172
25
221
N·m
lb.-ft.
N·m
lb.-ft.
35
26
44
32.5
49
36
63
46
56
41
70
52
80
59
100
74
1/2
34
25
42
31
53
39
67
49
85
63
110
80
120
88
155
115
9/16
48
35.5
60
45
76
56
95
70
125
92
155
115
175
130
220
165
5/8
67
49
85
63
105
77
135
100
170
125
215
160
240
175
305
225
3/4
120
88
150
110
190
140
240
175
300
220
380
280
425
315
540
400
7/8
190
140
240
175
190
140
240
175
490
360
615
455
690
510
870
640
1
285
210
360
265
285
210
360
265
730
540
920
680
1030
760
1300
960
1-1/8
400
300
510
375
400
300
510
375
910
670
1150
850
1450
1075
1850
1350
1-1/4
570
420
725
535
570
420
725
535
1280
945
1630
1200
2050
1500
2600
1920
1-3/8
750
550
950
700
750
550
950
700
1700
1250
2140
1580
2700
2000
3400
2500
1-1/2
990
730
1250
930
990
730
1250
930
2250
1650
2850
2100
3600
2650
4550
3350
Torque values listed are for general use only, based on the strength of the bolt
or screw. DO NOT use these values if a different torque value or tightening
procedure is given for a specific application. For plastic insert or crimped steel
type lock nuts, for stainless steel fasteners, or for nuts on U-bolts, see the
tightening instructions for the specific application. Shear bolts are designed to fail
under predetermined loads. Always replace shear bolts with identical grade.
Replace fasteners with the same or higher grade. If higher
grade fasteners are used, tighten these to the strength of the
original. Make sure fastener threads are clean and that you
properly start thread engagement. When possible, lubricate
plain or zinc plated fasteners other than lock nuts, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, unless different instructions are given for the
specific application.
a
Grade 2 applies for hex cap screws (not hex bolts) up to 6 in. (152 mm) long. Grade 1 applies for hex cap screws over 6
in. (152 mm) long, and for all other types of bolts and screws of any length.
“Lubricated” means coated with a lubricant such as engine oil, fasteners with phosphate and oil coatings, or 7/8 in.
and larger fasteners with JDM F13C, F13F or F13J zinc flake coating.
c
“Dry” means plain or zinc plated without any lubrication, or 1/4 to 3/4 in. fasteners with JDM F13B, F13E or F13H zinc flake coating.
b
DX,TORQ1 -19-12JAN11-1/1
4-1-15
081214
PN=193
Miscellaneous—Machine
Metric Bolt and Screw Torque Values
TS1670 —UN—01MAY03
Bolt or Screw
Size
M6
M8
M10
4.8
8.8
9.8
10.9
12.9
12.9
4.8
8.8
9.8
10.9
12.9
12.9
Class 4.8
Lubricateda
Class 8.8 or 9.8
Dryb
Lubricateda
Class 10.9
Dryb
Lubricateda
Class 12.9
Dryb
Lubricateda
Dryb
N·m
lb.-in.
N·m
lb.-in.
N·m
lb.-in.
N·m
lb.-in.
N·m
lb.-in.
N·m
lb.-in.
N·m
lb.-in.
N·m
4.7
42
6
53
8.9
79
11.3
100
13
115
16.5
146
15.5
137
19.5
172
N·m
lb.-ft.
N·m
lb.-ft.
N·m
lb.-ft.
N·m
lb.-ft.
32
23.5
40
29.5
37
27.5
47
35
63
46
80
59
75
55
95
70
11.5
102
14.5
128
22
194
27.5
243
N·m
lb.-ft.
N·m
lb.-ft.
N·m
lb.-ft.
29
21
43
32
55
40
lb.-in.
23
204
N·m
lb.-ft.
M12
40
29.5
50
37
75
55
95
70
110
80
140
105
130
95
165
120
M14
63
46
80
59
120
88
150
110
175
130
220
165
205
150
260
190
M16
100
74
125
92
190
140
240
175
275
200
350
255
320
235
400
300
M18
135
100
170
125
265
195
330
245
375
275
475
350
440
325
560
410
M20
190
140
245
180
375
275
475
350
530
390
675
500
625
460
790
580
M22
265
195
330
245
510
375
650
480
725
535
920
680
850
625
1080
800
M24
330
245
425
315
650
480
820
600
920
680
1150
850
1080
800
1350
1000
M27
490
360
625
460
950
700
1200
885
1350
1000
1700
1250
1580
1160
2000
1475
M30
660
490
850
625
1290
950
1630
1200
1850
1350
2300
1700
2140
1580
2700
2000
M33
900
665
1150
850
1750
1300
2200
1625
2500
1850
3150
2325
2900
2150
3700
2730
M36
1150
850
1450
1075
2250
1650
2850
2100
3200
2350
4050
3000
3750
2770
4750
3500
Torque values listed are for general use only, based on the strength of
the bolt or screw. DO NOT use these values if a different torque value or
tightening procedure is given for a specific application. For stainless steel
fasteners or for nuts on U-bolts, see the tightening instructions for the
specific application. Tighten plastic insert or crimped steel type lock nuts
by turning the nut to the dry torque shown in the chart, unless different
instructions are given for the specific application.
Shear bolts are designed to fail under predetermined loads. Always
replace shear bolts with identical property class. Replace fasteners with
the same or higher property class. If higher property class fasteners are
used, tighten these to the strength of the original. Make sure fastener
threads are clean and that you properly start thread engagement. When
possible, lubricate plain or zinc plated fasteners other than lock nuts,
wheel bolts or wheel nuts, unless different instructions are given for the
specific application.
a
“Lubricated” means coated with a lubricant such as engine oil, fasteners with phosphate and oil coatings, or M20
and larger fasteners with JDM F13C, F13F or F13J zinc flake coating.
b
“Dry” means plain or zinc plated without any lubrication, or M6 to M18 fasteners with JDM F13B, F13E or F13H zinc flake coating.
DX,TORQ2 -19-12JAN11-1/1
4-1-16
081214
PN=194
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Operational Checkout
Complete necessary visual checks (oil levels, oil condition,
external leaks, loose hardware, linkage, wiring) prior
to doing checkout. The machine must be at operating
temperature for many of the checks.
This procedure is used to check operation of machine.
It is designed so you can do a walk around inspection,
check machine operation, and perform specific checks
from the operator's seat.
If there is a problem with machine, diagnostic information
in this checkout will help pinpoint the probable cause. This
information may allow you to perform a simple adjustment
to correct the problem. Use the table of contents to help
find adjustment procedures.
A location will be required which is level and has adequate
space to complete checks. No tools or equipment are
needed to perform checkout.
Read each check completely before performing. If no
problem is found, you will be instructed to go to the next
check. If a problem is indicated, you will be referred to a
procedure for adjustment, repair, or replacement.
The monitor can be used to perform diagnostic and
operational checks. The monitor can display engine
speed, pressures, and diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs).
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-1/56
Diagnostic Trouble Code Check
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-2/56
Display and Clear Trouble Always check for diagnostic trouble codes and correct them before performing
Codes
operational checkout.
Diagnostic trouble codes can be displayed by using one of the following methods:
• Monitor
• Service ADVISOR™
• MPDr
YES: Correct all diagnostic
trouble codes before
proceeding.
LOOK: Are diagnostic trouble codes present?
NO: Proceed with
operational checkout.
Service ADVISOR is a trademark of Deere & Company
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-3/56
Operational Checks—Key Switch Off, Engine Off Checks
Continued on next page
4-2-1
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-4/56
081214
PN=195
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Horn Circuit Check
1
TX1093717 —UN—29JUN11
Horn Circuit
1— Horn Button
Key switch in OFF position.
YES: Go to next check.
Press horn button (1) on top of left pilot control lever.
NO: Check horn 10 A fuse
(F19).
LISTEN: Does horn sound?
IF OK: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page
4-2-2
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-5/56
081214
PN=196
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Hour Meter and Fuel
Gauge Check
2
PUSH
MENU/SET
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
L
/VOL
/PWR
H
PUSH
VOL/PWR
min -1
L
H
A/I A/I
ON OFF
OFF
INT
OFF
ACC
N
O
ON
START
PUSH
MODE
1 2 3 4 5
OFF 1
2
6 7 8 9 0
TX1086727 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
1
50.0 h
10:00 AM
F
H
6
E
C
TX1086583A —UN—11JAN11
Hour Meter and Fuel Gauge Screen
1— Hour Meter
2— Home Button
6— Fuel Gauge
Press and hold home button (2) until default screen appears.
YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does hour meter (1) display machine hours?
NO: Check power on 5 A
fuse (F17).
LOOK: Does fuel gauge (6) display correct fuel level?
IF OK: See your authorized
dealer.
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-6/56
Operational Checks—Key Switch On, Engine Off Checks
Continued on next page
4-2-3
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-7/56
081214
PN=197
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Monitor Start-Up Check
TX1086287A —UN—28DEC10
System Starting Screen
TX1086304A —UN—28DEC10
Default Screen
1— System Starting Screen
2— Default Screen
NOTE: The exhaust filter auto cleaning disabled indicator will display on the
monitor when the key switch is in ON position. Once the engine is started,
the indicator will disappear unless exhaust filter auto cleaning has been
disabled by the operator through the monitor.
When the key switch is turned to the ON position, the system starting screen (1)
displays for about 2 seconds and then the default screen (2) is displayed.
Turn key switch to ON position.
YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does monitor display system starting screen?
NO: Check controller 5 A
fuse (F10).
LOOK: Does default screen with hour meter appear after system starting screen
disappears?
IF OK: See you authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page
4-2-4
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-8/56
081214
PN=198
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Monitor, Gauges, and
Battery Relay Checks
TX1087186A —UN—28JUN13
Default Screen
50.0 h
ECO 10:00
AM
8
F
H
E
C
AUTO
FM
24.0˚C
VOL
CH1
81.3 ST
MHz
TX1089107 —UN—08MAR11
Engine Preheat Indicator
1— Work Mode Indicator
2— Exhaust Filter Auto Cleaning Disabled Indicator
3— Power Mode Indicator
4— Hour Meter
5— Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
6— Fuel Gauge
7— Travel Mode Indicator
8— Engine Preheat Indicator
IMPORTANT: This machine is equipped with glow plugs. Glow plugs
are automatically controlled by the engine controller when the
key is turned ON. Do not start the engine until the engine preheat
indicator (8) disappears on the monitor. Indicator will not appear
if ambient air temperature is above 0°C (32°F).
NOTE: The exhaust filter auto cleaning disabled indicator will display on the
monitor when the key switch is in ON position. Once the engine is started,
the indicator will disappear unless exhaust filter auto cleaning has been
disabled by the operator through the monitor.
NOTE: If engine coolant temperature is below 30°C (86°F) engine
temperature gauge needle may not move.
Continued on next page
4-2-5
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-9/56
081214
PN=199
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Turn key switch to ON position.
LISTEN: Does battery relay click?
LOOK: Does engine coolant temperature gauge (5) display correct engine coolant
temperature?
LOOK: Does fuel gauge (6) display correct fuel level?
LOOK: Does hour meter (4) display machine hours?
LOOK: Does work mode indicator (1) display correct work mode (dig or attachment)?
LOOK: Does travel mode indicator (7) display correct travel mode?
YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does power mode indicator (3) display correct power mode?
NO: Monitor does not turn
ON. Check monitor 5 A fuse
(F14).
LOOK: Does engine preheat indicator (8) appear on monitor and then disappear after
glow plugs reach specific temperature?
IF OK: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page
4-2-6
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-10/56
081214
PN=200
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Rear Camera Check
TX1086305A —UN—28DEC10
Default Screen
5— Default Screen
TX1086306A —UN—28DEC10
Main Menu Screen
1— Main Menu Screen
TX1086272A —UN—27DEC10
Switch Panel
2— Monitor Dial
3— Back Button
4— Home Button
Continued on next page
4-2-7
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-11/56
081214
PN=201
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
CAUTION: To avoid possible injury or death to operator or others. The rear
view camera image is designed to supplement other safety practices and
is not intended to be the sole method of collision avoidance. Always be
alert and aware of the surroundings when operating this machine.
Turn key switch to ON position.
When the default screen (5) is displayed, press monitor dial (2) on the switch panel.
LOOK: Does main menu (1) display?
Rotate monitor dial to highlight settings menu.
Press monitor dial.
LOOK: Does settings menu display?
At settings menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight rear view camera monitor.
Press monitor dial to display rear view camera monitor menu.
LOOK: Does rear view camera monitor menu display?
Press monitor dial to turn camera ON (enable).
Press home button (4).
TX1087390A —UN—27JAN11
Rear View Image
6— Rear View Image
LOOK: Does rear view image (6) display on default screen?
Repeat above steps.
At rear view camera monitor menu, press monitor dial to turn camera OFF (disable).
YES: Go to next check.
Press Home button.
NO: Menus do not display.
Check monitor 5 A fuse
(F14).
LOOK: Does default screen appear without rear view image?
IF OK: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page
4-2-8
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-12/56
081214
PN=202
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Travel Lever and Pedal
Neutral Checks
1
2
TX1093760 —UN—31AUG11
Travel Lever and Pedal
1— Forward
2— Rearward
Push both travel levers and pedals forward (1), then release.
Pull both travel levers and pedals rearward (2), then release.
FEEL: Do levers and pedals require equal effort to operate in forward and reverse?
YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Do levers and pedals return to neutral at the same time when released?
NO: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page
4-2-9
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-13/56
081214
PN=203
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Light Circuit Checks
PUSH
MENU/SET
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
L
/VOL
/PWR
H
PUSH
VOL/PWR
min -1
L
H
A/I A/I
ON OFF
OFF
INT
ACC
OFF
N
O
ON
START
PUSH
MODE
1 2 3 4 5
OFF 1
2
3
6 7 8 9 0
TX1086747 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
3— Work Light Switch
Turn work light switch (3) to 1st position.
LOOK: Is monitor panel back light and base machine work light on?
LOOK: Does switch panel illuminate?
Turn light switch to 2nd position.
YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does base machine work light stay on and switch panel stay illuminated?
NO: Check work and drive
lights 20 A fuse (F1) and
controller 5 A fuse (F10).
LOOK: Does boom work light come on and monitor back panel light change to night
mode?
IF OK: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page
4-2-10
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-14/56
081214
PN=204
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Windshield Wiper Control
Check
PUSH
MENU/SET
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
L
/VOL
/PWR
H
PUSH
VOL/PWR
min -1
L
H
A/I A/I
ON OFF
OFF
INT
OFF
START
4
ACC
N
O
ON
PUSH
MODE
1 2 3 4 5
OFF 1
2
6 7 8 9 0
TX1086748 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
4— Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch
NOTE: Front window must be fully closed and latched for windshield wiper to operate.
Turn windshield wiper and washer switch (4) to 1st INT position.
LOOK: Does wiper operate intermittently (8 second interval)?
Turn windshield wiper and washer switch to 2nd INT position.
LOOK: Does wiper operate intermittently, but faster than when in first position (5
second interval)?
Turn windshield wiper and washer switch to 3rd INT position.
LOOK: Does wiper operate intermittently, but faster than when in second position (3
second interval)?
Turn windshield wiper and washer switch to ON position.
LOOK: Does wiper operate continuously?
YES: Go to next check.
Turn windshield wiper and washer switch to OFF position.
NO: Check windshield
wiper and washer 10 A fuse
(F2).
LOOK: Does wiper arm stop and retract to left side of windshield?
IF OK: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page
4-2-11
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-15/56
081214
PN=205
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Windshield Washer
Control Check
PUSH
MENU/SET
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
L
/VOL
/PWR
H
PUSH
VOL/PWR
min -1
L
H
A/I A/I
ON OFF
OFF
INT
OFF
START
4
ACC
N
O
ON
PUSH
MODE
1 2 3 4 5
OFF 1
2
6 7 8 9 0
TX1086748 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
4— Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch
IMPORTANT: Washer motor may be damaged if washer switch is
held for more than 20 seconds, or continually operated with
no fluid in the washer fluid tank.
NOTE: While wiper is being operated in INT mode, when windshield wiper and washer
switch is pressed, wiper mode is changed to continuous mode.
Press windshield wiper and washer switch (4).
LOOK: Is washer fluid supplied to windshield?
Press and hold windshield wiper and washer switch for 3 seconds.
YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does wiper start and continue operating until switch is released?
NO: Check washer
fluid level. See Check
Windshield Washer Fluid
Level. (Section 3-3.)
Release windshield wiper and washer switch.
NO: Check windshield
wiper and washer 10 A fuse
(F2).
LOOK: Does wiper stop and retract to left side of windshield?
IF OK: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page
4-2-12
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-16/56
081214
PN=206
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Windshield Wiper Circuit
Check
2
1
TX1001270 —UN—14DEC05
Front Window Release Handle
1— Lock Pin
2— Lock Release Bar
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from window closing. Upper front
window comes down very forcefully. Close window only when sitting
on operator's seat. Guide window down slowly.
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from window closing. Always
lock the pin in cab frame boss hole.
NOTE: The wiper cannot operate with the upper front window open. The washer
can operate with the upper front window open. When closing window, check
that window upper left corner makes good contact with the cab.
Slide lock pin (1) inward, then down into notch.
Pull lock release bar (2) toward operator’s seat.
While holding lower handle on window, pull window up and back as far as it can go.
Slide lock pin into cab frame boss hole and rotate downward into the locked position.
PUSH
MENU/SET
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
L
/VOL
/PWR
H
PUSH
VOL/PWR
min -1
L
H
A/I A/I
ON OFF
OFF
INT
START
4
ACC
N
O
ON
OFF
PUSH
MODE
1 2 3 4 5
OFF 1
2
6 7 8 9 0
TX1086748 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
4— Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch
Turn windshield wiper and washer switch (4) to ON position.
Continued on next page
4-2-13
YES: Go to next check.
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-17/56
081214
PN=207
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
LISTEN: Does wiper circuit click?
NO: Check windshield
wiper and washer 10 A fuse
(F2).
LOOK: Does wiper remain stationary in park position?
IF OK: See your authorized
dealer.
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-18/56
Windshield Washer
Circuit Check
IMPORTANT: Washer motor may be damaged if washer switch is
held for more than 20 seconds, or continually operated with
no fluid in the washer fluid tank.
YES: Go to next check.
PUSH
MENU/SET
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
L
/VOL
/PWR
H
PUSH
VOL/PWR
min -1
L
H
A/I A/I
ON OFF
OFF
INT
N
O
ON
OFF
START
4
ACC
PUSH
MODE
1 2 3 4 5
OFF 1
2
6 7 8 9 0
TX1086748 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
4— Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch
NO: Check washer
fluid level. See Check
Windshield Washer Fluid
Level. (Section 3-3.)
Press windshield wiper and washer switch (4) and hold for 3 seconds.
NO: Check windshield
wiper and washer 10 A fuse
(F2).
LOOK: Is washer fluid supplied to windshield?
IF OK: See your authorized
dealer.
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-19/56
Operational Checks—Key Switch On, Engine On Checks
Continued on next page
4-2-14
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-20/56
081214
PN=208
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Monitor and Gauge
Circuit Checks
TX1087196A —UN—28JUN13
Operating Screen
1— Power Mode Indicator
2— Hour Meter
3— Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
4— Fuel Gauge
5— Alarm Indicator
IMPORTANT: Engine damage could occur if the alarm indicator (5)
or engine oil pressure alarm indicator comes on after engine
starts. Turn off machine immediately.
NOTE: The exhaust filter auto cleaning disabled indicator will display on the
monitor when the key switch is in ON position. Once the engine is started,
the indicator will disappear unless exhaust filter auto cleaning has been
disabled by the operator through the monitor.
Start engine.
YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Do all alarm indicator displays remain off after engine starts?
NO: Engine oil pressure
alarm displayed.
Immediately stop engine
and check engine oil level.
See Check Engine Oil
Level. (Section 3-4.)
LOOK: Does alarm indicator remain off after engine starts?
IF OK: See your authorized
dealer.
LOOK: Does engine coolant temperature gauge (3) display correct engine coolant
temperature?
NO: Alternator alarm
indicator displayed. Check
alternator drive belt.
LOOK: Does fuel gauge (4) display correct fuel level?
IF OK: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page
4-2-15
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-21/56
081214
PN=209
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Pilot Shutoff Circuit
Check
1
TX1093762 —UN—28JUN13
Engine Speed Dial
TX1093763 —UN—19JUL11
Locked
1— Engine Speed Dial
CAUTION: Avoid possible injury. Machine may move during this check.
Make sure area is clear and large enough to operate all machine functions.
Turn engine speed dial (1) to L (slow idle) position.
Place pilot shutoff lever in locked (UP) position.
Slowly actuate dig and travel functions.
YES: Continue check.
LOOK: Do dig and travel functions operate?
NO: See your authorized
dealer.
TX1093764 —UN—19JUL11
Unlocked
Place pilot shutoff lever in unlocked (DOWN) position.
Slowly actuate dig and travel functions.
YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Do dig and travel functions operate?
NO: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page
4-2-16
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-22/56
081214
PN=210
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Fan Reversing System
- If Equipped
TX1015264A —UN—09JAN07
Fan Reversing Switch
PUSH
MENU/SET
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
3
PUSH
L
/VOL
/PWR
H
PUSH
VOL/PWR
min -1
L
1
H
2
A/I A/I
ON OFF
OFF
INT
N
O
ON
OFF
ACC
START
PUSH
MODE
1 2 3 4 5
OFF 1
2
6 7 8 9 0
TX1088406 —UN—21FEB11
Switch Panel
1— Engine Speed Dial
2— Auto-Idle Switch
3— Blower Speed Switch
9— Fan Reversing Switch
Place pilot shutoff lever in unlocked (DOWN) position.
Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position.
Turn auto-idle switch (2) to A/I OFF position.
Press blower speed switch (3) OFF.
Press reversing cooling fan switch to MANUAL position.
LISTEN: Does fan speed slow down?
LOOK/LISTEN: After approximately 20 seconds, does the fan speed increase and
rotate in reverse direction for approximately 30 seconds?
LISTEN/LOOK: Does the fan speed slow for approximately 20 seconds? Does fan
direction return to normal?
YES: Go to next check.
LISTEN: Does fan speed increase?
NO: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page
4-2-17
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-23/56
081214
PN=211
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Engine Speed Dial Check
PUSH
MENU/SET
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
/VOL
/PWR
H
L
PUSH
VOL/PWR
min -1
L
1
H
2
A/I A/I
ON OFF
OFF
INT
ACC
N
O
ON
OFF
START
3
PUSH
MODE
1 2 3 4 5
OFF 1
2
6 7 8 9 0
4
TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
1— Engine Speed Dial
2— Auto-Idle Switch
3— Travel Mode Switch
4— Power Mode Button
Turn auto-idle switch (2) to A/I OFF position.
Place pilot shutoff lever in locked (UP) position.
Turn engine speed dial (1) clockwise.
LISTEN: Does engine speed increase?
YES: Go to next check.
Turn engine speed dial counterclockwise.
NO: Check controller 5 A
fuse (F10).
LISTEN: Does engine speed decrease?
IF OK: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page
4-2-18
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-24/56
081214
PN=212
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
ECO (Economy) Mode and
PWR (Power) Mode Check
PUSH
MENU/SET
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
/VOL
/PWR
H
L
PUSH
VOL/PWR
min -1
L
1
H
2
A/I A/I
ON OFF
OFF
INT
N
O
ON
OFF
ACC
START
3
PUSH
MODE
1 2 3 4 5
OFF 1
2
6 7 8 9 0
4
TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
1— Engine Speed Dial
2— Auto-Idle Switch
3— Travel Speed Switch
4— Power Mode Button
Press power mode button (4) until PWR (power) mode is displayed on monitor.
Turn auto-idle switch (2) to A/I OFF position.
Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position.
Press power mode button until ECO (economy) mode is displayed on monitor.
LOOK/LISTEN: Does engine speed decrease?
Press power mode button until PWR (power) mode is displayed on monitor.
YES: Go to next check.
LOOK/LISTEN: Does engine speed increase?
NO: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page
4-2-19
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-25/56
081214
PN=213
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
H/P (High Power) Mode
Check
PUSH
MENU/SET
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
/VOL
/PWR
H
L
PUSH
VOL/PWR
min -1
L
1
H
2
A/I A/I
ON OFF
OFF
INT
N
O
ON
OFF
ACC
START
3
PUSH
MODE
1 2 3 4 5
OFF 1
2
6 7 8 9 0
4
TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
1— Engine Speed Dial
2— Auto-Idle Switch
3— Travel Speed Switch
4— Power Mode Button
Press power mode button (4) until PWR (power) mode is displayed on monitor.
Turn auto-idle switch (2) to A/I OFF position.
Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position.
Press power mode button until H/P (high power) mode is displayed on monitor.
YES: Go to next check.
Actuate arm in function over relief.
NO: Check controller 5 A
fuse (F10).
LOOK/LISTEN: Does engine speed increase as function goes over relief?
IF OK: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page
4-2-20
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-26/56
081214
PN=214
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Auto-Idle Circuit Check
PUSH
MENU/SET
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
/VOL
/PWR
H
L
PUSH
VOL/PWR
min -1
L
1
H
2
A/I A/I
ON OFF
OFF
INT
N
O
ON
OFF
ACC
START
3
PUSH
MODE
1 2 3 4 5
OFF 1
2
6 7 8 9 0
4
TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
1— Engine Speed Dial
2— Auto-Idle Switch
3— Travel Speed Switch
4— Power Mode Button
Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position.
Press power mode button (4) until H/P (high power) mode is displayed on monitor.
Turn auto-idle switch (2) to A/I off position.
Place pilot shutoff lever in unlocked (DOWN) position.
Turn auto-idle switch to A/I on position.
LOOK/LISTEN: Does engine speed decrease after 4—6 seconds?
YES: Go to next check.
Slowly actuate dig function.
NO: Check solenoid 20 A
fuse (F4).
LOOK/LISTEN: Does engine speed return to fast idle?
IF OK: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page
4-2-21
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-27/56
081214
PN=215
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Travel Alarm Check
A
B
C
TX1095497 —UN—09AUG11
Travel Alarm
A—Pilot Shutoff Lever
B—Travel Lever and Pedal Forward
C—Travel Lever and Pedal Rearward
CAUTION: Avoid possible injury. Machine will move during this check.
Make sure area is clear and large enough to operate machine.
Place pilot shutoff lever (A) in unlocked (DOWN) position.
Push travel pedals or levers forward (B).
LISTEN: Does travel alarm sound?
YES: Go to next check.
Push travel pedals or pull levers rearward (C).
NO: Check travel alarm 5
A fuse (F5).
LISTEN: Does travel alarm sound?
IF OK: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page
4-2-22
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-28/56
081214
PN=216
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Travel Alarm Cancel
Switch Circuit Check
TX1086700A —UN—08JAN11
Left Console
1— Reversing Fan Switch
2— Seat Heater Switch
3— Travel Alarm Cancel Switch
CAUTION: Avoid possible injury. Machine will move during this check.
Make sure area is clear and large enough to operate machine.
NOTE: Travel alarm must operate for this check.
Place pilot shutoff lever in unlocked (DOWN) position.
Push travel pedals or levers and allow travel alarm to operate for a minimum of 12
seconds.
LISTEN: Does travel alarm sound?
YES: Go to next check.
While continuing travel, push travel alarm cancel switch (3).
NO: Check travel alarm 5
A fuse (F5).
LISTEN: Does travel alarm stop sounding?
IF OK: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page
4-2-23
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-29/56
081214
PN=217
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Hydraulic Oil Tank
Pressurization Check
1
2
TX1093766 —UN—28JUN13
Hydraulic Oil Tank Cover
1— Hydraulic Oil Tank Pressure Release Button
2— Hydraulic Oil Tank Cover
IMPORTANT: The pressurized oil tank creates pressure at the inlet to
the hydraulic pumps. If tank cover does not seal, hydraulic
pumps could cavitate and be damaged.
Raise boom to full height, then lower boom to ground.
Slowly depress pressure release button (1) on hydraulic oil tank cover.
YES: Go to next check.
LISTEN: Is air heard escaping from the pressure release button on hydraulic oil tank
cover?
NO: Replace hydraulic oil
tank cover.
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-30/56
Control Lever Pattern
Check-Excavator Pattern
1
5
7
4
3
2
8
6
TX1093767 —UN—28JUN13
Control Lever Pattern Check - Excavator Pattern
1— Arm Out
2— Arm In
3— Swing Left
4— Swing Right
5— Boom Down
6— Boom Up
7— Bucket Load
8— Bucket Dump
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from unexpected machine movement.
Clear all persons from the area before operating machine.
Turn engine speed dial to L (slow idle) position.
Place pilot shutoff lever in unlocked (DOWN) position.
YES: Go to next check.
Slowly move hydraulic levers to all positions.
NO: See Control Lever
Pattern Operation. (Section
2-3.)
LOOK: Do bucket, boom, arm, and swing move according to pattern?
IF OK: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page
4-2-24
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-31/56
081214
PN=218
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Control Lever Pattern
Check- Backhoe Pattern
5
1
7
4
3
6
8
2
TX1093769 —UN—28JUN13
Control Lever Pattern Check - Backhoe Pattern
1— Arm Out
2— Arm In
3— Swing Left
4— Swing Right
5— Boom Down
6— Boom Up
7— Bucket Load
8— Bucket Dump
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from unexpected machine movement.
Clear all persons from the area before operating machine.
Turn engine speed dial to L (slow idle) position.
Place pilot shutoff lever in unlocked (DOWN) position.
YES: Go to next check.
Slowly move hydraulic levers to all positions.
NO: See Control Lever
Pattern Operation. (Section
2-3.)
LOOK: Do bucket, boom, arm, and swing move according to pattern?
IF OK: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page
4-2-25
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-32/56
081214
PN=219
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Swing Dynamic Braking
Check
45˚
90˚
TX1095482 —UN—28JUN13
Swing Dynamic Braking
PUSH
MENU/SET
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
/VOL
/PWR
H
L
PUSH
VOL/PWR
min -1
L
1
H
2
A/I A/I
ON OFF
OFF
INT
N
O
ON
OFF
ACC
START
3
PUSH
MODE
1 2 3 4 5
OFF 1
2
6 7 8 9 0
4
TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
1— Engine Speed Dial
2— Auto-Idle Switch
3— Travel Speed Switch
4— Power Mode Button
CAUTION: Avoid possible injury. Make sure area is clear and large enough
to swing extended arm and bucket. Machine must be on level ground.
Position upperstructure with boom to the front.
Move arm to the extended position, bucket to the retracted position, and bucket-to-arm
pivot pin at same level as boom-to-frame pivot pin.
Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position.
Press power mode button (4) until PWR (power) mode is displayed on monitor.
Fully actuate swing function. Swing clockwise 90 degrees and then release lever.
LOOK: Does upperstructure stop within 45 degrees (1/8 turn) or less after releasing
lever?
Position upperstructure with boom to the front.
Fully actuate swing function. Swing counterclockwise 90 degrees and then release lever. YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does upperstructure stop within 45 degrees (1/8 turn) or less after releasing
lever?
Continued on next page
4-2-26
NO: See your authorized
dealer.
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-33/56
081214
PN=220
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Swing Park Brake and
Circuit Drift Check
TX1093770 —UN—28JUN13
Machine Position
Fill the bucket with dirt.
Position machine on a hillside with a slope of approximately 25%. If a hill is not
available, raise one side of machine approximately 300 mm (1 ft) with the boom and
then put a block under the track.
Move arm to the fully extended position.
Raise boom so arm-to-bucket pivot pin are the same height as boom-to-frame pivot pin.
Position upperstructure with cab over travel motors, perpendicular to tracks.
Turn engine speed dial to L (slow idle) position.
Wait approximately 5 minutes with all functions in neutral.
NOTE: Function does not need to be fully actuated to disengage the swing park brake.
Slowly actuate bucket load function to disengage the swing park brake. Do not hold the
function over relief for more than 10 seconds.
LOOK: Does upperstructure hold position when swing park brake is engaged?
LOOK: Does upperstructure move only slightly when swing park brake is disengaged?
Swing upperstructure 180 degrees counterclockwise and repeat procedure.
Turn engine speed dial to L (slow idle) position.
Wait approximately 5 minutes with all functions in neutral.
Slowly actuate bucket load function to disengage the swing park brake. Do not hold the
function over relief for more than 10 seconds.
LOOK: Does upperstructure hold position when swing park brake is engaged?
YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does upperstructure move only slightly when swing park brake is disengaged? NO: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page
4-2-27
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-34/56
081214
PN=221
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Swing Power Check
TX1093770 —UN—28JUN13
Machine Position
PUSH
MENU/SET
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
/VOL
/PWR
H
L
PUSH
VOL/PWR
min -1
L
1
H
2
A/I A/I
ON OFF
OFF
INT
N
O
ON
OFF
ACC
START
3
PUSH
MODE
1 2 3 4 5
OFF 1
2
6 7 8 9 0
4
TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
1— Engine Speed Dial
2— Auto-Idle Switch
3— Travel Speed Switch
4— Power Mode Button
Fill the bucket with dirt.
Position machine on a hillside with a slope of approximately 25%. If a hill is not
available, raise one side of machine approximately 300 mm (1 ft.) with the boom and
then put a block under the track.
Move arm to the fully extended position. Raise boom so arm-to-bucket pivot pin is the
same height as boom-to-frame pivot pin.
Swing upperstructure clockwise so it is 90 degrees to the slope.
Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position.
Press power mode button (4) until H/P (high power) mode is displayed on monitor.
Actuate the swing function to swing uphill.
LOOK: Does upperstructure swing uphill?
Swing upperstructure 180 degrees counterclockwise and repeat procedure.
Turn engine speed dial to H (fast idle) position.
Power mode button in H/P (high power) mode.
Actuate the swing function to swing uphill.
YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does upperstructure swing uphill?
NO: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page
4-2-28
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-35/56
081214
PN=222
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Dig Function Drift Check
(loaded bucket)
TX1095487 —UN—28JUN13
Machine Position—Loaded Bucket
Fill bucket with material to specification.
Specification
Loaded Bucket—Weight (approximate)................................................................ 900 kg
1990 lb.
Position bucket at maximum reach with bucket pivot pin the same height as boom
pivot pin.
Retract arm cylinder, then extend about 50 mm (2 in.).
Extend bucket cylinder, then retract about 50 mm (2 in.).
Stop engine.
Measure amount cylinders extend or retract in 5 minutes.
Measure distance from bottom of bucket to ground.
Compare measurements to specifications.
Dig Function Drift Specifications (loaded bucket)—Specification
Boom Cylinder—Drift.............................................................................................. 5 mm
0.20 in.
Arm Cylinder—Drift............................................................................................... 10 mm
0.39 in.
Bucket Cylinder—Drift........................................................................................... 15 mm
0.59 in.
Bottom Of Bucket-To-Ground—Drift................................................................... 100 mm
3.94 in.
YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Is cylinder drift within specification?
NO: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page
4-2-29
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-36/56
081214
PN=223
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Dig Function Drift Check
(empty bucket)
TX1109902 —UN—28JUN13
Machine Position—Empty Bucket
1— Arm Tip Position Above Ground
Empty bucket of material.
Extend arm cylinder, then retract about 50 mm (2 in.).
Extend bucket cylinder, then retract about 50 mm (2 in.).
Lower boom until the arm tip is 1 m (40 in.) above ground (1).
Stop engine.
Measure amount cylinders extend or retract in 5 minutes.
Measure distance from arm tip to ground.
Compare measurements to specifications.
Dig Function Drift Specifications (empty bucket)—Specification
Boom Cylinder—Drift.............................................................................................. 5 mm
0.20 in.
Arm Cylinder—Drift............................................................................................... 15 mm
0.59 in.
Bucket Cylinder—Drift............................................................................................. 9 mm
0.35 in.
Arm Tip-to-Ground—Drift...................................................................................... 80 mm
3.15 in.
YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Is cylinder drift within specification?
NO: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page
4-2-30
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-37/56
081214
PN=224
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Swing Priority Circuit
Check
CAUTION: Avoid possible injury. Make sure area is clear and large enough
to swing extended arm and bucket. Machine must be on level ground.
TX1095439 —UN—10AUG11
Swing Priority Check
PUSH
MENU/SET
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
/VOL
/PWR
H
L
PUSH
VOL/PWR
min -1
L
1
H
2
A/I A/I
ON OFF
OFF
INT
N
O
ON
OFF
ACC
START
3
PUSH
MODE
1 2 3 4 5
OFF 1
2
6 7 8 9 0
4
TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
1— Engine Speed Dial
2— Auto-Idle Switch
3— Travel Speed Switch
4— Power Mode Button
IMPORTANT: Avoid possible machine damage. Position machine as shown.
Operate swing and arm in slowly a few times before attempting to perform
check to ensure bucket does not contact machine or ground.
Position machine as shown.
Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position.
Turn auto-idle switch (2) to A/I OFF position.
Press power mode button (4) until PWR (power) mode is displayed on monitor.
Operate swing function and record time required for three complete revolutions.
160GLC—Specification
Swing Function—Time—Three
Revolutions......................................................................................... 12.00—15.00 sec.
180GLC—Specification
Swing Function—Time—Three
Revolutions......................................................................................... 11.80—13.80 sec.
Position machine as shown, arm extended, bucket curled, and upper structure 90
degrees to tracks.
Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position.
Press power mode button (4) until PWR (power) mode is displayed on monitor.
Raise boom high enough so bucket does not contact the machine or ground during
arm in and swing combined operation.
Continued on next page
4-2-31
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-38/56
081214
PN=225
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Operate swing function and slowly actuate arm in function when upperstructure is in
line with tracks. Record time required for three complete revolutions.
NOTE: Swing speed should not slow when actuating arm in.
YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does swing speed remain unchanged when actuating arm in?
NO: See your authorized
dealer.
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-39/56
Control Valve Lift
Check Test
TX1095449 —UN—28JUN13
Control Valve Lift
1
TX1093762 —UN—28JUN13
Engine Speed Dial
1— Engine Speed Dial
Turn engine speed dial (1) to L (slow idle) position.
Position machine as shown.
Slowly lower boom, extend arm (retract cylinder), and dump bucket (retract cylinder).
YES: See your authorized
dealer.
LOOK: Do functions move in opposite direction as pilot control levers are first moved,
then change direction as levers are moved farther?
NO: Go to next check.
Continued on next page
4-2-32
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-40/56
081214
PN=226
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Boom Up, Arm In,
and Bucket Combined
Function Operation Check
PUSH
MENU/SET
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
/VOL
/PWR
H
L
PUSH
VOL/PWR
min -1
L
1
H
2
A/I A/I
ON OFF
OFF
INT
N
O
ON
OFF
ACC
START
3
PUSH
MODE
1 2 3 4 5
OFF 1
2
6 7 8 9 0
4
TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
1— Engine Speed Dial
2— Auto-Idle Switch
3— Travel Speed Switch
4— Power Mode Button
Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position.
Turn auto-idle switch (2) to A/I OFF position.
Press power mode button (4) until PWR (power) mode is displayed on monitor.
Actuate boom up function, arm in function, and then bucket function in combination.
YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does boom continue to move at approximately the same speed after bucket
function is actuated?
NO: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page
4-2-33
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-41/56
081214
PN=227
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Boom Regenerative Valve
Operation Check
PUSH
MENU/SET
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
/VOL
/PWR
H
L
PUSH
VOL/PWR
min -1
L
1
H
2
A/I A/I
ON OFF
OFF
INT
N
O
ON
OFF
ACC
START
3
PUSH
MODE
1 2 3 4 5
OFF 1
2
6 7 8 9 0
4
TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
1— Engine Speed Dial
2— Auto-Idle Switch
3— Travel Speed Switch
4— Power Mode Button
Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position.
Press power mode button (4) until PWR (power) mode is displayed on monitor.
Raise boom and extend the arm to full extension.
Actuate the boom down, then arm in and boom up functions in combined operation.
YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does the boom move smoothly through the complete cycle down and up and
not hesitate when it goes past the vertical position?
NO: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page
4-2-34
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-42/56
081214
PN=228
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Arm Regenerative Valve
Operation Check
PUSH
MENU/SET
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
/VOL
/PWR
H
L
PUSH
VOL/PWR
min -1
L
1
H
2
A/I A/I
ON OFF
OFF
INT
N
O
ON
OFF
ACC
START
3
PUSH
MODE
1 2 3 4 5
OFF 1
2
6 7 8 9 0
4
TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
1— Engine Speed Dial
2— Auto-Idle Switch
3— Travel Speed Switch
4— Power Mode Button
Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position.
Press power mode button (4) until PWR (power) mode is displayed on monitor.
Extend the arm to full extension and then lower boom so bucket is on the ground.
Actuate the boom up and arm in functions in combined operation.
YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does the arm move smoothly through the complete cycle and not hesitate
when it goes through the vertical position?
NO: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page
4-2-35
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-43/56
081214
PN=229
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Bucket Regenerative
Valve Operation Check
PUSH
MENU/SET
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
/VOL
/PWR
H
L
PUSH
VOL/PWR
min -1
L
1
H
2
A/I A/I
ON OFF
OFF
INT
N
O
ON
OFF
ACC
START
3
PUSH
MODE
1 2 3 4 5
OFF 1
2
6 7 8 9 0
4
TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
1— Engine Speed Dial
2— Auto-Idle Switch
3— Travel Speed Switch
4— Power Mode Button
Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position.
Press power mode button (4) until PWR (power) mode is displayed on monitor.
Actuate boom up, arm out and bucket dump functions.
Actuate boom down function, arm in function, and then bucket curl function.
YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does the bucket move smoothly through the complete cycle and not hesitate
when it goes to the curl position?
NO: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page
4-2-36
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-44/56
081214
PN=230
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Travel Speed Selection
Check
PUSH
MENU/SET
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
/VOL
/PWR
H
L
PUSH
VOL/PWR
min -1
L
1
H
2
A/I A/I
ON OFF
OFF
INT
N
O
ON
OFF
ACC
START
3
PUSH
MODE
1 2 3 4 5
OFF 1
2
6 7 8 9 0
4
TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
1— Engine Speed Dial
2— Auto-Idle Switch
3— Travel Speed Switch
4— Power Mode Button
Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position.
Turn travel speed switch (3) to slow speed (turtle) mode.
Actuate travel function to full speed.
Turn travel speed switch to fast speed (rabbit) mode.
LOOK: Does machine travel speed increase?
Actuate a dig function and then return to neutral.
LOOK: Does machine travel speed decrease and then increase as dig function is
actuated and then released?
Turn travel speed switch to slow speed (turtle) mode.
YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does machine travel speed decrease?
NO: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page
4-2-37
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-45/56
081214
PN=231
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Travel System Tracking
Check
PUSH
MENU/SET
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
/VOL
/PWR
H
L
PUSH
VOL/PWR
min -1
L
1
H
2
A/I A/I
ON OFF
OFF
INT
N
O
ON
OFF
ACC
START
3
PUSH
MODE
1 2 3 4 5
OFF 1
2
6 7 8 9 0
4
TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
1— Engine Speed Dial
2— Auto-Idle Switch
3— Travel Speed Switch
4— Power Mode Button
Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position.
Turn auto-idle switch (2) to A/I OFF position.
Turn travel speed switch (3) to fast speed (rabbit) mode.
Press power mode button (4) until PWR (power) mode is displayed on monitor.
6
8
7
5
6
TX1120481 —UN—17AUG12
Tracking Check
5— Distance of Mistrack
6— Acceleration and Deceleration Zone (approximately): 3—5 m (10—16 ft.)
7— Test Line (distance): 20 m (66 ft.)
8— Track Print
Continued on next page
4-2-38
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-46/56
081214
PN=232
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Operate machine at full travel forward speed on a flat and level surface approximately
30 m (99 ft.).
NOTE: When machine mistracks right, hydraulic pump 1 circuit oil flow may be
less than specification. When machine mistracks left, hydraulic pump
2 circuit oil flow may be less than specification.
Observe direction of mistrack.
Create a straight test line 20 m (66 ft.) (7) long between two points on track print (8).
Measure and record greatest distance of mistrack (5) between inside edge of track
print and test line.
Repeat procedure in reverse travel.
YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does machine mistrack less than 200 mm (7.88 in.)?
NO: See your authorized
dealer.
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-47/56
Travel System Tracking
Checks While Operating
a Dig Function
PUSH
MENU/SET
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
/VOL
/PWR
H
L
PUSH
VOL/PWR
min -1
L
1
H
2
A/I A/I
ON OFF
OFF
INT
N
O
ON
OFF
ACC
START
3
PUSH
MODE
1 2 3 4 5
OFF 1
2
6 7 8 9 0
4
TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
1— Engine Speed Dial
2— Auto-Idle Switch
3— Travel Speed Switch
4— Power Mode Button
NOTE: Machine will slow down during this test.
Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position.
Turn travel speed switch (3) to fast speed (rabbit) mode.
Operate machine at full speed forward on a flat and level surface.
After machine is moving, actuate arm out from neutral to full actuation and extend
the arm.
YES: See your authorized
dealer.
LOOK: Does machine mistrack excessively when the arm is extended?
NO: Go to next check.
Continued on next page
4-2-39
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-48/56
081214
PN=233
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Travel System
Maneuverability Check
PUSH
MENU/SET
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
/VOL
/PWR
H
L
PUSH
VOL/PWR
min -1
L
1
H
2
A/I A/I
ON OFF
OFF
INT
N
O
ON
OFF
ACC
START
3
PUSH
MODE
1 2 3 4 5
OFF 1
2
6 7 8 9 0
4
TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
1— Engine Speed Dial
2— Auto-Idle Switch
3— Travel Speed Switch
4— Power Mode Button
Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position.
Turn travel speed switch (3) to fast speed (rabbit) mode.
Drive machine at full speed forward down a slope.
Turn in each direction.
LOOK: Does each track slow down in response to pedal or lever movement in order to
turn?
Repeat the procedure in reverse travel.
Turn travel speed switch to fast speed (rabbit) mode.
Drive machine at full speed in reverse down a slope.
Turn in each direction.
YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does each track slow down in response to pedal or lever movement in order to NO: See your authorized
turn?
dealer.
Continued on next page
4-2-40
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-49/56
081214
PN=234
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Cycle Times
Check—160GLC only
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from unexpected machine movement.
Clear all persons from the area before operating machine.
NOTE: Warm hydraulic oil to operating temperature for this check.
PUSH
MENU/SET
5
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
L
/VOL
/PWR
H
PUSH
VOL/PWR
min -1
L
1
H
2
A/I A/I
ON OFF
OFF
INT
N
O
ON
OFF
ACC
START
3
PUSH
MODE
1 2 3 4 5
OFF 1
2
6 7 8 9 0
4
TX1136301 —UN—10MAY13
Switch Panel
1— Engine Speed Dial
2— Auto-Idle Switch
3— Travel Speed Switch
4— Power Mode Button
5— Monitor Dial
Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position.
Turn auto-idle switch (2) to A/I OFF position.
Press power mode button (4) until PWR (power) mode is displayed on monitor.
Rotate monitor dial (5) to highlight and select Dig mode from Work Mode menu.
TX1095475 —UN—11AUG11
Boom
TX1095499 —UN—28JUN13
Arm, Bucket, Swing
Move machine to position shown for each test.
Record cycle time for each function.
Continued on next page
4-2-41
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-50/56
081214
PN=235
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Specification
Boom Raise (cylinder extend)—Cycle
Time............................................................................................................ 2.7—3.3 sec.
Boom Lower (cylinder retract)—Cycle
Time............................................................................................................ 1.9—2.5 sec.
Arm In (cylinder extend)—Cycle Time........................................................ 3.3—3.9 sec.
Arm Out (cylinder retract)—Cycle Time...................................................... 2.3—2.9 sec.
Bucket Load (cylinder extend)—Cycle
Time............................................................................................................ 2.9—3.5 sec.
Bucket Dump (cylinder retract)—Cycle
Time............................................................................................................ 1.7—2.3 sec.
Swing Left or Right, 3 Revolutions—Cycle Time.................................................................................................. 12.0—15.0 sec.
Drive 20 m (65 ft.) (check in forward and
reverse with travel speed switch in FAST
position)—Cycle Time............................................................................. 13.0—14.2 sec.
Drive 20 m (65 ft.) (check in forward
and reverse with travel speed switch in
SLOW position)—Cycle Time................................................................. 20.0—22.0 sec.
Track Raised for 3 Revolutions (check
in forward and reverse with travel mode
switch in FAST position)—Cycle Time.................................................... 14.9—18.9 sec.
Track Raised for 3 Revolutions (check
in forward and reverse with travel mode
switch in SLOW position)—Cycle Time................................................... 24.2—28.2 sec.
YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does machine perform within specifications?
NO: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page
4-2-42
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-51/56
081214
PN=236
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Cycle Times
Check—180GLC only
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from unexpected machine movement.
Clear all persons from the area before operating machine.
NOTE: Warm hydraulic oil to operating temperature for this check.
PUSH
MENU/SET
5
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
L
/VOL
/PWR
H
PUSH
VOL/PWR
min -1
L
1
H
2
A/I A/I
ON OFF
OFF
INT
N
O
ON
OFF
ACC
START
3
PUSH
MODE
1 2 3 4 5
OFF 1
2
6 7 8 9 0
4
TX1136301 —UN—10MAY13
Switch Panel
1— Engine Speed Dial
2— Auto-Idle Switch
3— Travel Speed Switch
4— Power Mode Button
5— Monitor Dial
Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position.
Turn auto-idle switch (2) to A/I OFF position.
Press power mode button (4) until PWR (power) mode is displayed on monitor.
Rotate monitor dial (5) to highlight and select Dig mode from Work Mode menu.
TX1095475 —UN—11AUG11
Boom
TX1095499 —UN—28JUN13
Arm, Bucket, Swing
Move machine to position shown for each test.
Record cycle time for each function.
Continued on next page
4-2-43
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-52/56
081214
PN=237
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Specification
Boom Raise (cylinder extend)—Cycle
Time............................................................................................................ 3.1—3.7 sec.
Boom Lower (cylinder retract)—Cycle
Time............................................................................................................ 1.9—2.5 sec.
Arm In (cylinder extend)—Cycle Time........................................................ 3.3—3.9 sec.
Arm Out (cylinder retract)—Cycle Time...................................................... 2.4—3.0 sec.
Bucket Load (cylinder extend)—Cycle
Time............................................................................................................ 2.9—3.5 sec.
Bucket Dump (cylinder retract)—Cycle
Time............................................................................................................ 1.7—2.3 sec.
Swing Left or Right, 3 Revolutions—Cycle Time.................................................................................................. 11.8—13.8 sec.
Drive 20 m (65 ft.) (check in forward and
reverse with travel speed switch in FAST
position)—Cycle Time............................................................................. 13.0—14.2 sec.
Drive 20 m (65 ft.) (check in forward
and reverse with travel speed switch in
SLOW position)—Cycle Time................................................................. 20.0—22.0 sec.
Track Raised for 3 Revolutions (check
in forward and reverse with travel mode
switch in FAST position)—Cycle Time.................................................... 16.1—20.1 sec.
Track Raised for 3 Revolutions (check
in forward and reverse with travel mode
switch in SLOW position)—Cycle Time................................................... 26.0—30.0 sec.
YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does machine perform within specifications?
NO: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page
4-2-44
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-53/56
081214
PN=238
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Heater and Air
Conditioning Circuit
Check
PUSH
MENU/SET
5
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
L
/VOL
/PWR
H
PUSH
VOL/PWR
6
min -1
L
H
A/I A/I
ON OFF
OFF
INT
ACC
N
O
ON
OFF
START
PUSH
MODE
1 2 3 4 5
OFF 1
2
6 7 8 9 0
TX1086866 —UN—13JAN11
Switch Panel
5— Temperature Control/Mode Switch
6— Blower Speed Switch
Start engine and warm to normal operating temperature.
Turn temperature control/mode switch (5) clockwise to maximum heat position.
FEEL: Does warm air come from the vents?
Turn temperature control/mode switch counterclockwise to maximum cold position.
YES: Go to next check.
LISTEN: Does air conditioner compressor clutch solenoid “click”?
NO: Heater does not
operate. Check air
conditioner and heater 20 A
fuse (F3).
FEEL: Does cool air come from the vents?
IF OK: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page
4-2-45
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-54/56
081214
PN=239
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Heater And Air
Conditioner Controls
Check (Automatic
Temperature Control)
PUSH
MENU/SET
PUSH
5
MODE
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
L
/VOL
/PWR
H
PUSH
VOL/PWR
6
min -1
L
H
A/I A/I
ON OFF
OFF
INT
ACC
N
O
ON
OFF
START
PUSH
MODE
1 2 3 4 5
OFF 1
2
6 7 8 9 0
TX1086866 —UN—13JAN11
Switch Panel
50.0 h
ECO 10:00
AM
F
H
E
C
8
9
AUTO
10
FM
24.0˚C
VOL
CH1
81.3 ST
MHz
7
TX1087006 —UN—17JAN11
Monitor-Air Conditioner and Heater Display
5— Temperature Control/Mode Switch
6— Blower Speed Switch
7— Fan Speed
8— AUTO Display
9— Vent Position
10— Temperature Setting
Key ON, press blower speed switch (6).
Start engine and warm to normal operating temperature.
Press blower speed switch.
LISTEN: Does air conditioner compressor clutch solenoid “click”?
LOOK: Does AUTO display (8), display on monitor?
LOOK: Does monitor display vent position (9), fan speed (7), and temperature setting
(10)?
Continued on next page
4-2-46
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-55/56
081214
PN=240
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Turn temperature control/mode switch (5) clockwise to maximum heat position.
LOOK: Does vent position change?
LOOK: Does temperature setting increase?
FEEL: Does warm air come from the vents?
Turn temperature control/mode switch counterclockwise to maximum cold position.
LOOK: Does vent position change?
LOOK: Does temperature setting decrease?
FEEL: Does cool air come from the vents?
Press blower speed switch.
LISTEN: Does air conditioner compressor clutch solenoid “click”? (air conditioner and
heater are ON in manual mode.)
LOOK: Does AUTO display go OFF?
Turn temperature control/mode switch clockwise to maximum heat position.
LOOK: Does vent position change?
LOOK: Does temperature setting increase?
FEEL: Does warm air come from the vents?
Turn temperature control/mode switch counterclockwise to maximum cold position.
LOOK: Does vent position change?
LOOK: Does temperature setting decrease?
FEEL: Does cool air come from the vents?
Press temperature control/mode switch.
LOOK: Does vent position change?
Repeat for all four vent positions.
LOOK: Does vent position change each time switch is pressed?
YES: Checks complete.
Press blower speed switch.
NO: Heater fan does
not blow air. Check air
conditioner and heater 20 A
fuse (F3).
LOOK: Are air conditioner and heater OFF? (press blower speed switch to start air
conditioner and heater).
IF OK: See your authorized
dealer.
DB84312,00000A3 -19-04JUN14-56/56
4-2-47
081214
PN=241
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Procedure
Step 1. Operational Checkout Procedure
NOTE: Troubleshooting charts are arranged from the
simplest to verify, to least likely, more difficult
to verify. When diagnosing a problem, use
all possible means to isolate the problem to a
single component or system. Use the following
steps to diagnose problems:
Step 2. Troubleshooting Charts
Step 3. Adjustments
Step 4. See your authorized John Deere dealer.
TX,TROUBLESHOOT -19-20JAN11-1/1
4-3-1
081214
PN=242
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting
Engine
Symptom
Problem
Solution
Engine Cranks But Will Not Start Or No fuel
Hard To Start
Incorrect fuel
Add correct fuel. Bleed air.
Use correct fuel.
Fuel filter clogged
Replace filter. Bleed air. Clean fuel
tank inlet screen.
Primary fuel filter and water separator Check primary fuel filter and water
clogged or not primed
separator. Replace filter, prime filter,
and bleed air from fuel system.
Engine Will Not Crank
Water in fuel tank
Check, drain, and refill.
Low battery power
Charge or replace battery.
Slow cranking speed (poor electrical
connection)
Clean and tighten battery and starter
connections.
Incorrect engine oil
Drain crankcase and refill with correct
oil.
Low battery power
Charge or replace battery.
Corroded or loose battery connections Clean battery terminals and
connections.
Engine Knocks, Runs Irregularly,
Or Stops
Excessive Fuel Consumption
Fuse
Check ECU fuse (F8) and POWER
ON 5 amp fuse (F17).
Air filter clogged
Clean or replace elements. Clean
system.
Fuel filters clogged
Replace filters. Bleed air. Clean fuel
tank inlet screen.
Air in fuel system
Bleed air from fuel system.
Contaminated fuel
Drain tank. Add clean fuel. Replace
primary fuel filter and water separator.
Engine speed control system
See authorized dealer.
Air cleaner restricted or dirty
Replace air cleaner element as
required.
Poor fuel quality
Drain fuel and replace with quality fuel
of the proper grade.
Leaks in fuel supply system
Locate source of leak and repair as
required.
Continued on next page
4-3-2
DB84312,00000A7 -19-03JUN14-1/3
081214
PN=243
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting
Symptom
Excessive Oil Consumption
Engine Idles Poorly
Auto-Idle Does Not Work
Engine Not Developing Full Power
Engine Oil Pressure Low
Problem
Solution
Exhaust filter restricted—if equipped
See your authorized dealer.
Poor fuel quality
Drain fuel and replace with quality fuel
of the proper grade.
Air cleaner restricted or dirty
Replace air cleaner element as
required.
Worn engine
See authorized dealer.
Poor fuel quality
Drain fuel and replace with quality fuel
of the proper grade.
Air in fuel system
Bleed air from fuel system.
Air filters
Clean or replace engine air filters.
Fuel filters
Clean or replace fuel filters.
Engine speed control system
See your authorized dealer.
Exhaust filter restricted—if equipped
See your authorized dealer.
Idle is not above 1000 rpm
Advance engine speed dial to high
idle.
Auto-idle is off
Turn auto-idle to the A/I ON position.
Hydraulic functions operating
Release hydraulic functions for 10
seconds.
Air filters clogged
Clean or replace filter elements.
Fuel filter clogged
Change filter. Bleed air.
Contaminated fuel
Drain fuel tank. Change primary fuel
filter and water separator, change fuel
filter, bleed air. Add clean fuel.
Incorrect fuel
Use correct fuel.
Fuel filter not installed correctly
Install new filter and o-ring. Ensure
proper o-ring seal.
Exhaust filter restricted—if equipped
See your authorized dealer.
Worn engine
See authorized dealer.
Hydraulic issue
See authorized dealer.
Low crankcase oil level
Fill crankcase to proper oil level.
Continued on next page
4-3-3
DB84312,00000A7 -19-03JUN14-2/3
081214
PN=244
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting
Symptom
Engine Oil Pressure High
Problem
Solution
Excessive oil temperature
See authorized dealer.
Incorrect oil
Drain crankcase and refill with correct
oil.
Worn engine
See authorized dealer.
Incorrect oil
Drain crankcase and refill with correct
oil.
Engine Coolant Temperature Above Plugged air filter
Normal
Lack of coolant in cooling system
Clean air filter, replace if necessary.
Fill cooling system to proper level.
Radiator core and/or side screens dirty Clean radiator as required.
Engine Emits Excessive Black or
Gray Exhaust Smoke
Engine Emits Excessive White
Exhaust Smoke
Engine overloaded
Reduce engine load.
Too low crankcase oil level
Fill crankcase to proper oil level.
Loose recovery tank cap
Secure cap properly.
Incorrect fuel
Use correct fuel.
Clogged or dirty air intake or exhaust
system
Exhaust filter is cracked or
damaged—if equipped
Wrong fuel
Clean air intake and exhaust system.
Cold engine
Run engine until warm.
Exhaust filter is cracked or
damaged—if equipped
See your authorized dealer.
See your authorized dealer.
Use correct fuel.
DB84312,00000A7 -19-03JUN14-3/3
4-3-4
081214
PN=245
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting
Hydraulic System
Symptom
Problem
Solution
No Hydraulic Functions
Pilot shutoff lever
Place pilot shutoff in unlocked
(DOWN) position.
Low hydraulic oil
Add correct oil.
Fuse
Check START 5 amp fuse (F7), and
replace if necessary.
Clogged suction filter
Clean filter.
Low oil level
Fill hydraulic tank oil to full mark.
Cold oil
Perform cold weather warmup.
Incorrect oil
Use correct oil.
Engine speed too slow
Increase speed.
Suction screen clogged
Inspect and clean.
Hydraulic tank cap/cover
Replace cap/cover.
Incorrect oil
Use correct oil.
Clogged radiator or oil cooler
Clean and straighten fins.
Radiator screen clogged
Clean screen.
Clogged filters
Install new filters.
Low oil level
Fill tank to full mark.
Contaminated oil
Drain hydraulic tank and refill with
correct oil.
High or low oil level
Correct level.
Incorrect oil
Drain hydraulic tank and refill with
correct oil.
Air leak on line from reservoir
Repair leak.
Water in oil
Change oil.
Kinks or dents in oil lines
Check lines.
Pilot shutoff lever
Place pilot shutoff in unlocked
(DOWN) position.
Pilot control hoses pinched or kinked
Inspect and correct.
Hydraulic Functions Are Slow or
Have Little or No Power
Hydraulic Oil Overheats
Oil Foams
No Swing Function
Continued on next page
4-3-5
DB84312,00000C6 -19-10JAN12-1/2
081214
PN=246
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting
Symptom
Problem
Solution
Swing Function Is Jerky
Lack of grease in swing bearing
Fill with grease.
Rocks or mud jammed in track frame
Remove or repair.
Pilot control valve hoses pinched or
kinked
Engine speed too slow
Inspect and correct.
Increase speed.
Track sag adjustment
Adjust track sag.
Rocks or mud jammed in track frame
Remove and repair.
Water separator clogged
Drain. Change element.
Slow Travel Speed Only
Travel Is Jerky
Engine Stops When Travel Or
Control Lever Actuated
NOTE: If any other problems are encountered which
require special tools or machine knowledge to
correct, see your authorized dealer.
DB84312,00000C6 -19-10JAN12-2/2
4-3-6
081214
PN=247
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting
Electrical System
Symptom
Problem
Solution
No Electrical Functions
Battery undercharged or dead
Recharge or replace.
Fuse malfunction
Check ALT 65 amp fuse (F60) and
BAT 45 amp fuse (F61), and replace if
necessary.
Batteries Undercharged
Loose or corroded connections
Clean and tighten or replace batteries.
Batteries Will Not Take A Charge
Loose or corroded connections
Clean and tighten.
Low battery power
Replace both batteries.
Cracked battery case
Replace battery.
High ambient temperature
Refill with distilled water.
No battery hold down clamp
Replace both batteries and install hold
down clamp.
Loose battery hold down clamp
Replace both batteries and install hold
down clamp.
Frozen battery
Replace both batteries. Keep batteries
fully charged in cold weather.
Low water level
Add distilled water.
Dirty or wet battery top, causing
discharge
Corroded or loose battery cables
Clean and wipe battery top dry.
Battery Uses Too Much Water
Cracked Battery Case
Low Battery Output
Starter Will Not Turn
Clean and tighten battery cables.
Broken battery post
Wiggle battery post by hand. If
post wiggles or turns, replace both
batteries.
Battery undercharged or dead
Recharge or replace both batteries.
Battery cables making poor
connections
Fuse
Clean connections.
Starter
Repair or replace starter.
Check Controller Key Switch Signal
10 A Fuse (Marked POW ON), and
replace if necessary.
Starter pinion jammed in flywheel gear Repair or replace starter, or ring gear.
Starter Turns But Will Not Crank
Engine
Engine Cranks Slowly
Starter
Repair or replace starter.
Battery cables damaged or broken
internally
Inspect and replace cables.
Continued on next page
4-3-7
DB84312,00000A8 -19-03JUN14-1/2
081214
PN=248
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting
Symptom
Starter Continues To Run After
Engine Starts
Problem
Solution
Battery or starter cable connections
loose or corroded
Battery discharged or will not hold a
charge
Starter
Clean and tighten connections.
Low battery voltage
Recharge or replace both batteries.
Starter
Repair or replace starter.
Key switch malfunction
Disconnect battery ground. Replace
key switch.
Starter relay
Disconnect battery ground. Replace
starter relay.
Recharge or replace both batteries.
Repair or replace starter.
Charging Indicator Light On,
Engine Running
Loose or corroded electrical
Inspect, clean, or tighten electrical
connections on battery, ground strap, connections.
starter, or alternator
Fuse
Check CONTROLLER 5 amp fuse
(F10), ECU fuse (F8), and ALT 65
amp fuse (F60). Replace if necessary.
Noisy Alternator
Worn drive belt
Replace belt.
Worn pulleys
Replace pulleys and belt.
Pulley misaligned
Adjust alternator mount.
Alternator bearing
Loosen alternator belts. Turn pulley
by hand. If any roughness is felt,
repair alternator.
No Monitor Panel Indicators Or
Gauges Work
Fuse
Check CONTROLLER 5 amp fuse
(F10), and replace if necessary.
No Switch Panel Switches Or
Engine Speed Dial Work
Fuse
Check POWER ON 5 amp fuse
(F17), MONITOR 5 amp fuse (F14),
SOLENOID 20 amp fuse (F4), and
BACK UP 10 amp fuse (F9), and
replace if necessary.
DB84312,00000A8 -19-03JUN14-2/2
4-3-8
081214
PN=249
Miscellaneous—Storage
Prepare Machine for Storage
T5813AM —UN—09FEB89
IMPORTANT: Avoid machine damage, do not use
biodiesel during machine storage. When
using biodiesel blends, switch to petroleum
diesel for long term storage.
1. Before storage, operate engine on at least one
complete tank of petroleum diesel fuel to purge the
fuel system. Ensure that the fuel tank is full during
storage to prevent water build up due to condensation.
NOTE: For blends up to and including B20, it is
recommended that biodiesel be used within three
months of its manufacture. For blends greater
than B20, it is recommended that the biodiesel
be used within 45 days. The poor oxidation
stability characteristic of biodiesel can result in
long-term storage problems. John Deere does not
recommend using biodiesel in engines powering
standby applications or vehicles operating on a
seasonal basis. Consult your John Deere dealer or
fuel supplier for additives to improve fuel storage
and performance of biodiesel fuels. These additives
must be added to the biodiesel close to its time
of production for them to be effective.
2. Repair worn or damaged parts. Install new parts, if
necessary, to avoid needless delays later.
3. Replace air cleaner elements.
IMPORTANT: High pressure washing greater than
1379 kPa (13.8 bar) (200 psi) can damage freshly
painted finishes. Paint should be allowed to
air dry for 30 days minimum after receipt of
machine before cleaning parts or machines
with high pressure. Use low pressure wash
operations until 30 days have elapsed.
4. Wash the machine. Use low pressure wash operations
(less than 1379 kPa (13.8 bar) (200 psi) until 30 days
after receipt of machine have elapsed. Paint areas to
prevent rust. Replace decals, where needed.
Prepare Machine for Storage
6. Store machine in a dry, protected place. If stored
outside, cover with a waterproof material.
IMPORTANT: LPS 3 Rust Inhibitor can destroy
painted finish. DO NOT spray LPS 3 Rust
Inhibitor on painted areas.
7. Retract all hydraulic cylinders, if possible. If not, coat
exposed cylinder rods with LPS® 3 Rust Inhibitor.
8. Place a DO NOT OPERATE tag on the right control
lever.
9. Lubricate all grease points.
NOTE: If the batteries are kept disconnected for more than
one month or when the batteries are reconnected,
contact your nearest John Deere dealer. Resetting
of the information controller (ICX) may be required.
10. Remove the batteries and store in a dry, protected
place after charging fully. If not removed, disconnect
the negative battery cable from the (—) terminal.
11. Add a fuel stabilizer additive and top off fuel tank with
fuel to prevent condensation.
12. Drain water separator.
13. Remove keys and lock all covers and doors.
5. Apply oil to track chains. Run machine back and forth
several times. Park machine on a hard surface to
prevent tracks from freezing to ground.
LPS is a trademark of the Holt Lloyd Corporation.
ER93822,000007D -19-24FEB14-1/1
4-4-1
081214
PN=250
Miscellaneous—Storage
Monthly Storage Procedure
T6191AA —UN—18OCT88
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury or death
from asphyxiation. Engine exhaust fumes
can cause sickness or death. Start engine
ONLY in a well-ventilated area.
1. Drain water and sediment from fuel tank when air
temperature is above freezing.
2. Remove LPS 3® Rust Inhibitor from cylinder rods with
a cleaning solvent.
Clean Cylinder Rods
LPS 3 Rust Inhibitor is a trademark of Illinois Tool Works.
VD76477,0000003 -19-04JAN13-1/2
T6181AU —UN—18OCT88
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible engine damage.
During cold temperatures, check fluidity of
engine oil on dipstick. If the oil appears waxy
and/or jelly-like rather than liquid, DO NOT
attempt to start engine. Use external heat source
to warm the crankcase until oil appears fluid.
3. Check all fluid levels. If low, check for leaks and add
oil as required.
4. Check belts.
5. Check condition of all hoses and connections.
6. Check battery electrolyte level. Charge and install
battery.
Check Oil on Dipstick
7. For machines with tires, check condition of tires and
tire pressure.
run until it reaches operating temperature. Run at 1/2
speed for 5 minutes. Do not run at fast or slow idle.
For machines with tracks, check condition of tracks
and track sag.
• If engine does not start or runs poorly after starting,
On crawler machines with non sealed-and-lubricated
track chains, apply oil to the pin-to-bushing joints. Run
machine back and forth several times.
8. Park machine on a hard surface to prevent tracks from
freezing to ground.
9. Fill fuel tank.
change fuel filters. Bleed fuel system.
12. Operate all controls, levers, seat adjustments, etc.
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from
unexpected machine movement. Clear the
area of all persons before running machine
through the operation procedure.
13. Make sure the area is clear to allow for movement.
Cycle all hydraulic functions several times. Check
condition of all hoses and connections.
10. Pre-lubricate turbocharger bearings, if equipped:
a. Disconnect fuel shutoff fuse.
14. Park the machine with cylinder rods retracted, if
possible. Shut engine off.
b. Crank engine for 10 seconds.
c. Connect fuel shutoff fuse.
11. Inspect engine compartment, and remove any foreign
material that may have accumulated. Start engine and
15. Apply LPS 3 Rust Inhibitor to exposed cylinder rod
areas.
VD76477,0000003 -19-04JAN13-2/2
4-4-2
081214
PN=251
Miscellaneous—Machine Numbers
Record Product Identification Number (PIN)
Purchase Date
TX1160624 —UN—13MAY14
Product Identification Number (PIN)
NOTE: Record all 17 characters of the product
identification number (PIN).
The PIN plate (1) is located on the front right corner of
the operator's station frame.
1— PIN Plate
TX1156411 —UN—27MAR14
PIN Plate Location—Early Production
PIN Plate Location—Late Production
KR46761,0000C4F -19-19MAY14-1/1
Record Engine Serial Number
Engine Serial Number
TX1105031 —UN—07JAN12
The engine serial number plate (3) is located on the
engine behind the open crankcase ventilation (OCV) filter.
3— Engine Serial Number Plate
Engine Serial Number Plate
DB84312,00000C2 -19-12JAN12-1/1
4-5-1
081214
PN=252
Miscellaneous—Machine Numbers
Record Travel Motor Serial Numbers
Travel Motor Serial Number
Travel Motor Serial Number
TX1086495A —UN—04JAN11
NOTE: Remove cover to access travel motor
serial number plate (1).
The travel motor serial number plate (1) is located behind
the travel motor cover.
1— Travel Motor Serial Number
Plate
Travel Motor Serial Number (left side shown)
ER79617,0000D8E -19-07JAN11-1/1
Record Swing Motor Serial Number
Swing Motor Serial Number
The swing motor serial number plate (1) is located on top
of the swing motor.
TX1103245A —UN—09DEC11
1— Swing Motor Serial Number
Plate
Swing Motor Serial Number
DB84312,0000084 -19-14DEC11-1/1
4-5-2
081214
PN=253
Miscellaneous—Machine Numbers
Record Hydraulic Coupler Serial Number—If
Equipped
Hydraulic Coupler Serial Number
The hydraulic coupler serial number plate (1) is located on
the front side of the coupler.
TX1086497A —UN—04JAN11
1— Hydraulic Coupler Serial
Number Plate
TX1086500A —UN—04JAN11
Hydraulic Coupler Serial Number Plate Location
Hydraulic Coupler Serial Number Plate
ER79617,0000D8F -19-29APR14-1/1
Hydraulic Pump Serial Number
Hydraulic Pump Serial Number
TX1103246A —UN—09DEC11
Open the right service door to access the hydraulic pump.
The hydraulic pump serial number plate (1) is located on
the front of the hydraulic pump.
1— Hydraulic Pump Serial
Number Plate
Hydraulic Pump Serial Number
DB84312,0000085 -19-14DEC11-1/1
4-5-3
081214
PN=254
Miscellaneous—Machine Numbers
1. Maintain in a secure location an up-to-date inventory
of all product and component serial numbers.
2. Regularly verify that identification plates have not
been removed. Report any evidence of tampering to
law enforcement agencies and order duplicate plates.
3. Other steps you can take:
- Mark your machine with your own numbering system
- Take color photographs from several angles of each
machine
TS1680 —UN—09DEC03
Keep Proof of Ownership
DX,SECURE1 -19-18NOV03-1/1
1. Install vandal-proof devices.
2. When machine is in storage:
- Lower equipment to the ground
- Set wheels to widest position to make loading more
difficult
- Remove any keys and batteries
3. When parking indoors, put large equipment in front of
exits and lock your storage buildings.
4. When parking outdoors, store in a well-lighted and
fenced area.
5. Make note of suspicious activity and report any thefts
immediately to law enforcement agencies.
6. Notify your John Deere dealer of any losses.
TS230 —UN—24MAY89
Keep Machines Secure
DX,SECURE2 -19-18NOV03-1/1
4-5-4
081214
PN=255
Miscellaneous—Specifications
160GLC Engine Specifications
Item
Measurement
Specification
John Deere PowerTech PVX 4.5 L
Type
4-Stroke Cycle, Turbocharged, with
air-to-air charge air cooler
106 x 127 mm
4.17 x 5.0 in.
4
4.5 L
275 cu in.
Bore And Stroke
Cylinders
Displacement
Net Torque @ 1400 RPM
Cooling Fan
508 N·m
375 lb.-ft.
16.5:1
90 kW Net SAE
121 hp Net SAE
Variable Hydraulic Suction
Electrical system
Batteries (2) 12 volt
24 Volt
440 Minutes Reserve Capacity
Compression Ratio
Power At 2200 RPM
DB84312,00000BA -19-10JAN12-1/1
180GLC Engine Specifications
Item
Measurement
Specification
John Deere PowerTech PVX 4.5 L
Type
4-Stroke Cycle, Turbocharged, with
air-to-air charge air cooler
106 x 127 mm
4.17 x 5.0 in.
Bore And Stroke
Cylinders
Displacement
Compression Ratio
Power At 2200 RPM
4
4.5 L
275 cu in.
524 N·m
387 lb.-ft.
16.5:1
90 kW Net SAE
Cooling Fan
Electrical system
Batteries (2) 12 volt
121 hp Net SAE
Variable Hydraulic Suction
24 Volt
440 Minutes Reserve Capacity
Net Torque @ 1400 RPM
DB84312,00000CC -19-10JAN12-1/1
4-6-1
081214
PN=256
Miscellaneous—Specifications
160GLC and 180GLC Drain and Refill
Capacities
Item
Measurement
Specification
Fuel Tank
Capacity
320.0 L
84.5 gal.
Cooling System
Capacity
23.5 L
6.2 gal.
Engine
Oil Capacity, Including Filter Change
14.5 L
3.8 gal.
Hydraulic Tank
Oil Capacity
125.0 L
33.0 gal.
Hydraulic System
Oil Capacity
210.0 L
55.5 gal.
Swing Gear Case
Oil Capacity
6.2 L
1.6 gal.
Travel Gear Case (each)
Oil Capacity
6.8 L
1.7 gal.
Pump Drive Gear Case
Oil Capacity
0.9 L
1.0 qt
DB84312,00000BB -19-24FEB12-1/1
4-6-2
081214
PN=257
Miscellaneous—Specifications
160GLC Machine Specifications
5
4
6
12
3
7
9
1
8
TX1001680 —UN—03JAN06
2
10
11
TX1001680
160GLC Excavator
1— Sprocket Center To Idler
Center
2— Undercarriage Length
3— Counterweight Clearance
4— Rear End Swing Radius
5— Overall Width
6— Cab Height
7— Minimum Ground Clearance
NOTE: Specifications and design subject to change
without notice. Wherever applicable, specifications
are in accordance with PCSA and SAE standards.
Except where otherwise noted these specifications
are based on a machine equipped with 700 mm
8— Center Of Sprocket To Center 11— Overall Length
Of Sprocket
12— Transport Height
9— Track Shoe Width
10— Undercarriage Width
(28 in.) shoes, 3210 kg (7077 lb.) counterweight,
3.10 m (10 ft 2 in.) arm, 623 kg (1373 lb.) 0.62
m 3 (0.81 yd. 3) bucket, full fuel tank, 79 kg (175
lb.) operator and standard equipment.
Item
Measurement
Specification
1—Sprocket Center To Idler Center
Distance
3098.8 mm
10 ft 2 in
2—Undercarriage
Length
3911.6 mm
12 ft 10 in.
3—Counterweight Clearance
Distance
1041.4 mm
3 ft 5 in.
4—Rear End Swing Radius
Distance
2540.0 mm
8 ft 4 in.
5—Overall Width—With Triple
Semi-Grouser Shoes 24-in.
(600 mm)
Distance
2590.8 mm
8 ft 6 in.
6—Cab
Height
2946.4 mm
9 ft 8 in.
7—Minimum Ground Clearance
Distance
482.6 mm
1 ft 7 in.
Continued on next page
4-6-3
DB84312,00000BC -19-04JUN14-1/2
081214
PN=258
Miscellaneous—Specifications
Item
Measurement
Specification
8—Center Of Sprocket To Center
Of Sprocket
Distance
1981.2 mm
6 ft 6 in.
9—Track Shoe
Width
600 mm (24 in.)
700 mm (28 in.)
10—Undercarriage
Width
With 700 mm shoes: 2692.4 mm
With 28 in. shoes: 8 ft 10 in.
11—Machine
Overall Length
With 2590.8 mm Arm: 8610.6 mm
With 8 ft 6 in. Arm: 28 ft 3 in.
With 3098.8 mm Arm: 8661.4 mm
With 10 ft 2 in. Arm: 28 ft 5 in.
12—Machine
Transport Height
With 2590.8 mm Arm: 2870.2 mm
With 8 ft 6 in. Arm: 9 ft 5 in.)
With 3098.8 mm Arm: 3098.8 mm
With 10 ft 2 in. Arm: 10 ft 2 in.)
Machine
Operating Weight
18 017 kg
39 685 lb.
DB84312,00000BC -19-04JUN14-2/2
4-6-4
081214
PN=259
Miscellaneous—Specifications
180GLC Machine Specifications
5
4
6
12
3
7
9
1
8
TX1001680 —UN—03JAN06
2
10
11
TX1001680
180GLC Excavator
1— Sprocket Center To Idler
Center
2— Undercarriage Length
3— Counterweight Clearance
4— Rear End Swing Radius
5— Overall Width
6— Cab Height
7— Minimum Ground Clearance
NOTE: Specifications and design subject to change
without notice. Wherever applicable, specifications
are in accordance with PCSA and SAE standards.
Except where otherwise noted these specifications
are based on a machine equipped with 700 mm
8— Center Of Sprocket To Center 11— Overall Length
Of Sprocket
12— Transport Height
9— Track Shoe Width
10— Undercarriage Width
(28 in.) shoes, 3910 kg (8620 lb.) counterweight,
3.21 m (10 ft 6 in.) arm, 785 kg (1731 lb.) 0.83
m 3 (1.09 yd.3) bucket, full fuel tank, 79 kg (175
lb.) operator and standard equipment.
Item
Measurement
Specification
1—Sprocket Center To Idler Center
Distance
3378.2 mm
11 ft 1 in.
2—Undercarriage
Length
4165.6 mm
13 ft 8 in.
3—Counterweight Clearance
Distance
1041.4 mm
3 ft 5 in.
4—Rear End Swing Radius
Distance
2540.0 mm
8 ft 4 in.
5—Overall Width—With Triple
Semi-Grouser Shoes 24-in.
(600 mm)
Distance
2590.8 mm
8 ft 6 in.
6—Cab
Height
2946.4 mm
9 ft 8 in.
7—Minimum Ground Clearance
Distance
457.2 mm
1 ft 6 in.
Continued on next page
4-6-5
DB84312,00000CD -19-04JUN14-1/2
081214
PN=260
Miscellaneous—Specifications
Item
Measurement
Specification
8—Center Of Sprocket To Center
Of Sprocket
Distance
1981.2 mm
6 ft 6 in.
9—Track Shoe
Width
600 mm (24 in.)
700 mm (28 in.)
800 mm (32 in.)
10—Undercarriage
Width
With 800 mm shoes: 2794.0 mm
With 32 in. shoes: 9 ft 2 in.
11—Machine
Overall Length
With 2692.4 mm Arm: 9042.4 mm
With 8 ft 10 in. Arm: 29 ft 8 in.
With 3200.4 mm Arm: 9042.4 mm
With 10 ft 6 in. Arm: 29 ft 8 in.
12—Machine
Transport Height
With 2692.4 mm Arm: 3073.4 mm
With 8 ft 10 in. Arm: 10 ft 1 in.)
With 3200.4 mm Arm: 3378.2 mm
With 10 ft 6 in. Arm: 11 ft 1 in.)
Machine
Operating Weight
20 120 kg
44 317 lb.
DB84312,00000CD -19-04JUN14-2/2
4-6-6
081214
PN=261
Miscellaneous—Specifications
160GLC Working Ranges
3
4
5
1
9
2
7
8
TX1001681 —UN—03JAN06
6
TX1001681
Working Ranges
1— Maximum Digging Reach
2— Maximum Digging Reach At
Ground Level
6— Maximum Digging Depth
8— Maximum Vertical Wall
7— Maximum Digging Depth (flat 9— Tail Swing Radius
bottom)
3— Minimum Swing Radius
4— Maximum Cutting Height
5— Maximum Dumping Height
NOTE: Specifications and design subject to change
without notice. Wherever applicable, specifications
are in accordance with PCSA and SAE
standards. Except where otherwise noted these
specifications are based on a machine equipped
Item
with 700 mm (28 in.) shoes, counterweight
and 3.10 m (10 ft 2 in.) arm.
Working Ranges—equipped with a 2590.8 mm (8 ft 6
in.) Arm
Measurement
Specification
Continued on next page
4-6-7
DB84312,00000BD -19-04JUN14-1/2
081214
PN=262
Miscellaneous—Specifications
Item
Measurement
Specification
1—Maximum Digging Reach
Distance
8864.6 mm
29 ft 1 in.
2—Maximum Digging Reach
At Ground Level
Distance
8712.2 mm
28 ft 7 in.
3—Minimum Swing Radius
Radius
2921.0 mm
9 ft 7 in.
4—Maximum Cutting Height
Height
8890.0 mm
29 ft 2 in.
5—Maximum Dumping Height
Height
6172.2 mm
20 ft 3 in.
6—Maximum Digging Depth
Depth
5969.0 mm
19 ft 7 in.
7—Maximum Digging Depth
(flat bottom)
Depth
5740.4 mm
18 ft 10 in.
8—Maximum Vertical Wall
Depth
5156.2 mm
16 ft 11 in.
9—Tail Swing Radius
Radius
2540.0 mm
8 ft 4 in.
Working Ranges—equipped with a 3098.8 mm (10 ft 2
in.) Arm
Item
Measurement
Specification
1—Maximum Digging Reach
Distance
9321.8 mm
30 ft 7 in.
2—Maximum Digging Reach
At Ground Level
Distance
9169.4 mm
30 ft 1 in.
3—Minimum Swing Radius
Radius
2921.0 mm
9 ft 7 in.
4—Maximum Cutting Height
Height
9118.6 mm
29 ft 11 in.
5—Maximum Dumping Height
Height
6400.8 mm
21 ft 0 in.
6—Maximum Digging Depth
Depth
6502.4 mm
21 ft 4 in.
7—Maximum Digging Depth
(flat bottom)
Depth
6273.8 mm
20 ft 7 in.
8—Maximum Vertical Wall
Depth
5689.6 mm
18 ft 8 in.
9—Tail Swing Radius
Radius
2540.0 mm
8 ft 4 in.
DB84312,00000BD -19-04JUN14-2/2
4-6-8
081214
PN=263
Miscellaneous—Specifications
180GLC Working Ranges
3
4
5
1
9
2
7
8
TX1001681 —UN—03JAN06
6
TX1001681
Working Ranges
1— Maximum Digging Reach
2— Maximum Digging Reach At
Ground Level
6— Maximum Digging Depth
8— Maximum Vertical Wall
7— Maximum Digging Depth (flat 9— Tail Swing Radius
bottom)
3— Minimum Swing Radius
4— Maximum Cutting Height
5— Maximum Dumping Height
NOTE: Specifications and design subject to change
without notice. Wherever applicable, specifications
are in accordance with PCSA and SAE
standards. Except where otherwise noted these
specifications are based on a machine equipped
Item
with 700 mm (28 in.) shoes, counterweight
and 3.21 m (10 ft 6 in.) arm.
Working Ranges—equipped with a 2692.4 mm (8 ft
10 in.) Arm
Measurement
Specification
Continued on next page
4-6-9
DB84312,00000CE -19-04JUN14-1/2
081214
PN=264
Miscellaneous—Specifications
Item
Measurement
Specification
1—Maximum Digging Reach
Distance
9423.4 mm
30 ft 11 in.
2—Maximum Digging Reach
At Ground Level
Distance
9271.0 mm
30 ft 5 in.
3—Minimum Swing Radius
Radius
3124.2 mm
10 ft 3 in.
4—Maximum Cutting Height
Height
9398.0 mm
30 ft 10 in.
5—Maximum Dumping Height
Height
6578.6 mm
21 ft 7 in.
6—Maximum Digging Depth
Depth
6578.6 mm
21 ft 7 in.
7—Maximum Digging Depth
(flat bottom)
Depth
6324.6 mm
20 ft 9 in.
8—Maximum Vertical Wall
Depth
5562.6 mm
18 ft 3 in.
9—Tail Swing Radius
Radius
2540.0 mm
8 ft 4 in.
Working Ranges—equipped with a 3200.4 mm (10 ft 6
in.) Arm
Item
Measurement
Specification
1—Maximum Digging Reach
Distance
9931.4 mm
32 ft 7 in.
2—Maximum Digging Reach
At Ground Level
Distance
9779.0 mm
32 ft 1 in.
3—Minimum Swing Radius
Radius
3124.2 mm
10 ft 3 in.
4—Maximum Cutting Height
Height
9779.0 mm
32 ft 1 in.
5—Maximum Dumping Height
Height
6934.2 mm
22 ft 9 in.
6—Maximum Digging Depth
Depth
7061.2 mm
23 ft 2 in.
7—Maximum Digging Depth
(flat bottom)
Depth
6858.0 mm
22 ft 6 in.
8—Maximum Vertical Wall
Depth
6273.8 mm
20 ft 7 in.
9—Tail Swing Radius
Radius
2540.0 mm
8 ft 4 in.
DB84312,00000CE -19-04JUN14-2/2
4-6-10
081214
PN=265
Miscellaneous—Specifications
160GLC Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.60 m (8 ft. 6 in.); Bucket: 528 kg (1164 lb.); Shoe: 600 mm
(24 in.)
Ratings are at bucket lift hook, using standard
counterweight, situated on firm, level, uniform supporting
surface.
marked with an asterisk (*) are hydraulically-limited
capacities. Remaining figures are stability-limited
capacities.
Figures do not exceed 87 percent of hydraulic capacity
or 75 percent of weight needed to tip machine. Figures
Arm: 2.60 m (8 ft. 6 in.)
Bucket: 528 kg (1164 lb.)
Shoe: 600 mm (24 in.)
Power Dig: On
LIFTING OVER FRONT
Load Point Height
m (ft.)
Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation
1.5 (5)
3.0 (10)
4.5 (15)
6.0 (20)
6.0 (20)
2850*
4.5 (15)
3.0 (10)
4100*
(8900*)
3850*
(8400*)
5400*
(11 700*)
4400*
(9550*)
6800*
(14 650*)
4300
(9200)
5800*
(13 450*)
6600
(14 200)
4150
(8950)
4100
(8850)
8400*
(17 850*)
1.5 (5)
Ground Line
-1.5 (-5)
5300*
(11 850*)
9950*
(22 800*)
6550
(14 050)
-3.0 (-10)
9850*
(22 250*)
10 550*
(22 850*)
6600
(14 200)
LIFTING OVER SIDE
Load Point Height
m (ft.)
Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation
1.5 (5)
3.0 (10)
4.5 (15)
6.0 (20)
6.0 (20)
2850*
4100*
(8900*)
2900
(6250)
4450
(9550)
2750
(5950)
4100
(8850)
2650
(5650)
5800*
(13 450*)
3900
(8450)
2500
(5400)
2500
(5350)
4.5 (15)
3.0 (10)
8400*
(17 850*)
1.5 (5)
Ground Line
-1.5 (-5)
5300*
(11 850*)
7450
(15 950)
3850
(8300)
-3.0 (-10)
9850*
(22 250*)
7600
(16 300)
3900
(8450)
* Hydraulically Limited Capacities
DB84312,00000BE -19-31MAY12-1/1
4-6-11
081214
PN=266
Miscellaneous—Specifications
160GLC Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.60 m (8 ft. 6 in.); Bucket: 528 kg (1164 lb.); Shoe: 700 mm
(28 in.)
Ratings are at bucket lift hook, using standard
counterweight, situated on firm, level, uniform supporting
surface.
marked with an asterisk (*) are hydraulically-limited
capacities. Remaining figures are stability-limited
capacities.
Figures do not exceed 87 percent of hydraulic capacity
or 75 percent of weight needed to tip machine. Figures
Arm: 2.60 m (8 ft. 6 in.)
Bucket: 528 kg (1164 lb.)
Shoe: 700 mm (28 in.)
Power Dig: On
LIFTING OVER FRONT
Load Point Height
m (ft.)
Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation
1.5 (5)
3.0 (10)
4.5 (15)
6.0 (20)
6.0 (20)
2850*
4.5 (15)
3.0 (10)
4100*
(8900*)
3850*
(8400*)
5400*
(11 700*)
4400*
(9550*)
6800*
(14 650*)
4400
(9450)
5800*
(13 450*)
6800
(14 600)
4300
(9200)
4250
(9150)
8400*
(17 850*)
1.5 (5)
Ground Line
-1.5 (-5)
5300*
(11 850*)
9950*
(22 800*)
6700
(14 450)
-3.0 (-10)
9850*
(22 250*)
10 550*
(22 850*)
6800
(14 600)
LIFTING OVER SIDE
Load Point Height
m (ft.)
Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation
1.5 (5)
3.0 (10)
4.5 (15)
6.0 (20)
6.0 (20)
2850*
4100*
(8900*)
3000
(6400)
4550
(9800)
2850
(6150)
4200
(9100)
2700
(5800)
5800*
(13 450*)
4050
(8650)
2600
(5600)
2550
(5500)
4.5 (15)
3.0 (10)
8400*
(17 850*)
1.5 (5)
Ground Line
-1.5 (-5)
5300*
(11 850*)
7650
(16 400)
3950
(8550)
-3.0 (-10)
9850*
(22 250*)
7800
(16 700)
4050
(8700)
* Hydraulically Limited Capacities
DB84312,00000BF -19-31MAY12-1/1
4-6-12
081214
PN=267
Miscellaneous—Specifications
160GLC Lift Capacity—Arm: 3.10 m (10 ft. 2 in.); Bucket: 528 kg (1164 lb.); Shoe: 600
mm (24 in.)
Ratings are at bucket lift hook, using standard
counterweight, situated on firm, level, uniform supporting
surface.
marked with an asterisk (*) are hydraulically-limited
capacities. Remaining figures are stability-limited
capacities.
Figures do not exceed 87 percent of hydraulic capacity
or 75 percent of weight needed to tip machine. Figures
Arm: 3.10 m (10 ft. 2 in.)
Shoe: 600 mm (24
in.)
Bucket: 528 kg (1164 lb.)
Power Dig: On
LIFTING OVER FRONT
Load Point Height
m (ft.)
Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation
1.5 (5)
3.0 (10)
4.5 (15)
6.0 (20)
6.0 (20)
2950*
(6150*)
4.5 (15)
3400*
(7450*)
7.5 (25)
3.0 (10)
6950*
(14 800*)
4800*
(10 400*)
4000*
(8700*)
2900*
(5750*)
1.5 (5)
7100*
(17 200*)
6300*
(13 600*)
4300
(9250)
2950
(6350)
Ground Line
6400*
(14 750*)
6600
(14 200)
4150
(8900)
2900
(6200)
-1.5 (-5)
4700*
(10 550*)
9200*
(21 000*)
6500
(13 950)
4100
(8750)
-3.0 (-10)
8250*
(18 600*)
11 200*
(24 200*)
6500
(14 000)
4100
(8850)
8900*
(19 050*)
5850*
(12 300*)
-4.5 (-15)
LIFTING OVER SIDE
Load Point Height
m (ft.)
Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation
1.5 (5)
3.0 (10)
4.5 (15)
6.0 (20)
6.0 (20)
2950*
(6150*)
4.5 (15)
2950
(6300)
7.5 (25)
3.0 (10)
6950*
(14 800*)
4500
(9750)
2800
(6000)
1850
(4000)
1.5 (5)
7100*
(16 750)
4150
(8950)
2650
(5650)
1800
(3850)
Ground Line
6400*
(14 750*)
3900
(8400)
2500
(5400)
1750
(3700)
-1.5 (-5)
4700*
(10 550*)
7350
(15 750)
3800
(8200)
2450
(5250)
-3.0 (-10)
8250*
(18 600*)
7450
(15 950)
3850
(8250)
2450
(5300)
7700
(16 600)
4000
(8650)
-4.5 (-15)
* Hydraulically Limited Capacities
DB84312,00000C0 -19-31MAY12-1/1
4-6-13
081214
PN=268
Miscellaneous—Specifications
160GLC Lift Capacity—Arm: 3.10 m (10 ft. 2 in.); Bucket: 528 kg (1164 lb.); Shoe: 700
mm (28 in.)
Ratings are at bucket lift hook, using standard
counterweight, situated on firm, level, uniform supporting
surface.
marked with an asterisk (*) are hydraulically-limited
capacities. Remaining figures are stability-limited
capacities.
Figures do not exceed 87 percent of hydraulic capacity
or 75 percent of weight needed to tip machine. Figures
Arm: 3.10 m (10 ft. 2 in.)
Shoe: 700 mm (28
in.)
Bucket: 528 kg (1164 lb.)
Power Dig: On
LIFTING OVER FRONT
Load Point Height
m (ft.)
Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation
1.5 (5)
3.0 (10)
4.5 (15)
6.0 (20)
6.0 (20)
2950*
(6150*)
4.5 (15)
3400*
(7450*)
7.5 (25)
3.0 (10)
6950*
(14 800*)
4800*
(10 400*)
4000*
(8700*)
2900*
(5750*)
1.5 (5)
7100*
(17 200*)
6300*
(13 600*)
4400
(9500)
3050
(6550)
Ground Line
6400*
(14 750*)
6800
(14 600)
4250
(9150)
3000
(6400)
-1.5 (-5)
4700*
(10 550*)
9200*
(21 000*)
6650
(14 350)
4200
(9000)
-3.0 (-10)
8250*
(18 600*)
11 200*
(24 200*)
6700
(14 400)
4200
(9100)
8900*
(19 050*)
5850*
(12 300*)
-4.5 (-15)
LIFTING OVER SIDE
Load Point Height
m (ft.)
Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation
1.5 (5)
3.0 (10)
4.5 (15)
6.0 (20)
6.0 (20)
2950*
(6150*)
4.5 (15)
3000
(6500)
7.5 (25)
3.0 (10)
6950*
(14 800*)
4650
(10 000)
2900
(6200)
1900
(4100)
1.5 (5)
7100*
(17 200)
4250
(9200)
2700
(5850)
1850
(3950)
Ground Line
6400*
(14 750*)
4000
(8650)
2600
(5550)
1800
(3850)
-1.5 (-5)
4700*
(10 550*)
7550
(16 150)
3900
(8450)
2500
(5400)
-3.0 (-10)
8250*
(18 600*)
7650
(16 400)
3950
(8500)
2550
(5500)
7900
(17 000)
4100
(8900)
-4.5 (-15)
* Hydraulically Limited Capacities
DB84312,00000C1 -19-31MAY12-1/1
4-6-14
081214
PN=269
Miscellaneous—Specifications
180GLC Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.71 m (8 ft. 10 in.); Bucket: 600 kg (1323 lb.); Shoe: 600
mm (24 in.)
Ratings are at bucket lift hook, using standard
counterweight, situated on firm, level, uniform supporting
surface.
marked with an asterisk (*) are hydraulically-limited
capacities. Remaining figures are stability-limited
capacities.
Figures do not exceed 87 percent of hydraulic capacity
or 75 percent of weight needed to tip machine. Figures
Arm: 2.71 m (8 ft. 10 in.)
Shoe: 600 mm (24
in.)
Bucket: 600 kg (1323 lb.)
Power Dig: On
LIFTING OVER FRONT
Load Point Height
m (ft.)
Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation
1.5 (5)
3.0 (10)
4.5 (15)
6.0 (20)
6.0 (20)
7.5 (25)
4000*
(8850*)
4.5 (15)
4850*
(10 450*)
4400*
(9550*)
3.0 (10)
6550*
(14 050*)
5150*
(11 150*)
3800
(8150)
1.5 (5)
8200*
(17 700*)
5350
(11 500)
3700
(7950)
4350*
(10 150*)
8300
(17 850)
5200
(11 150)
3650
(7800)
Ground Line
-1.5 (-5)
4700*
(10 500*)
8300*
(18 950*)
8250
(17 650)
5100
(11 000)
-3.0 (-10)
8800*
(19 850*)
12 750*
(27 650*)
8300
(17 800)
5150
(11 100)
10 150*
(21 700*)
6900*
(14 600*)
-4.5 (-15)
LIFTING OVER SIDE
Load Point Height
m (ft.)
Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation
1.5 (5)
3.0 (10)
4.5 (15)
6.0 (20)
7.5 (25)
3750
(8000)
6.0 (20)
4.5 (15)
4850*
(10 450*)
3650
(7800)
3.0 (10)
5500
(11 850)
3450
(7450)
2350
(5000)
1.5 (5)
5100
(10 950)
3250
(7050)
2250
(4850)
4350*
(10 150*)
4850
(10 450)
3150
(6750)
2200
(4700)
Ground Line
-1.5 (-5)
4700*
(10 500*)
8300*
(18 950*)
4800
(10 300)
3100
(6600)
-3.0 (-10)
8800*
(19 850*)
9600
(20 550)
4850
(10 450)
3100
(6700)
9900
(21 300)
5050
(10 900)
-4.5 (-15)
* Hydraulically Limited Capacities
DB84312,00000C8 -19-31MAY12-1/1
4-6-15
081214
PN=270
Miscellaneous—Specifications
180GLC Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.71 m (8 ft. 10 in.); Bucket: 600 kg (1323 lb.); Shoe: 700
mm (28 in.)
Ratings are at bucket lift hook, using standard
counterweight, situated on firm, level, uniform supporting
surface.
marked with an asterisk (*) are hydraulically-limited
capacities. Remaining figures are stability-limited
capacities.
Figures do not exceed 87 percent of hydraulic capacity
or 75 percent of weight needed to tip machine. Figures
Arm: 2.71 m (8 ft. 10 in.)
Shoe: 700 mm (28
in.)
Bucket: 600 kg (1323 lb.)
Power Dig: On
LIFTING OVER FRONT
Load Point Height
m (ft.)
Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation
1.5 (5)
3.0 (10)
4.5 (15)
6.0 (20)
6.0 (20)
7.5 (25)
4000*
(8850*)
4.5 (15)
4850*
(10 450*)
4400*
(9550*)
3.0 (10)
6550*
(14 050*)
5150*
(11 150*)
3900*
(8350)
1.5 (5)
8200*
(17 700*)
5450
(11 700)
3800
(8150)
4350*
(10 150*)
8500
(18 200)
5300
(11 400)
3700
(8000)
Ground Line
-1.5 (-5)
4700*
(10 500*)
8300*
(18 950*)
8400
(18 000)
5250
(11 250)
-3.0 (-10)
8800*
(19 850*)
12 750*
(27 650*)
8450
(18 150)
5250
(11 350)
10 150*
(21 700*)
6900*
(14 600*)
-4.5 (-15)
LIFTING OVER SIDE
Load Point Height
m (ft.)
Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation
1.5 (5)
3.0 (10)
4.5 (15)
6.0 (20)
7.5 (25)
3800
(8150)
6.0 (20)
4.5 (15)
4850*
(10 450*)
3700
(7950)
3.0 (10)
5600
(12 050)
3550
(7600)
2400
(5150)
1.5 (5)
5200
(11 200)
3350
(7200)
2300
(4950)
4350*
(10 150*)
4950
(10 650)
3200
(6900)
2250
(4850)
Ground Line
-1.5 (-5)
4700*
(10 500*)
8300*
(18 950*)
4900
(10 500)
3150
(6750)
-3.0 (-10)
8800*
(19 850*)
9750
(20 950)
4950
(10 650)
3200
(6850)
10 100
(21 700)
5150
(11 100)
-4.5 (-15)
* Hydraulically Limited Capacities
DB84312,00000CF -19-31MAY12-1/1
4-6-16
081214
PN=271
Miscellaneous—Specifications
180GLC Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.71 m (8 ft. 10 in.); Bucket: 600 kg (1323 lb.); Shoe: 800
mm (32 in.)
Ratings are at bucket lift hook, using standard
counterweight, situated on firm, level, uniform supporting
surface.
marked with an asterisk (*) are hydraulically-limited
capacities. Remaining figures are stability-limited
capacities.
Figures do not exceed 87 percent of hydraulic capacity
or 75 percent of weight needed to tip machine. Figures
Arm: 2.71 m (8 ft. 10 in.)
Shoe: 800 mm (32
in.)
Bucket: 600 kg (1323 lb.)
Power Dig: On
LIFTING OVER FRONT
Load Point Height
m (ft.)
Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation
1.5 (5)
3.0 (10)
4.5 (15)
6.0 (20)
6.0 (20)
7.5 (25)
4000*
(8850*)
4.5 (15)
4850*
(10 450*)
4400*
(9550*)
3.0 (10)
6550*
(14 050*)
5150*
(11 150*)
3950
(8450)
1.5 (5)
8200*
(17 700*)
5550
(11 900)
3850
(8250)
4350*
(10 150*)
8600
(18 450)
5400
(11 550)
3800
(8100)
Ground Line
-1.5 (-5)
4700*
(10 500*)
8300*
(18 950*)
8500
(18 300)
5300
(11 400)
-3.0 (-10)
8800*
(19 850*)
12 750*
(27 650*)
8600
(18 450)
5350
(11 550)
10 150*
(21 700*)
6900*
(14 600*)
-4.5 (-15)
LIFTING OVER SIDE
Load Point Height
m (ft.)
Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation
1.5 (5)
3.0 (10)
4.5 (15)
6.0 (20)
7.5 (25)
3850
(8300)
6.0 (20)
4.5 (15)
4850*
(10 450*)
3750
(8100)
3.0 (10)
5650
(12 200)
3600
(7700)
2450
(5200)
1.5 (5)
5250
(11 350)
3400
(7300)
2350
(5050)
4350*
(10 150*)
5050
(10 850)
3250
(7000)
2300
(4900)
Ground Line
-1.5 (-5)
4700*
(10 500*)
8300*
(18 950*)
4950
(10 700)
3200
(6900)
-3.0 (-10)
8800*
(19 850*)
9900
(21 250)
5000
(10 800)
3250
(7000)
10 150*
(21 700*)
5200
(11 250)
-4.5 (-15)
* Hydraulically Limited Capacities
DB84312,00000D0 -19-31MAY12-1/1
4-6-17
081214
PN=272
Miscellaneous—Specifications
180GLC Lift Capacity—Arm: 3.21 m (10 ft. 6 in.); Bucket: 600 kg (1323 lb.); Shoe: 600
mm (24 in.)
Ratings are at bucket lift hook, using standard
counterweight, situated on firm, level, uniform supporting
surface.
marked with an asterisk (*) are hydraulically-limited
capacities. Remaining figures are stability-limited
capacities.
Figures do not exceed 87 percent of hydraulic capacity
or 75 percent of weight needed to tip machine. Figures
Arm: 3.21 m (10 ft. 6 in.)
Shoe: 600 mm (24
in.)
Bucket: 600 kg (1323 lb.)
Power Dig: On
LIFTING OVER FRONT
Load Point Height
m (ft.)
Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation
1.5 (5)
3.0 (10)
4.5 (15)
6.0 (20)
7.5 (25)
6.0 (20)
3450*
(7650*)
4.5 (15)
3900*
(8550*)
3350*
(6850*)
5850*
(12 600*)
4700*
(10 250*)
3800
(8200)
7650*
(16 500*)
5350
(11 550)
3700
(7950)
4700*
(10 900*)
8350
(17 900)
5200
(11 150)
3600
(7800)
3600
(7700)
3.0 (10)
8950*
(19 000*)
1.5 (5)
Ground Line
-1.5 (-5)
4000*
(8950*)
7450*
(17 000*)
8200
(17 600)
5100
(10 950)
-3.0 (-10)
7250*
(16 350*)
11 750*
(26 900*)
8200
(17 600)
5100
(10 950)
-4.5 (-15)
11 700*
(26 500*)
11 300*
(24 300*)
7700*
(16 500*)
LIFTING OVER SIDE
Load Point Height
m (ft.)
Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation
1.5 (5)
3.0 (10)
4.5 (15)
6.0 (20)
7.5 (25)
6.0 (20)
3450*
(7650*)
4.5 (15)
3700
(7950)
2450
(5200)
5600
(12 100)
3500
(7550)
2350
(5050)
5150
(11 150)
3300
(7100)
2250
(4850)
4700*
(10 900*)
4850
(10 500)
3150
(6750)
2150
(4650)
2150
(4600)
3.0 (10)
8950*
(19 000*)
1.5 (5)
Ground Line
-1.5 (-5)
4000*
(8950*)
7450*
(17 000*)
4750
(10 200)
3050
(6550)
-3.0 (-10)
7250*
(16 350*)
9450
(20 200)
4750
(10 250)
3050
(6550)
-4.5 (-15)
11 700*
(26 500*)
9700
(20 850)
4900
(10 600)
* Hydraulically Limited Capacities
DB84312,00000D1 -19-31MAY12-1/1
4-6-18
081214
PN=273
Miscellaneous—Specifications
180GLC Lift Capacity—Arm: 3.21 m (10 ft. 6 in.); Bucket: 600 kg (1323 lb.); Shoe: 700
mm (28 in.)
Ratings are at bucket lift hook, using standard
counterweight, situated on firm, level, uniform supporting
surface.
marked with an asterisk (*) are hydraulically-limited
capacities. Remaining figures are stability-limited
capacities.
Figures do not exceed 87 percent of hydraulic capacity
or 75 percent of weight needed to tip machine. Figures
Arm: 3.21 m (10 ft. 6 in.)
Shoe: 700 mm (28
in.)
Bucket: 600 kg (1323 lb.)
Power Dig: On
LIFTING OVER FRONT
Load Point Height
m (ft.)
Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation
1.5 (5)
3.0 (10)
4.5 (15)
6.0 (20)
7.5 (25)
6.0 (20)
3450*
(7650*)
4.5 (15)
3900*
(8550*)
3350*
(6850*)
5850*
(12 600*)
4700*
(10 250*)
3900
(8350)
7650*
(16 500*)
5500
(11 800)
3800
(8150)
4700*
(10 900*)
8500
(18 250)
5300
(11 400)
3700
(7950)
3650
(7850)
3.0 (10)
8950*
(19 000*)
1.5 (5)
Ground Line
-1.5 (-5)
4000*
(8950*)
7450*
(17 000*)
8350
(17 950)
5200
(11 150)
-3.0 (-10)
7250*
(16 350*)
11 750*
(26 900*)
8400
(18 000)
5200
(11 200)
-4.5 (-15)
11 700*
(26 500*)
11 300*
(24 300*)
7700*
(16 500*)
LIFTING OVER SIDE
Load Point Height
m (ft.)
Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation
1.5 (5)
3.0 (10)
4.5 (15)
6.0 (20)
7.5 (25)
6.0 (20)
3450*
(7650*)
4.5 (15)
3750
(8100)
2500
(5350)
5700
(12 300)
3550
(7700)
2400
(5150)
5250
(11 350)
3350
(7250)
2300
(4950)
4700*
(10 900*)
4950
(10 700)
3200
(6850)
2250
(4800)
2200
(4700)
3.0 (10)
8950*
(19 000*)
1.5 (5)
Ground Line
-1.5 (-5)
4000*
(8950*)
7450*
(17 000*)
4850
(10 450)
3100
(6700)
-3.0 (-10)
7250*
(16 350*)
9600
(20 600)
4850
(10 450)
3100
(6700)
-4.5 (-15)
11 700*
(26 500*)
9900
(21 250)
5000
(10 800)
* Hydraulically Limited Capacities
DB84312,00000D2 -19-31MAY12-1/1
4-6-19
081214
PN=274
Miscellaneous—Specifications
180GLC Lift Capacity—Arm: 3.21 m (10 ft. 6 in.); Bucket: 600 kg (1323 lb.); Shoe: 800
mm (32 in.)
Ratings are at bucket lift hook, using standard
counterweight, situated on firm, level, uniform supporting
surface.
marked with an asterisk (*) are hydraulically-limited
capacities. Remaining figures are stability-limited
capacities.
Figures do not exceed 87 percent of hydraulic capacity
or 75 percent of weight needed to tip machine. Figures
Arm: 3.21 m (10 ft. 6 in.)
Shoe: 800 mm (32
in.)
Bucket: 600 kg (1323 lb.)
Power Dig: On
LIFTING OVER FRONT
Load Point Height
m (ft.)
Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation
1.5 (5)
3.0 (10)
4.5 (15)
6.0 (20)
7.5 (25)
6.0 (20)
3450*
(7650*)
4.5 (15)
3900*
(8550*)
3350*
(6850*)
5850*
(12 600*)
4700*
(10 250*)
3950
(8500)
7650*
(16 500*)
5550
(11 950)
3850
(8250)
4700*
(10 900*)
8650
(18 500)
5400
(11 550)
3750
(8100)
3700
(8000)
3.0 (10)
8950*
(19 000*)
1.5 (5)
Ground Line
-1.5 (-5)
4000*
(8950*)
7450*
(17 000*)
8500
(18 200)
5300
(11 350)
-3.0 (-10)
7250*
(16 350*)
11 750*
(26 900*)
8500
(18 250)
5300
(11 350)
-4.5 (-15)
11 700*
(26 500*)
11 300*
(24 300*)
7700*
(16 500*)
LIFTING OVER SIDE
Load Point Height
m (ft.)
Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation
1.5 (5)
3.0 (10)
4.5 (15)
6.0 (20)
7.5 (25)
6.0 (20)
3450*
(7650*)
4.5 (15)
3800
(8200)
2550
(5400)
5800
(12 500)
3600
(7800)
2450
(5250)
5350
(11 500)
3400
(7350)
2350
(5050)
4700*
(10 900*)
5050
(10 850)
3250
(7000)
2250
(4850)
2250
(4800)
3.0 (10)
8950*
(19 000*)
1.5 (5)
Ground Line
-1.5 (-5)
4000*
(8950*)
7450*
(17 000*)
4950
(10 600)
3150
(6800)
-3.0 (-10)
7250*
(16 350*)
9750
(20 900)
4950
(10 650)
3150
(6800)
-4.5 (-15)
11 700*
(26 500*)
10 050
(21 500)
5100
(10 950)
* Hydraulically Limited Capacities
DB84312,00000D3 -19-31MAY12-1/1
4-6-20
081214
PN=275
Miscellaneous—Specifications
4-6-21
081214
PN=276
Index
Page
Page
A
Accessory
Electrical ................................................................ 4-1-7
Accessory power port ................................................ 2-1-4
Acid burns.................................................................. 3-7-4
Adjustment
Armrest ................................................................ 2-1-15
Belt tension ............................................................ 3-9-5
Seat...................................................................... 2-1-15
Track sag ............................................................... 3-3-2
Air
Intake hoses........................................................... 3-8-5
Air cleaner
Clean...................................................................... 3-9-6
Replace.................................................................. 3-9-6
Unloader valve .............................................3-3-1, 3-9-6
Air cleaner dust unloader
Replace.................................................................. 3-9-6
Air conditioner............................................................ 2-1-9
Air conditioner display ............................................... 2-2-1
Air filter
Cab fresh air
Clean .................................................................. 3-8-7
Cab recirculating air
Clean .................................................................. 3-8-7
Clean...................................................................... 3-9-6
Replace.................................................................. 3-9-6
Air suspension seat
Adjusting .............................................................. 2-1-16
Alternator ................................................................... 4-1-2
Arm
Grease ................................................................... 3-8-1
Lubricate ................................................................ 3-8-1
Arm regenerative valve
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-35
Armrest
Adjustment ........................................................... 2-1-15
Attachments
Adding safely ......................................................... 1-3-5
Operating safely..................................................... 1-3-5
Auto shutdown indicator ............................................ 2-2-1
Auto-idle circuit
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-21
Auto-idle indicator...................................................... 2-2-1
Auto-idle switch
Function ................................................................. 2-1-3
Auxiliary fuel filter and water separator
Drain ...................................................................... 3-5-2
Auxiliary fuel filter and water separator (if
equipped)
Replace.................................................................. 3-8-5
Auxiliary indicator ...................................................... 2-2-1
Avoid static electricity risk when fueling .................... 1-2-5
B
Back button................................................................ 2-1-3
Backhoe pattern
Control lever pattern check .................................. 4-2-25
Backover Accidents ................................................... 1-3-3
Batteries
Using battery charger............................................. 4-1-4
Battery
Acid burns .............................................................. 3-7-4
Booster batteries.................................................... 4-1-5
Electrolyte level check ........................................... 3-7-4
Explosion ............................................................... 3-7-4
Handling, checking, and servicing ......................... 4-1-3
Specification........................................................... 4-1-5
Terminals................................................................ 3-7-4
Before starting work................................................... 2-3-1
Belt
Tension adjust ........................................................ 3-9-5
Bleed
Fuel system............................................................ 4-1-1
Blower speed switch
Function ................................................................. 2-1-3
Bolt and screw torque values
Metric ................................................................... 4-1-16
Unified inch .......................................................... 4-1-15
Boom
Grease ................................................................... 3-8-1
Lubricate ................................................................ 3-8-1
Boom lower
With engine stopped ............................................ 2-3-20
Boom regenerative valve
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-34
Boom up, arm in, and bucket combined
function
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-33
Boost starting............................................................. 4-1-5
Break-In Plus engine oil............................................. 3-1-7
Breaker ...................................................................... 3-2-4
Bucket
Removal............................................................... 4-1-14
Tooth .................................................................... 4-1-13
Tooth replacement ................................... 4-1-11, 4-1-13
Bucket regenerative valve
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-36
Button
Horn ....................................................................... 2-1-4
Power dig ............................................................... 2-1-4
Power mode........................................................... 2-1-3
C
Cab dome light switch ............................................. 2-1-13
Cab fresh air filter
Clean...................................................................... 3-8-7
Continued on next page
Index-1
081214
PN=1
Index
Page
Page
Cab recirculating air filter
Clean...................................................................... 3-8-7
Celsius and Fahrenheit
Selecting .............................................................. 2-1-10
Charge air cooler
Cleaning................................................................. 4-1-1
Clock.......................................................................... 2-2-1
Change setting..................................................... 2-2-16
Cold weather
Starting................................................................... 2-3-4
Cold weather start aid................................................ 2-3-4
Console
Adjust height ........................................................ 2-1-16
Console height
Adjusting .............................................................. 2-1-16
Control lever
Pattern conversion ............................................... 2-3-17
Control lever pattern
Conversion........................................................... 2-3-18
Operation ............................................................. 2-3-16
Control lever pattern check - backhoe pattern
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-25
Control lever pattern check - excavator
pattern
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-24
Control pattern........................................................... 1-2-2
Control valve lift check valve
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-32
COOL-GARD II test strips ......................................... 3-3-4
Coolant
Add coolant extender ...................................3-3-4, 3-9-7
Additional information .......................................... 3-1-16
Check...........................................................3-3-4, 3-9-7
Diesel engine
Engine with wet sleeve cylinder liners.............. 3-1-13
Disposing ............................................................. 3-1-17
John deere COOL-GARD II coolant extender...... 3-1-14
Sample................................................................... 3-8-7
Supplemental additives........................................ 3-1-15
Test ..............................................................3-3-4, 3-9-7
Testing.................................................................. 3-1-17
Warm temperature climates................................. 3-1-15
Coolant level
Surge tank.............................................................. 3-4-2
Coolant temperature gauge....................................... 2-2-1
Coolant temperature mark......................................... 2-2-1
Cooling system
Cleaning................................................................. 4-1-1
Deaeration ........................................................... 3-12-2
Drain .................................................................... 3-12-1
Fill ........................................................................ 3-12-2
Service safely......................................................... 1-4-1
Coupler, hydraulic
Locking................................................................. 2-3-13
Lubricate ................................................................ 3-4-4
Unlocking ............................................................. 2-3-15
Cover
Engine.................................................................... 3-2-3
Crusher...................................................................... 3-2-4
Cycle times check
Operational check ....................................4-2-41, 4-2-43
Cylinder ..................................................................... 4-1-2
D
Daily machine check.................................................. 2-3-1
Date
Change setting..................................................... 2-2-16
Decals
Safety................................................................... 1-5-14
Default screen ........................................................... 2-2-1
Diagnose malfunctions
Troubleshooting procedure .................................... 4-3-1
Diagnostic trouble code check
Operational check .................................................. 4-2-1
Diesel fuel........................................................3-1-1, 3-1-3
Sample................................................................... 3-8-7
Specifications......................................................... 3-1-1
Diesel fuel specifications ........................................... 3-1-1
Diesel fuel, testing
Testing Diesel Fuel................................................. 3-1-4
Dig function drift
Operational check ....................................4-2-29, 4-2-30
Display and clear trouble codes
Operational check .................................................. 4-2-1
Display unit
Software update menu......................................... 2-3-11
Dome light
Switch .................................................................. 2-1-13
Door
Engine access........................................................ 3-2-3
Drain and refill
Capacities
160GLC and 180GLC......................................... 4-6-2
Drain Intervals for Diesel Engine Coolant
Diesel Engine Coolant, Drain Intervals ................ 3-1-14
Driving
Slopes .................................................................. 2-3-19
E
E (economy) mode
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-19
Electrical
System ................................................................... 4-1-8
System, troubleshooting ........................................ 4-3-7
Engine
160GLC Specifications IT4 .................................... 4-6-1
180GLC Specifications IT4 .................................... 4-6-1
Break-in.................................................................. 2-3-2
Cold weather warmup ............................................ 2-3-5
Crankcase vent filter ............................................ 3-10-1
Oil drain and refill ................................................... 3-8-6
Oil filter, replace ..................................................... 3-8-6
Oil level check........................................................ 3-4-1
Continued on next page
Index-2
081214
PN=2
Index
Page
Page
Oil specification
Break-In Plus...................................................... 3-1-7
Starting................................................................... 2-3-3
Troubleshooting ..................................................... 4-3-2
Valve lash............................................................. 3-10-1
Warming................................................................. 2-3-3
Engine coolant
Disposing of ......................................................... 3-1-17
Engine cover.............................................................. 3-2-3
Engine oil
Sample................................................................... 3-7-6
Engine oil and filter service intervals
Interim tier 4, final tier 4, stage IIIB, and
stage IV
0.12 L/kW or greater oil pan ............................... 3-1-9
Engine preheat indicator............................................ 2-2-1
Engine serial number................................................. 4-5-1
Engine speed dial ...................................................... 2-1-3
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-18
Engine valve lash
Check and adjust ................................................. 3-10-1
Enginel
Oil specification
IT4 and Stage III B ............................................. 3-1-8
Excavator pattern
Control lever pattern check .................................. 4-2-24
Exhaust filter.............................................................. 1-2-7
Ash removal .................................................2-3-8, 3-3-5
Auto cleaning ......................................................... 2-3-7
Disable ............................................................. 2-2-18
Enable .............................................................. 2-2-18
Cleaning types ....................................................... 2-3-7
Information ............................................................. 2-3-7
Natural/passive cleaning........................................ 2-3-7
Parked cleaning ..................................................... 2-3-7
Parked cleaning procedure .................................... 2-3-9
Parked cleaning switch .......................................... 2-1-7
Restriction levels.................................................... 2-3-7
Scheduled maintenance ........................................ 3-3-5
Exhaust filter indicator ............................................... 2-2-1
Exhaust filter parked cleaning switch ........................ 2-1-7
Exhaust Filter, Safety
Safety, Exhaust Filter ............................................. 1-4-3
Fire prevention........................................................... 1-2-5
Fluid analysis test kit ................................................. 3-2-4
Fluid sample
Taking samples ...................................................... 4-1-6
Fuel
Diesel ...........................................................3-1-1, 3-1-3
Handling and storing .............................................. 3-1-2
Lubricity.................................................................. 3-1-2
Fuel cooler
Cleaning................................................................. 4-1-1
Fuel filter
Drain ...................................................................... 3-5-2
Replace, final ......................................................... 3-8-4
Replace, primary.................................................... 3-8-3
Fuel Filters
Filters, Fuel ............................................................ 3-1-4
Fuel gauge................................................................. 2-2-1
Operational check .................................................. 4-2-3
Fuel mark................................................................... 2-2-1
Fuel system
Bleed...................................................................... 4-1-1
Fuel tank.................................................................... 3-2-3
Fuel tank inlet screen
Remove and clean ................................................. 3-3-1
Fuel tank sump
Drain ...................................................................... 3-5-1
Fuse
Color codes............................................................ 4-1-8
Replacing ............................................................... 4-1-8
F
Fan reversing switch
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-17
Filter
Hydraulic tank oil.................................................... 3-9-2
Pilot oil
Replace .............................................................. 3-9-3
Filters, Oil
Oil Filters................................................................ 3-1-9
Final fuel filter
Drain ...................................................................... 3-5-2
Replace.................................................................. 3-8-4
Fire extinguisher ...................................................... 2-1-12
G
Grease
Boom...................................................................... 3-8-1
Bucket ..........................................................3-6-1, 3-8-1
Extreme pressure and multipurpose .................... 3-1-12
Front end pin joints ................................................ 3-8-1
Specification......................................................... 3-1-12
Swing bearing gear ................................................ 3-8-2
Working tool pivots................................................. 3-6-1
H
Hardware torque values
Metric ................................................................... 4-1-16
Unified inch .......................................................... 4-1-15
Hazards
Avoiding ................................................................. 1-3-2
Heated seat (if equipped) .......................................... 2-1-6
Heater........................................................................ 2-1-9
Heater and air conditioner controls check
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-46
Heater and air conditioning circuit check
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-45
High pressure fuel
Pump...................................................................... 4-1-2
Home button .............................................................. 2-1-3
Continued on next page
Index-3
081214
PN=3
Index
Page
Page
Horn........................................................................... 2-1-4
Horn circuit
Operational check .................................................. 4-2-2
Hour meter.......................................................2-2-1, 3-2-1
Operational check .................................................. 4-2-3
HP (high power) mode
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-20
Hydraulic
Breaker .................................................................. 3-2-4
Oil level check........................................................ 3-4-3
Shutoff lever........................................................... 2-1-5
System troubleshooting ......................................... 4-3-5
Hydraulic coupler
Locking................................................................. 2-3-13
Lubricate ................................................................ 3-4-4
Unlocking ............................................................. 2-3-15
Hydraulic coupler serial number ................................ 4-5-3
Hydraulic oil
Specification......................................................... 3-1-10
Hydraulic oil tank pressurization
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-24
Hydraulic tank
Drain ...................................................................... 3-7-2
Vent cap filter
Replace ............................................................ 3-11-3
Hydraulic tank oil
Drain and refill...................................................... 3-11-1
filter
replace................................................................ 3-9-2
I
Identification
Manual ........................................................................ -3
Injection
Nozzle .................................................................... 4-1-2
J
JDLink........................................................................ 4-1-7
JDLink in-line fuse
Unswitched power.................................................. 4-1-8
Jump starting ............................................................. 4-1-5
K
Key switch
Function ................................................................. 2-1-3
Key switch off, engine off
Operational check .................................................. 4-2-1
Key switch on, engine off
Operational check .................................................. 4-2-3
Key switch on, engine on
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-14
Keypad
Function ................................................................. 2-1-3
L
Left console
Reversing fan switch.............................................. 2-1-6
Seat heater switch (if equipped) ............................ 2-1-6
Switches................................................................. 2-1-5
Travel alarm cancel switch..................................... 2-1-5
Lever
Left control ........................................................... 2-3-16
Pilot shutoff ............................................................ 2-1-5
Right control......................................................... 2-3-16
Steering.................................................................. 2-3-6
Levers
Location ................................................................. 2-1-1
Lift capacity
160GLC
Arm: 2.60 m (8 ft. 6 in.);Bucket: 528 kg
(1164 lb.);Shoe: 600 mm (24 in.).................... 4-6-11
Arm: 2.60 m (8 ft. 6 in.);Bucket: 528 kg
(1164 lb.);Shoe: 700 mm (28 in.).................... 4-6-12
Arm: 3.10 m 10 ft. 2 in.);Bucket: 528 kg
(1164 lb.);Shoe: 600 mm (24 in.).................... 4-6-13
Arm: 3.10 m 10 ft. 2 in.);Bucket: 528 kg
(1164 lb.);Shoe: 700 mm (28 in.).................... 4-6-14
180GLC
Arm: 2.71 m 8 ft. 10 in.);Bucket: 600 kg
1323 lb.);Shoe: 600 mm (24 in.)..................... 4-6-15
Arm: 2.71 m 8 ft. 10 in.);Bucket: 600 kg
1323 lb.);Shoe: 700 mm (28 in.)..................... 4-6-16
Arm: 2.71 m 8 ft. 10 in.);Bucket: 600 kg
1323 lb.);Shoe: 800 mm (32 in.)..................... 4-6-17
Arm: 3.21 m 10 ft. 6 in.);Bucket: 600 kg
1323 lb.);Shoe: 600 mm (24 in.)..................... 4-6-18
Arm: 3.21 m 10 ft. 6 in.);Bucket: 600 kg
1323 lb.);Shoe: 700 mm 28 in.)...................... 4-6-19
Arm: 3.21 m 10 ft. 6 in.);Bucket: 600 kg
1323 lb.);Shoe: 800 mm 32 in.)...................... 4-6-20
Lifting ....................................................................... 2-3-19
Machine ............................................................... 2-3-23
Lifting objects
Special care ........................................................... 1-3-4
Light circuit
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-10
Lower boom
With engine stopped ............................................ 2-3-20
Lubricant
Mixing..................................................................... 3-1-6
Lubricant Storage
Storage, Lubricant.................................................. 3-1-6
Lubricants, Safety
Safety, Lubricants .................................................. 3-1-6
Lubricate
Boom...................................................................... 3-8-1
Bucket ..........................................................3-6-1, 3-8-1
Front end pin joints ................................................ 3-8-1
Swing bearing gear ................................................ 3-8-2
Working tool pivots................................................. 3-6-1
Continued on next page
Index-4
081214
PN=4
Index
Page
Page
Lubricity of diesel fuel ................................................ 3-1-2
Auxililary indicator .................................................. 2-2-1
Back button ............................................................ 2-1-3
Clock ...................................................................... 2-2-1
Coolant temperature gauge ................................... 2-2-1
Coolant temperature mark ..................................... 2-2-1
Default screen........................................................ 2-2-1
Dial......................................................................... 2-1-3
Engine preheat indicator ........................................ 2-2-1
Exhaust filter indicator............................................ 2-2-1
Fuel gauge ............................................................. 2-2-1
Fuel mark ............................................................... 2-2-1
Functions ............................................................... 2-2-2
Home button .......................................................... 2-1-3
Hour meter ............................................................. 2-2-1
Information menu ................................................. 2-2-23
Maintenance..................................................... 2-2-25
Monitoring......................................................... 2-2-26
Operation.......................................................... 2-2-24
Troubleshooting................................................ 2-2-25
Main menu ............................................................. 2-2-4
Power mode indicator ............................................ 2-2-1
Radio.................................................................... 2-2-13
Radio display ......................................................... 2-2-1
Seat belt indicator .................................................. 2-2-1
Setting menu........................................................ 2-2-15
Attachment name input .................................... 2-2-16
Auto shutdown.................................................. 2-2-17
Brightness adjustment...................................... 2-2-21
Date and time ................................................... 2-2-16
Display item selection....................................... 2-2-21
Exhaust filter..................................................... 2-2-18
Language ......................................................... 2-2-21
Main menu sequence change .......................... 2-2-22
Rear view camera monitor ............................... 2-2-20
Sub meter selection.......................................... 2-2-19
Unit selection.................................................... 2-2-22
Start-up .................................................................. 2-2-3
Sub meter
Breaker hour consumption ................................. 2-2-1
Fuel consumption ............................................... 2-2-1
Travel speed indicator............................................ 2-2-1
Work mode........................................................... 2-2-14
Work mode indicator .............................................. 2-2-1
Monitor and gauge circuit
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-15
Monitor dial ................................................................ 2-1-3
Monitor functions ....................................................... 2-2-2
Monitor start-up
Operational check .................................................. 4-2-4
Monitor, gauges and battery relay
Operational check .................................................. 4-2-5
Motor ......................................................................... 4-1-2
M
Machine
Clean regularly....................................................... 4-1-7
Lifting ................................................................... 2-3-23
Machine modifications
Avoid ...................................................................... 1-2-2
Machine movement
Unintended............................................................. 1-3-1
Machine number
Hydraulic pump ...................................................... 4-5-3
Machine specifications
160GLC.................................................................. 4-6-3
180GLC.................................................................. 4-6-5
Machine tip over
Avoiding ................................................................. 1-3-4
Machine,inspect......................................................... 1-2-3
Main menu................................................................. 2-2-4
Air conditioner ...................................................... 2-2-11
Information menu ................................................. 2-2-23
Maintenance..................................................... 2-2-25
Monitoring......................................................... 2-2-26
Operation.......................................................... 2-2-24
Troubleshooting................................................ 2-2-25
Radio.................................................................... 2-2-13
Setting menu........................................................ 2-2-15
Attachment name input .................................... 2-2-16
Auto shutdown.................................................. 2-2-17
Brightness adjustment...................................... 2-2-21
Date and time ................................................... 2-2-16
Language ......................................................... 2-2-21
Main menu sequence change .......................... 2-2-22
Unit selection.................................................... 2-2-22
Work mode........................................................... 2-2-14
Main Menu
Alarm list ................................................................ 2-2-5
Setting menu
Display item selection....................................... 2-2-21
Exhaust filter..................................................... 2-2-18
Rear view camera monitor ............................... 2-2-20
Sub meter selection.......................................... 2-2-19
Maintenance
Machine position .................................................... 3-2-2
Schedule and record.............................................. 3-2-5
Manual
Identification................................................................ -3
Mechanical suspension seat
Adjusting .............................................................. 2-1-15
Metric bolt and screw torque values ........................ 4-1-16
Mixing lubricants........................................................ 3-1-6
Monitor....................................................................... 2-2-1
Air conditioner ...................................................... 2-2-11
Air condtioner display............................................. 2-2-1
Alarm list ................................................................ 2-2-5
Auto shutdown indicator......................................... 2-2-1
Auto-idle indicator .................................................. 2-2-1
O
Oil
Change attachment................................................ 3-2-4
Engine filter ............................................................ 3-8-6
Continued on next page
Index-5
081214
PN=5
Index
Page
Page
Engine sample ....................................................... 3-7-6
Engine, level .......................................................... 3-4-1
Filter hydraulic........................................................ 3-9-2
Hydraulic sample ................................................... 3-8-7
Hydraulic specification ......................................... 3-1-10
Pump drive gear case drain and refill .................... 3-9-4
Pump drive gear case specification ..................... 3-1-11
Swing gear case specification.............................. 3-1-11
Travel gear case drain and refill........................... 3-10-1
Travel gear case specification ............................. 3-1-11
Oil cooler
Cleaning................................................................. 4-1-1
Oil level
Hydraulic ................................................................ 3-4-3
Oil, engine
IT4 and Stage III B ................................................. 3-1-8
Open crankcase ventilation (OCV) hose
Clean...................................................................... 3-9-4
Operation qualification............................................... 1-2-1
Operational check
Arm regenerative valve ........................................ 4-2-35
Auto-idle circuit .................................................... 4-2-21
Boom regenerative valve ..................................... 4-2-34
Boom up, arm in, and bucket combined function.. 4-2-33
Bucket regenerative valve.................................... 4-2-36
Control lever pattern check - backhoe pattern ..... 4-2-25
Control lever pattern check - excavator pattern ... 4-2-24
Control valve lift check valve................................ 4-2-32
Cycle times check ....................................4-2-41, 4-2-43
Diagnostic trouble code check ............................... 4-2-1
Dig function drift .......................................4-2-29, 4-2-30
Display and clear trouble codes............................. 4-2-1
E (economy) mode............................................... 4-2-19
Engine speed dial ................................................ 4-2-18
Fan reversing switch ............................................ 4-2-17
Fuel gauge ............................................................. 4-2-3
Heater and air conditioner controls check............ 4-2-46
Heater and air conditioning circuit check ............. 4-2-45
Horn circuit............................................................. 4-2-2
Hour meter ............................................................. 4-2-3
HP (high power) mode ......................................... 4-2-20
Hydraulic oil tank pressurization .......................... 4-2-24
Key switch off, engine off ....................................... 4-2-1
Key switch on, engine off ....................................... 4-2-3
Key switch on, engine on ..................................... 4-2-14
Light circuit........................................................... 4-2-10
Monitor and gauge circuit..................................... 4-2-15
Monitor start-up...................................................... 4-2-4
Monitor, gauges and battery relay.......................... 4-2-5
Pilot shutoff circuit................................................ 4-2-16
PWR (standard) mode ......................................... 4-2-19
Rear camera .......................................................... 4-2-7
Swing dynamic braking ........................................ 4-2-26
Swing park brake and circuit drift......................... 4-2-27
Swing power check .............................................. 4-2-28
Swing priority circuit ............................................. 4-2-31
Travel alarm ......................................................... 4-2-22
Travel alarm cancel switch circuit ........................ 4-2-23
Travel lever and pedal ........................................... 4-2-9
Travel speed selection ......................................... 4-2-37
Travel system maneuverability ............................ 4-2-40
Travel system tracking ......................................... 4-2-38
Travel system tracking while operating a
dig function......................................................... 4-2-39
Windshield washer circuit .................................... 4-2-14
Windshield washer control ................................... 4-2-12
Windshield wiper circuit ....................................... 4-2-13
Windshield wiper controls .................................... 4-2-11
Operator conveniences ............................................. 1-1-1
Operator's station ...................................................... 2-1-1
P
Panels
Location ................................................................. 2-1-1
Parked cleaning
Operation ............................................................... 2-3-9
Parking machine...................................................... 2-3-21
Parts, moving
Stay clear ............................................................... 1-2-3
Pattern conversion
Control ................................................................. 2-3-18
Control levers....................................................... 2-3-17
Pedal
Location ................................................................. 2-1-1
Steering.................................................................. 2-3-6
Periodic maintenance chart ....................................... 3-2-1
Pilot control lever
Adjust height ........................................................ 2-1-16
Pilot oil filter
Replace.................................................................. 3-9-3
Pilot shutoff circuit
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-16
Pilot shutoff lever .............................................1-3-1, 2-1-5
Pins, metal
Drive safely ............................................................ 1-4-2
Power dig
Button..................................................................... 2-1-4
Power mode button
Function ................................................................. 2-1-3
Power mode indicator................................................ 2-2-1
Pre-start inspection.................................................... 2-3-1
Primary fuel filter
Drain ...................................................................... 3-5-1
Replace.................................................................. 3-8-3
Product identification number .................................... 4-5-1
Pump
Service ................................................................... 4-1-2
Pump drive
Gear case oil drain and refill .................................. 3-9-4
Gear case oil level ................................................. 3-7-3
Pump drive gear case
Sample................................................................... 3-8-7
Pump drive gear case oil
Specification......................................................... 3-1-11
Continued on next page
Index-6
081214
PN=6
Index
Page
Page
PWR (standard) mode
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-19
Safety, Avoid High-Pressure Fluids
Avoid High-Pressure Fluids ................................... 1-2-3
Safety, information
Recognize .............................................................. 1-2-1
Sample ports
Fluid sample........................................................... 4-1-6
Schedule
Periodic maintenance ............................................ 3-2-5
Seat
Adjustment ........................................................... 2-1-15
Air suspension ..................................................... 2-1-16
Seat belt indicator...................................................... 2-2-1
Seat heater switch (if equipped) ................................ 2-1-6
Secondary exit
Window ................................................................ 2-1-13
Secondary exit tool .................................................. 2-1-12
Selecting display
Celsius and Fahrenheit ........................................ 2-1-10
Serial number ............................................................ 4-5-1
Hydraulic coupler ................................................... 4-5-3
Hydraulic pump ...................................................... 4-5-3
Swing motor ........................................................... 4-5-2
Travel motor........................................................... 4-5-2
Service ADVISOR™
Switch .................................................................... 2-1-8
Service ADVISOR Remote
Overview .............................................................. 2-3-10
Reprogramming ................................................... 2-3-10
Terms and conditions ................................................ -13
Service ADVISOR™ remote (SAR) switch................ 2-1-8
Service intervals ........................................................ 3-2-5
Shoe
Cap screw inspection............................................. 3-6-2
Slopes
Driving up............................................................. 2-3-19
Software update
Download and installation .................................... 2-3-11
Specification
Fuel tank ................................................................ 3-2-3
Grease ................................................................. 3-1-12
Hardware torque .................................................. 4-1-14
Hydraulic oil ......................................................... 3-1-10
Pump drive gear case oil ..................................... 3-1-11
Swing gear case oil.............................................. 3-1-11
Travel gear case oil.............................................. 3-1-11
Specifications
160GLC engine, IT4 engine................................... 4-6-1
180GLC engine, IT4 engine................................... 4-6-1
Starting engine .......................................................... 2-3-3
Steering
Machine ................................................................. 2-3-6
Steps
Use correctly
Handholds .......................................................... 1-3-1
Storage
Machine ................................................................. 4-4-1
Monthly .................................................................. 4-4-2
Storing fuel ................................................................ 3-1-2
R
Radiator
Cleaning................................................................. 4-1-1
Radio
Operation ............................................................. 2-1-11
Power and volume switch ...................................... 2-1-3
Settings ................................................................ 2-2-13
Tuning switch ......................................................... 2-1-3
Radio display ............................................................. 2-2-1
Radio power and volume switch
Function ................................................................. 2-1-3
Radio tuning switch
Function ................................................................. 2-1-3
Rear camera
Clean lens .............................................................. 3-3-3
Operational check .................................................. 4-2-7
Rear left panel ........................................................... 2-1-4
Rear view camera
Operation ............................................................. 2-2-20
Recognize
Safety, information ................................................. 1-2-1
Refueling, avoid static electricity risk......................... 1-2-5
Regulator ................................................................... 4-1-2
Required Parts........................................................... 3-2-7
Reversing fan switch ................................................. 2-1-6
Riding machine.......................................................... 1-3-2
Right console
Exhaust filter parked cleaning switch..................... 2-1-7
Right enable switch................................................ 2-1-7
Service ADVISOR™ remote (SAR) switch ............ 2-1-8
Switches................................................................. 2-1-6
Right enable switch ................................................... 2-1-7
Right pilot control lever
Enable switch......................................................... 2-1-7
Roof exit cover......................................................... 2-1-15
ROPS
Inspect ................................................................... 1-3-3
Maintain ................................................................. 1-3-3
S
Safety
Add cab guarding for special uses...............1-2-1, 1-2-2
Caution decals ....................................................... 1-5-1
Clean debris from machine .................................... 1-2-7
Operator's seat ...................................................... 1-3-1
Protective equipment ............................................. 1-2-2
Warning decals ...................................................... 1-5-1
Safety features .......................................................... 1-1-1
Safety hazards
Travel ..................................................................... 1-3-5
Safety signs
Hydraulic coupler ................................................. 1-5-14
Continued on next page
Index-7
081214
PN=7
Index
Page
Page
Sub meter
breaker hour consumption ..................................... 2-2-1
Fuel consumption................................................... 2-2-1
Surge tank
Coolant level check................................................ 3-4-2
Swing
Area cleaning ....................................................... 2-3-19
Gear case oil level check ....................................... 3-7-1
Swing bearing gear
Grease ................................................................... 3-8-2
Lubricate ................................................................ 3-8-2
Swing dynamic braking
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-26
Swing gear case
Oil drain and refill ................................................... 3-9-1
Swing gear case oil
Drain and refill........................................................ 3-9-1
Sample................................................................... 3-8-7
Specification......................................................... 3-1-11
Swing motor serial number........................................ 4-5-2
Swing park brake and circuit drift
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-27
Swing power check
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-28
Swing priority circuit
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-31
Switch
Auto-idle................................................................. 2-1-3
Blower speed ......................................................... 2-1-3
Exhaust filter parked cleaning switch..................... 2-1-7
Key......................................................................... 2-1-3
Left console............................................................ 2-1-5
Reversing fan......................................................... 2-1-6
Right console ......................................................... 2-1-6
Right enable switch................................................ 2-1-7
Seat heater (if equipped) ....................................... 2-1-6
Service ADVISOR™ remote (SAR) ....................... 2-1-8
Temperature control/mode ..................................... 2-1-3
Travel alarm cancel................................................ 2-1-5
Travel speed .......................................................... 2-1-3
Windshield wiper and washer ................................ 2-1-3
Work light ............................................................... 2-1-3
Switch panel .............................................................. 2-1-2
Auto-idle switch...................................................... 2-1-3
Back button ............................................................ 2-1-3
Blower speed switch .............................................. 2-1-3
Engine speed dial .................................................. 2-1-3
Functions ............................................................... 2-1-3
Home button .......................................................... 2-1-3
Key switch.............................................................. 2-1-3
Keypad................................................................... 2-1-3
Monitor dial ............................................................ 2-1-3
Power mode button................................................ 2-1-3
Radio power and volume switch ............................ 2-1-3
Radio tuning switch................................................ 2-1-3
Temperature control/mode switch .......................... 2-1-3
Travel speed switch ............................................... 2-1-3
Windshield wiper and washer switch ..................... 2-1-3
Work light switch .................................................... 2-1-3
T
Table
Periodic maintenance ............................................ 3-2-5
Temperature control/mode switch
Function ................................................................. 2-1-3
Time
Change setting..................................................... 2-2-16
Tip over
Avoiding ................................................................. 1-3-4
Tool
Secondary exit ..................................................... 2-1-12
Torque charts
Metric ................................................................... 4-1-16
Unified inch .......................................................... 4-1-15
Towing machine....................................................... 2-3-23
Track
Sag....................................................................... 4-1-14
Sag adjustment ...................................................... 3-3-2
Sag check .............................................................. 3-3-2
Shoe cap screw hardware ................................... 4-1-14
Shoe, cap screw torque ......................................... 3-6-2
Transport
Loading machine.................................................. 2-3-22
Unloading machine .............................................. 2-3-22
Travel alarm............................................................... 2-1-5
Cancel switch......................................................... 2-1-5
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-22
Travel alarm cancel switch ........................................ 2-1-5
Travel alarm cancel switch circuit
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-23
Travel gear case
Oil drain and refill ................................................. 3-10-1
Oil level .................................................................. 3-7-6
Sample................................................................... 3-8-7
Travel gear case oil
Specification......................................................... 3-1-11
Travel lever and pedal
Operational check .................................................. 4-2-9
Travel motor serial number........................................ 4-5-2
Travel speed indicator ............................................... 2-2-1
Travel speed selection
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-37
Travel speed switch
Function ................................................................. 2-1-3
Travel system maneuverability
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-40
Travel system tracking
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-38
Travel system tracking while operating a dig
function
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-39
Troubleshooting
Electrical system .................................................... 4-3-7
Engine.................................................................... 4-3-2
Hydraulic system.................................................... 4-3-5
Continued on next page
Index-8
081214
PN=8
Index
Page
Page
Troubleshooting procedure........................................ 4-3-1
Welding...................................................................... 4-1-6
Welding repairs.......................................................... 1-4-2
Window
Cab ...................................................................... 2-1-14
Lower front ........................................................... 2-1-14
Secondary exit ..................................................... 2-1-13
Windshield washer circuit
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-14
Windshield washer control
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-12
Windshield washer fluid............................................. 3-3-1
Windshield wiper and washer switch
Function ................................................................. 2-1-3
Windshield wiper circuit
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-13
Windshield wiper controls
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-11
Work light switch
Function ................................................................. 2-1-3
Work mode indicator.................................................. 2-2-1
Work site hazards
Avoid ...................................................................... 1-3-2
Working ranges
160GLC.................................................................. 4-6-7
180GLC.................................................................. 4-6-9
U
Unified inch bolt and screw torque values ............... 4-1-15
Unloader valve
Air cleaner.............................................................. 3-3-1
Air cleaner, replace ................................................ 3-9-6
V
Valve
Air cleaner dust unloader ....................................... 3-3-1
Control ................................................................... 4-1-2
W
Warranty
Non-road emissions control warranty
statement--compression ignition
CARB ...................................................................... -8
EPA ......................................................................... -6
Water separator
Drain ...................................................................... 3-5-1
Replace.................................................................. 3-8-3
Index-9
081214
PN=9
Index
Index-10
081214
PN=10
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising